Eni Completion Procedures Manual

S P E O ORGANIZING TYPE OF ISSUING DOC. REF. N. PAG.
1
Eni S.p.A. DEPARTMENT ACTIVITY' DEPT. TYPE
E&P Division OF 269

STAP P 1 M 7120
TITLE
COMPLETION PROCEDURES MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION LIST
Eni E & P Division Italian District

Eni - E & P Division Affiliated Companies
Eni - E & P Division Headquarter Drilling & Production Optimization Services Units
STAP Archive
Eni - E & P Division Headquarter Subsurface Geology Units
Eni - E & P Division Headquarter Reservoir Units
Eni - E & P Division Headquarter Coordination Units for Italian Activities
Eni - E & P Division Headquarter Coordination Units for Foreign Activities
NOTE: The present document is available in Eni-E&P Intranet (http://wwwdsc.in.agip.it/drilling/)

and a CD-Rom version can also be distributed (requests will be addressed to STAP Dept.
in Eni E&P Division Headquarter)
Date of issue: 30-06-2003
"
$ P. Magarini C. Lanzetta F. Trilli

13/06/03 13/06/03 13/06/03
% Issued by: M. Bassanini C. Lanzetta A. Galletta
28/06/99 31/10/02 31/10/02
REVISIONS PREP'D CHK'D APPR'D
The present document is CONFIDENTIAL and it is the property of Eni.

It shall not be shown to third parties nor shall it be used for reasons different from those owing to which it was given.
S P E O IDENTIFICATION CODE PAG 2 OF 269
Eni S.p.A.
E&P Division REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
INDEX
1. INTRODUCTION 11
1.1 Purpose of the manual 11
1.2 implementation 11
1.3 Updating, Amendment, Control & Derogation 11
2. RESPONSIBILITIES 12
2.1 Well Operations Manager 12
2.2 Well Operations Superintendent 12
2.3 Completion and Workover Engineer 13
2.4 Fluids Specialist 14
2.5 Offshore Installation Manager (OIM) 14
2.6 Well Operations Supervisor 15
2.7 Production Supervisor 16
3. DOCUMENTATION 17
3.1 Preliminary Information 17
3.2 Wellsite Reports 17
3.3 Feed Back Reports 17
3.4 Other Reports 18
3.5 Permit Procedures 18
3.5.1 GUIDANCE FOR PERMITS 18
3.6 Well Handover Procedures 18
3.6.1 WELL HANDOVER CERTIFICATE 19
3.6.2 WELL INTERVENTION HANDOVER CERTIFICATE 20
4. HOLE PREPARATIONS 25
4.1 Preliminary checks 25
4.2 Well Clean Up Procedures 25
4.3 BOP Stack Configuration and testing 26
4.4 Well control 26
4.5 Oil Based Mud Displacement 26
4.5.1 DISPLACEMENT OBJECTIVES 27
4.5.2 LOGISTICAL CONSIDERATIONS 27
4.5.3 DRILLING FLUID PREPARATION 27
4.5.4 SURFACE EQUIPMENT PREPARATION 28
4.5.5 WELL CLEAN UP PILL SEQUENCE 29
4.5.6 PILL FUNCTIONS 29
4.5.7 PIT REQUIREMENTS 29
4.5.8 PUMPING SEQUENCE 30
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4.6 Displacement Of Water Based Muds 30

4.6.1 DRILLING FLUID PREPARATION 30
4.6.2 SURFACE EQUIPMENT PREPARATION 30
4.6.3 WELL CLEAN UP PILL SEQUENCE 30
4.6.4 PILL FUNCTIONS 31
4.6.5 PIT REQUIREMENTS 31
4.6.6 PUMPING SEQUENCE 31
4.7 COMPLETION AND WORKOVER FLUIDS 31
4.7.1 BRINES TRANSPORTATION 31
4.7.2 COMPLETION AND WORKOVER FLUID QUALITY 32
4.8 FILTRATION SYSTEMS 32
4.8.1 FLUID CLEANLINESS 32
4.9 LOST CIRCULATION 33
4.9.1 VISCOUS PILLS 33
4.9.2 SIZED SALT PILLS 33
4.9.3 CALCIUM CARBONATE PILLS 34
4.10 Casing Gauge Control 35
5. PERFORATING PROCEDURES 36
5.1 GENERAL 36
5.2 Methods of Perforating 37
5.3 General SAFETY Procedures 38
5.4 WIRELINE CONVEYED PERFORATING 39
5.4.1 CASING GUNS RUN IN OVERBALANCE 39
5.4.2 PERFORATING PROCEDURES FOR THROUGH TUBING CONVEYED GUNS 40
5.5 SAFE SYSTEM 41
5.5.1 GENERAL 41
5.5.2 SAFE SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (SLAPPER ACTIVATED FIRING EXPLOSIVES) 42
5.6 TCP Procedures 42
5.6.1 WELL PREPARATION FOR TCP OPERATIONS 43
5.6.2 ANCILLARY TCP EQUIPMENT 43
5.6.3 FIRING SYSTEMS FOR TCP OPERATIONS 45
5.6.4 GENERAL TCP SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND RUNNING PROCEDURES 46
5.6.5 FIRING PROCEDURE FOR TUBING INSTALLED PRESSURE ACTIVATED HEAD 47
5.6.6 FIRING PROCEDURE FOR WIRELINE INSTALLED PRESSURE ACTIVATED HEAD
47
5.6.7 FIRING PROCEDURE FOR MECHANICAL IMPACT ACTIVATED HEAD 47
5.6.8 FIRING PROCEDURE FOR ELECTRICALLY ACTIVATED TCP GUNS 48
5.6.9 PROCEDURE FOR TCP ANCHOR RUNNING 49
5.6.10 TCP ANCHOR FIRING HEAD INSTALLATION 50
5.7 Coiled Tubing Gun Deployment 53
5.7.1 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS 53
5.7.1.1 Connector 53
5.7.1.2 BOP Deployment Stack 54
5.7.1.3 Gate Valves 54
5.7.2 GUN DEPLOYMENT 54
5.7.3 JOB PREPARATION 54
5.7.3.1 Running in hole general procedure 55
5.7.4 FIRING SYSTEMS FOR COILED TUBING GUN DEPLOYMENT 58
5.7.4.1 Coiled tubing pressure activated firing head 58
5.7.4.2 Coiled tubing hydraulically activated firing head 58
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5.7.4.3 Coiled tubing electronic firing head 58

5.7.5 PULLING OUT OF HOLE PROCEDURE 59
5.8 MISFIRE PROCEDURES 59
5.8.1 MECHANICAL FIRING HEAD 59
5.8.2 HYDRAULIC FIRING HEAD 61
5.8.3 FIXED HYDRAULIC FIRING HEAD 61
5.8.4 RETRIEVABLE HYDRAULIC FIRING HEAD 61
5.8.5 COILED TUBING PERFORATING 61
6. GRAVEL PACKING PROCEDURES 62

6.1 Gravel Placement Objectives 62
6.2 Screen Size 62
6.3 Gravel Calculations 63
6.3.1 SAND VOLUME REQUIRED 63
6.3.2 CARRIER FLUID VOLUME 64
6.4 Common Gravel pack procedures 64
6.5 Open hole Gravel Pack Procedure 64
6.6 Cased hole gravel pack Procedure 67
7. PACKER INSTALLATION 72
7.1 HOLE Preparation 72
7.2 Wireline Packer setting procedure 72
7.2.1 RUNNING PROCEDURE 73
7.3 Tubing Installed Packer Setting Procedure 74
7.3.1 WORKSTRING RUNNING PROCEDURE 74
7.3.2 COMPLETION STRING RUNNING PROCEDURE 75
8. COMPLETION INSTALLATION 76
8.1 Carbon Steel and Plastic Coated Tubing 76
8.2 Chrome Tubulars 76
8.2.1 TRANSPORTATION 76
8.2.2 TRANSPORT FROM THE MILL 76
8.2.3 ROAD TRANSPORT 77
8.2.4 MARINE TRANSPORT 77
8.2.5 HANDLING AT THE WELLSITE 77
8.2.6 THREAD COMPOUNDS 78
8.2.7 RUNNING CHROME TUBULARS 79
8.2.8 RETRIEVING CHROME TUBULARS 80
8.3 Equipment Pre-installation Procedures 81
8.3.1 MATERIAL REQUISITION LISTS 81
8.3.2 COMPLETION SUB ASSEMBLIES 82
8.3.3 TUBING HANGER 82
8.3.4 LANDING JOINT 82
8.3.5 CONTROL LINE 83
8.3.6 XMAS TREE 83
8.3.7 FLOWLINE 83
8.4 COMPLETION ASSEMBLIES 83
8.4.1 WORKSHOP MAKE-UP AND TEST PROCEDURES 83
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8.4.2 SUB-SURFACE SAFETY VALVES 84

8.4.3 WIRELINE NIPPLE ASSEMBLIES 85
8.4.4 SIDE POCKET MANDRELS 85
8.5 COMPLETION RUNNING PROCEDURES 85
8.5.1 GENERAL 85
8.5.2 RUNNING PROCEDURE 86
8.5.3 TUBING RETRIEVABLE SCSSV INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 87
8.5.4 WIRE LINE RETRIEVABLE SCSSV INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 88
8.6 Christmas tree 89
8.6.1 GENERAL 89
8.6.2 CHRISTMAS TREE NEW DESIGN 89
8.6.2.1 Compact Wellhead and Solid Block Tree 90
8.6.2.2 Quick Connectors 90
8.6.3 CHRISTMAS TREE COMPONENTS 90
8.6.3.1 Tubing Head Spool 90
8.6.3.2 Tubing Hanger 90
8.6.3.3 Tubing Head Adapter 91
8.6.4 CHRISTMAS TREE CONFIGURATION 91
8.6.5 GATE VALVE 92
8.6.5.1 Slab gate (Floating Seal) 93
8.6.5.2 Expanding Gate 93
8.6.6 SURFACE SAFETY VALVE (ACTUATORS) 96
8.6.6.1 Hydraulic Actuator 96
8.6.6.2 Pneumatic Actuator 97
8.6.6.3 Fail safe close feature 97
8.6.6.4 Fail Safe close/ Wire cutting features 98
8.6.7 CHOKE 98
8.6.8 CHRISTMAS TREE INSTALLATION 99
8.6.8.1 Installation Procedures 99
8.6.9 POST COMPLETION TEST PROCEDURES 100
8.6.9.1 SCSSV Test Procedure 100
8.6.9.2 X-mas Tree Valve Test Procedure 100
9. GAS LIFT INSTALLATION 102

9.1 Mandrel Installation 102
9.1.1 SPM INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 102
9.1.2 GAS LIFT VALVE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 104
9.2 Unloading Procedure 105
9.3 Troubleshooting 105
10. DOWNHOLE PUMP INSTALLATION 106

10.1 Electrical Submersible pumps 106
10.1.1 HANDLING 106
10.1.2 INSTALLATION 106
10.1.3 PULLING PROCEDURE 110
10.1.4 TROUBLESHOOTING 110
10.2 Rod pumps 113
10.2.1 COMPLETION INSTALLATION 113
10.2.2 TUBING STRING INSTALLATION 113
10.2.3 ROD INSTALLATION 115
10.3 Hydraulic PumpS 115
10.3.1 JET PUMP 116
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
10.3.2 TURBINE PUMP 118

10.3.3 PISTON PUMP 118
11. SUBSEA COMPLETIONS 119

11.1 SUBSEA EQUIPMENT PRE-DEPLOYMENT TESTING 119
11.1.1 GUIDEWIRE ESTABLISHMENT TOOL 120
11.1.2 GUIDEWIRE LATCHESS 120
11.1.3 DIVERLESS GUIDEPOSTS 120
11.1.4 CASING HANGER ELEVATION TEST TOOL 120
11.1.5 TUBING HANGER SYSTEM 121
11.1.6 TUBING HANGER RUNNING/ORIENTATION TOOLS 123
11.1.7 TUBING HANGER VERIFICATION TOOL 126
11.1.8 TUBING HANGER ISOLATION PLUGS 127
11.1.9 SUBSEA TREE AND WORKOVER EQUIPMENT 127
11.1.10 INSTALL THE LRP/TRT ONTO THE XT 132
11.1.11 PRODUCTION RISER 135
11.1.12 SURFACE XMAS TREE 135
11.2 DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES 135
11.2.1 RUNNING THE COMPLETION AND TUBING HANGER 135
11.2.2 PULL THE DRILLING BOPS 137
11.3 WORKOVER AND PRODUCTION CONTROLS SYSTEM PRE-DEPLOYMENT TESTING 137
11.3.1 WORKOVER CONTROLS EQUIPMENT 137
11.3.2 PRODUCTION CONTROLS EQUIPMENT 138
11.3.3 WOCS PRE-DEPLOYMENT TESTING 140
11.3.4 PRODUCTION CONTROLS PRE-DEPLOYMENT TESTING 142
11.3.5 FUNCTION TEST USING SEM B 146
11.3.6 PRESSURE TEST TREE VALVES 149
11.4 Running The Subsea Xmas Tree 154
11.4.1 UNPLUGGING THE WELL 154
11.4.2 PERFORATING AND WELL CLEAN-UP 155
11.5 Pulling The LRP 155
11.5.1 DISCONNECT THE LRP AND TREE RUNNING TOOL 155
11.6 Deployment Of The Tree Cap 156
11.7 DEPLOYMENT AFTER COMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES 156
12. WELL UNLOADING 157

12.1 Unloading BY cirCulation 157
12.2 Unloading BY Bullheading 158
12.3 Unloading BY Coiled tubing 159
13. COILED TUBING OPERATIONS 160

13.1 PREPARATION 160
13.2 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 160
13.2.1 TUBING 161
13.2.2 RISERS AND BOPS 161
13.2.3 H2S CONSIDERATIONS 162
13.3 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 162
13.4 RIG UP PROCEDURES 163
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
13.4.1 EQUIPMENT PREPARATION AND SITING 163

13.4.2 COILED TUBING RIG-UP 163
13.4.3 PRESSURE TESTING 164
13.4.4 TREATING LINES 166
13.4.5 INJECTOR FRAME 166
13.4.6 RIGGING DOWN 166
13.5 RUNNING PROCEDURES 167
13.6 OPERATING PROCEDURES 167
13.6.1 GAS LIFTING 167
13.6.2 WELL TREATMENT 169
13.6.3 SAND CLEANOUT 171
14. NITROGEN PROCEDURES 173

14.1 Preparation 173
14.2 Safety Considerations 173
14.3 Nitrogen Handling 174
14.3.1 SAFETY EQUIPMENT 174
14.3.2 SAFETY DATA SHEETS 175
14.3.3 PRESSURISED LINES 175
14.4 Rig-Up Procedures 175
14.4.1 EQUIPMENT PREPARATION AND SITING 175
14.4.2 EQUIPMENT RIG-UP 175
14.4.3 PRESSURE TESTING 176
14.4.4 TREATING LINES 176
14.4.5 RIGGING DOWN 176
14.5 Nitrogen Treatment Procedures 177
14.5.1 PRESSURES 177
14.5.2 PUMP RATES 177
14.5.3 COILED TUBING GAS LIFT 177
14.5.4 NITROGEN CUSHION - TUBING CONVEYED PERFORATION 178
14.5.5 NITRIFIED TREATMENT 178
14.6 NITROGEN TECHNICAL INFORMATION 179
14.7 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES (During Nitrogen Operations) 179
14.7.1 PRODUCTION SHUTDOWN 179
14.7.2 GENERAL PLATFORM ALARM 179
14.7.3 PREPARE TO ABANDON PLATFORM 180
14.7.4 LIQUID NITROGEN SPILL 180
15. FORMATION DAMAGE AND INTERVENTION PROCEDURES 181

15.1 INTRODUCTION 181
15.2 main Causes of Formation Damage 181
15.2.1 DAMAGE ASSOCIATED WITH FOREIGN FLUID FILTRATE 181
15.2.1.1 FORMATION particles migration 182
15.2.1.2 REDUCED RELATIVE PERMEABILITY. 183
15.2.1.3 INCREASED FLUID VISCOSITY. 183
15.2.2 SCALE DEPOSITION 183
15.2.2.1 Introduction. 183
15.2.2.2 Causes of Scale Deposition. 184
15.2.2.3 Prediction and Identification of Scale. 186
15.2.3 ASPHALTENE PLUGGING 186
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.3 DIAGNOSIS OF FORMATION DAMAGE. 186

15.4 formation DAMAGE REDUCTION 187
15.4.1 USE OF SURFACTANTS FOR WELL TREATMENTS 187
15.4.1.1 Formation Damage Susceptible to Surfactant treatment. 188
15.4.1.2 Susceptibility to Surfactant-Related Damage. 189
15.4.1.3 Well Stimulation with Surfactants. 190
15.4.2 PREVENTION OF PLUGGING ASSOCIATED WITH SOLIDS 191
15.4.3 SCALE REMOVAL AND PREVENTION 191
15.4.3.1 Mechanical Methods. 191
15.4.3.2 Water-Soluble Scale. 191
15.4.3.3 Acid-Soluble Scale 192
15.4.3.4 Acid-insoluble Scales 192
15.4.3.5 Chemically Inert Scales 192
15.4.3.6 Scale Prevention. 192
15.4.4 ACID STIMULATION 193
15.4.4.1 Factors Affecting Acid Reaction 193
15.4.4.2 Matrix and Fracture Acidizing 194
15.4.4.3 Acids Used in Well Stimulation. 195
15.4.4.4 Acid Additives. 198
15.4.4.5 Carbonate Acidizing. 200
15.4.4.6 Fracture Etching in Homogeneous Carbonates. 203
15.4.4.7 Sandstone Acidizing 205
15.4.4.8 Stimulation of Gas Wells, Gas Injection Wells and Water Injection Wells 208
15.4.4.9 In-Situ HF Generating System 208
15.4.4.10 fluoboric Acid 208
15.4.4.11 Potential Safety Hazard in Acidizing 209
15.5 STIMULATION PROCEDURES 209
15.5.1 INTRODUCTION 209
15.5.2 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 209
15.5.2.1 Chemical Handling 210
15.5.2.2 Pressure 211
15.5.3 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 211
15.5.4 RIG-UP PROCEDURES 212
15.5.4.1 Equipment Preparation and Siting 212
15.5.4.2 Equipment Rig-Up 212
15.5.4.3 Pressure Testing 213
15.5.4.4 Treating Lines 213
15.5.4.5 Rigging Down 213
15.5.5 TREATMENT PROCEDURES 213
15.5.5.1 Matrix Acidising 214
15.5.5.2 Fracture Acidising 214
15.5.5.3 Acid Wash 214
15.5.5.4 Scale Dissolver 215
15.5.5.5 Bullhead 215
15.5.5.6 Coiled Tubing 215
15.5.5.7 Asphaltene and Wax/Dissolvers 215
16. SNUBBING/PULLING UNIT 216

16.1 snubbing unit 216
16.2 pulling unit 217
16.3 workover PREPARATION 217
16.4 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 218
16.5 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 219
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
16.6 Snubbing Unit Rig up Procedures 220

16.6.1 EQUIPMENT PREPARATION 224
16.6.2 SNUBBING UNIT RIG-UP 224
16.6.3 BOP STACK AND EXTENSION PRESSURE TEST 224
16.7 operational considerations for a live well 225
16.7.1 INTRODUCING A WORKING STRING INSIDE THE XMAS TREE 226
16.7.2 PULLING A WORKING STRING OUT OF XMAS TREE 227
16.7.3 EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN (ESD) 227
16.7.4 OPERATIONS IN GAS WELLS 227
16.7.5 H2S CONSIDERATIONS 228
16.8 pulling the completion string out of hole 228
16.8.1 SNUBBING UNIT OPERATION 228
16.8.2 PULLIG UNIT OPERATION 229
17. WORKOVER 230

17.1 introduction 230
17.2 CONDITIONS REQUIRING A WORKOVER 230
17.2.1 MECHANICAL PROBLEMS 230
17.2.2 RESERVOIR PROBLEMS 230
17.2.3 WELL CONVERSION 230
17.3 WORKOVER PLANNING 231
17.3.1 TYPES OF POSSIBLE WORKOVERS 231
17.3.1.1 Recompletion 231
17.3.1.2 Hole Cleaning 231
17.3.1.3 Perforated Interval Partialization, exclusion or changement 231
17.3.1.4 Production Casing Reconditioning 232
17.3.1.5 Sand Control 233
17.3.2 WELL ANALYSIS 233
17.3.2.1 Analysis of Well Productivity History 233
17.3.2.2 Actual Well Status 234
17.3.2.3 Reservoir Prognosis 234
17.3.2.4 Logistic Problems Evaluation 234
17.3.2.5 Rig Selection Criteria 234
17.3.2.6 Economics 235
17.4 WELL OPERATIONS programme preparation 235
17.4.1 WELL KILLING 235
17.4.1.1 Killing Fluid Selection 235
17.4.1.2 Well Killing Procedures 236
17.4.1.3 Killing Single Completion with Packer 237
17.4.1.4 Killing Dual Completion 238
17.4.1.5 Killing Single Completion without packer 238
17.4.1.6 Fluid Loss Control 238
17.4.2 CHRISTMAS TREE REMOVAL (X-MAS TREE) 239
17.4.2.1 X-mas tree with tubing made up to tubing hanger 240
17.4.3 COMPLETION PULL OUT 240
17.4.3.1 Single completion with retrievable packer 241
17.4.3.2 Single completion with PERMANENT packer 242
17.4.3.3 Dual completion 242
17.4.4 PARTIALIZATION - LEVEL CHANGE 243
17.4.4.1 Partialization 243
17.4.4.2 Level Change 244
17.4.5 REMEDIAL JOB TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 245
17.4.5.1 Trough tubing Bridge Plug. 245
17.4.5.2 Sand Plug. 245
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.4.5.3 Casing Patch 245

17.4.5.4 Cement Squeeze 245
17.4.6 FISHING AND MILLING 246
17.4.6.1 Fishing 247
17.4.6.2 Milling 252
APPENDIX:
APPENDIX A (Reporting Forms) 254
APPENDIX B (Abbreviations) 264
APPENDIX C (Bibliography) 269

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

The purpose of the Completion Procedures Manual is to guide technicians and engineers,
involved in Drilling & Completion activities, through the Procedures and the Technical
Specifications for general completion operations which are part of the Company Standards.
Such Company Standards define the requirements, methodologies and rules that enable the
USER to operate uniformly and in compliance with the Company Principles.
The final aim is to improve performance and efficiency in terms of safety, quality and costs,
while providing all personnel involved in Drilling & Completion activities with common
guidelines in all areas where the Company operates.
It is intended to guide users towards using procedures which have been found to provide the
most efficient and cost effective operations.
1.2 IMPLEMENTATION
The guideline and policies specified herein will be applicable to all completion activities.
All engineers engaged in completion activities are expected to make themselves familiar with
the contents of this manual and be responsible for compliance to its policies and procedures.
1.3 UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION

This manual is a live controlled document and, as such, it will only be amended and
improved by the Company in accordance with the development of Company operational
experience. Accordingly, it will be the responsibility of everyone concerned in the use and
application of this manual to review the policies and related procedures on an ongoing basis.
Derogations from the manual shall be approved solely in writing by the local Company Well
Operations Manager after the local Company Manager and the Corporate Drilling &
Production Optimisation Services Standards Department in Eni E&P Division Head Office
have been advised in writing.
The Corporate Drilling & Production Optimisation Services Standards Department will
consider such approved derogations for future amendments and improvements of the
Corporate manual, when the updating of the document will be advisable.
Feedback for manual amendment is also gained from the return of completed Feedback
and Reporting Forms from well operations (refer to Appendix A page 254).
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
2. RESPONSIBILITIES
The following job descriptions outline the individual responsibilities and duties of specific key
personnel involved in Completion operations. These are generalised summary of the
individual responsibilities and duties which are specific to completion operations and as such
augment, but do not supersede their current employers approved job descriptions.
2.1 WELL OPERATIONS MANAGER

The Company Well Operations Manager reports directly to the Company Manager and
supervises the Well Operations Superintendent, Completions and Workover Superintendent,
Drilling Engineering/Completions and Workover Engineering.
His duties include the following:
Ensuring the definition of scope of work and requisitioning of drilling and
completion/workover contracts are correctly processed by the contracts
department and approved first by the Company Manager, in order to comply with
time schedule, quality and technical conditions as defined in the programme.
Ensuring the pre-qualification and technical tender evaluation phases comply
with Company policies and procedures and to provide the Contracts department
with all technical details necessary for a thorough commercial evaluation.
Approving the completions programmes, ensuring they fully meet the prognosis
target, pursuing the best results in terms of safety, time schedule and cost
effectiveness.
Managing day-to-day completions operations, co-ordinating the activities of
contractors and units/positions involved, in order to guarantee that operations
meet the company policies and standards.
Controlling operational costs and provides the technical approval for invoice
payment. Verifies the consistency of the expenditure with AFEs and with the
administration validity of the contracts.
Liaising, timely and effectively, with the regulatory bodies in order to obtain
consent for well related operations.
Instituting, monitoring and reviewing completions safety policies within the Safety
Management System, in order to maximise effectiveness and safety of the
operations.
2.2 WELL OPERATIONS SUPERINTENDENT

The Well Operations Superintendent reports to the Well Operations Manager and supervises
rig site supervisors.
Ensuring operational progress follows the approved well programme and
provides technical advice to the rig site on a daily basis, as required.
Ensuring the correct scheduling of completion materials and services, provides a
timely supply to the rigs while optimising the cost of transport, materials and
manpower within established programmes and budgets.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Administering service contracts, providing the technical control of contractor

performance giving the first authorisation to the payment of invoices and
ensuring the control of current total expenditure on each contract.
Ensuring that operations comply with current legislation and company standards.
Preparing scopes of work and technical specification for services to be tendered
and review those for services and equipment.
Providing technical advice during pre-qualification and tender evaluation phases,
in order to ensure that the selection of contractors and suppliers fully meet
technical targets and company standards.
Providing timely and accurate requisitions for all services and materials relevant
to well operations.
Ensuring, in liaison with AQS, the correct interface of the Contractors
procedures are to Company policies and procedures.
Ensuring simultaneous completion and production procedures are reviewed.
2.3 COMPLETION AND WORKOVER ENGINEER

He reports to the Well Operations Manager and his duties include the following:
Preparing and reviewing technical specifications and scopes of work for
equipment to be tendered and services for completion, workover, wireline and
well testing operations.
Co-operating with the Well Operations Superintendent for providing advice
during pre-qualification and tender evaluation phases, in order to ensure that the
selection of contractors and suppliers fully meet technical targets and company
standards.
Supplying well cost estimates for future operations budgets and current
operations AFEs, ensuring the reliability of the data provided.
Contributing, in liaison with the Petroleum Engineer and with the Reservoir
Engineers, to the planning of development projects, providing technical input to
the project teams, in order to optimise cost and effectiveness of the project.
Monitoring, in liaison with the Petroleum Engineer and with the Reservoir
Engineers, the performance of wells and reservoirs, in order to provide technical
expertise and advice for identifying and initiating enhancements to well potential.
Appraising new completion, workover, wireline and well testing technology and
products to determine their application completion operations, in order to improve
time cost performance and safety conditions.
Preparing and reviewing completion, workover, wireline and well testing
programmes and final reports and to ensure the production of adequate
feedback about the operations as per the Safety Management System corporate
requirements.
Reviewing daily the operations versus the programme, providing a thorough
investigation of operational times.
Providing engineering assistance to the Well Operations Superintendent in the
follow up of operations.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Providing reports and analysis on the operated and non-operated activities for
presentation, meetings and reporting to the management and to ensure the
operational feedback reporting system is consistent with Corporate requirements.
Assisting his supervisor in contacts with partners and regulatory bodies providing
the necessary documentation and reports.
Providing the monthly updates on the variance between actual and estimated
expenditures for each job centre for each class of cost, also to liaise with the
Completion/Workover Superintendent, in order to update the expenditure on
each contract.
Ensuring the production and review of the Completion Procedure Manual in order
to comply with company policies and the current legislation.
2.4 FLUIDS SPECIALIST

He reports to the Well Operations Manager for routine operational matters.
Preparing technical specifications for tenders.
Advising on pre-qualifications and tender evaluations exercises.
Preparing programmes ensuring the compliance with regulatory requirements.
Ensuring the compilation of final fluids reports and the feedback documents
relevant to the activities under his scope of work.
Maintaining up to date knowledge of the technical and regulatory evolutions for
the activities under his scope of work.
Liaising with logistics department for ensuring the provision of services,
transportation and materials to well site.
Liaise with the appropriate service companies and suppliers on a daily basis.
2.5 OFFSHORE INSTALLATION MANAGER (OIM)

If applicable, his duties include the following:
Reporting directly to Asset Operations Manager.
Co-ordinating and supervising all operations on the installation. The senior
representatives for each discipline are responsible for the activities of their own
discipline and must keep the OIM informed on their own respective operations.
The Production Supervisor will keep the OIM informed on the status of
production operations.
Authorise all work permits in accordance with the Permit to Work System, and
will ensure countersignature by the Well Operations Supervisor, or other
Discipline Heads.
For completion operations, he will delegate responsibility to the Well Operations
Supervisor or another Company Representative (e.g. Production Supervisor) as
dictated by asset ownership or control at the time of the ongoing operations.
Is responsible for the actions to be followed under the various installation
operating modes. The OIM will require advice from the Well
Operations/Production Supervisor or other Discipline Heads, e.g. Maintenance
Supervisor, etc.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
2.6 WELL OPERATIONS SUPERVISOR

He represents Companys interests on the installation with respect to the Drilling Contractor
and Service Companies.
The Senior Well Operations Supervisor is directly responsible for the drilling and completion
equipment and all operations conducted during the drilling completion and workover phase.
Ensuring all Company policies relating to drilling and completing operations and
emergency situations are adhered to at all times for the safety of personnel, rig
equipment, well stability and control.
Directing the Drilling Contractor and Service Company representatives in the
operations to be performed and supervises the conduct of the operations.
Ensuring all operations, detailed in the Drilling and Completion Programme, are
performed efficiently and safely using the procedures detailed in the programme
and/or Completion Procedures Manual.
Responsibility for the Hot Permit System when hot work is being conducted in
the drilling module.
Requisitioning the equipment and materials required to complete the operations.
He will requisition the materials when appropriate and liaise with the Completion
and Workover Superintendent to ensure arrival at the rig-site in ample time to
allow inspection and preparation prior to use.
Ensuring all tools are suitable for purpose, inspected and dressed prior to
running in the well.
Introducing changes to the Drilling and Completion Programme but only in an
emergency or when operating conditions do not allow for communication with the
Drilling and completion Workover Department.
Ensuring all reports required are accurate in content and are submitted as
required. Reporting requirements are outlined in section 3.
Liaising with the OIM, Company Production Supervisor, and other operational
Heads on a daily basis to discuss operational considerations and the possible
impact on the other operations.
Supervising and directs well control operations in accordance with the Well
Control Policy Manual (STAP-P-1-M-6150).
Liaising with the OIM to give advice on what actions to take, if any of the Platform
Operating Modes are associated with the drilling operation, or arise from
operations in the drilling module.
On completion of the programme, i.e. Xmas tree is secured with all operations
completed, officially handing over the well to the Production Department
(Production Supervisor). Both parties must sign the relevant well handover
document.
Co-ordinating all completion activities including wireline and/or coil
tubing/nitrogen, acid stimulation, perforating as well as all preliminary pressure
testing of equipment.
Ensuring the safe and correct installation of all tubulars and completion sub-
assembly components, i.e. in the correct order and proper depth as per the
completion programme.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
2.7 PRODUCTION SUPERVISOR

He reports to the Company Production Superintendent (Office).
Representing Companys interests on the platform with respect to production,
and when dealing with service companies involved with operations during the
production phase.
Ensuring that, during heavy lift operations such as handling Xmas trees etc.,
neighbouring wells are closed-in to minimise risk to wellheads, flowlines,
production equipment, the platform and personnel.
Informing the Well Operations Supervisor, OIM and other Discipline Heads on
the status of the production operations and the possible impact on other
operations in general.
Prior to a workover being carried out, handing the well over to Drilling/Completion
(Well Operations Supervisor) stating the exact condition of the well. Both parties
must sign the handover document.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
3. DOCUMENTATION
This section outlines the documentation necessary for conducting efficient completion
operations and reporting of these operations.
3.1 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Before performing any well operations the following documentation and information must be
available:
A detailed programme including:
Name of Field
Name of Well
Well Code
Well Co-ordinates (wellhead and bottom hole)
Cost Centre Number
RKB Elevation
Completion String Schematic (completion components ID, length, tubing
size/weight, depths, etc.)
Intervals to be perforated
Specifications of Completion Equipment.
3.2 WELLSITE REPORTS

To schedule future operational programmes, all operations must be properly documented
and kept on file to maintain the history of operations performed on any well.
The operations performed during rig operations (completion string gauging, packer setting,
etc.) will be reported in the Daily Well Report. This and other service reports for gravel
packing, stimulation and other well operations are shown in Appendix A page 254.
It is responsibility of the Well Operations Supervisor to compile and forward the reports
(indicated below) to the Well Operations Superintendent. The Superintendent will then check
and approve the reports before distribution and filing.
3.3 FEED BACK REPORTS

The following reports are compiled at the end of the operations:
a) FB-01 Report on Equipment Damage and Malfunctions
b) FB-02 Service Company Evaluation Report
Refer to Appendix A page 254 for copies of appropriate reports.

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
3.4 OTHER REPORTS

The Company Representative must sign the Service Reports of the Service Companies
which must include the following information:
Name of Well
Name of Field
Order Number
Date
Personnel and equipment used
Description of the operations conducted
Starting and completion dates for service company charges.
3.5 PERMIT PROCEDURES

No work can be performed without a valid permit to work. All requirements as laid out in the
Company Permit to Work Procedures must be adhered to at all times. Although the
operation of a permit system is the responsibility of the installation manager, safe operating
practice is compulsory and the responsibility of all personnel involved in completion
operations.
The Permit to Work System is drawn up in accordance with standard Oil Industry practices in
order to improve safety during all phases of operations. All personnel involved in completion
operations should clearly understand the particular installation Permit to Work System, and
be aware that job safety cannot be guaranteed only by the issuing of a permit.
As each installation will have its own distinct PTW system according to the type of
installation, location and country, it is not possible to describe a generic system in this
manual.
3.5.1 Guidance For Permits

Examples of activities which require permits to work (hot and cold) must listed in Permit to
Work Procedures. Those activities not normally requiring a work permit must also be listed.
It should be stressed however, that some of these activities will be brought within the Permit
to Work System from time to time as circumstances dictate. It remains the responsibility of
the Area Authority to ensure that the correct permits and certificates are in force during all
phases of operations. The responsibilities of those individuals involved in the administration
of the Permit to Work System should be clearly defined in the Permit to Work Procedures.
3.6 WELL HANDOVER PROCEDURES

Operations performed on a well will be the responsibility of a designated Area Authority.
The Well Operations Supervisor will be the responsible person for drilling, completion,
workover, wireline, coiled tubing, and stimulation operations. The Production Supervisor will
be the responsible person for production operations.
The Production Supervisor will be the competent person during Xmas tree repairs or
change-outs even when these works are performed by maintenance personnel with the
assistance of a vendor service engineer.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
The action of transferring the responsibility for a well between area authorities will be
documented and recorded on the Well Handover Certificate or Well Intervention Handover
Certificate. All preparatory work and the status of the well when handed over will be
described in the appropriate Handover Certificate.
A typical example of a Handover Certificate with the information to be recorded is shown in
figure3-1 and figure 3-2.
The completed Handover Certificate must be signed by the responsible persons handing
over and receiving the well. It must be placed in the appropriate well file. Copies are to be
faxed to the Well Operations Superintendent when a new well is handed over.
There are two types of Well Handover Certificates:
Well Handover Certificate
Well Intervention Handover Certificate.
3.6.1 Well Handover Certificate

The well Handover Certificate is to be used for all new wells and wells worked over (Drilling,
Completion through to Production).
New Wells
Following the successful drilling and completion of a new well, the Operations department
will complete a Well Handover Certificate. Prior to handover of the well to Production, the
well status should be outlined as below:
Xmas tree installed and fully pressure tested
Swab cap installed and pressure tested
SCSSV installed and fully tested
All wireline plugs removed
All obstructions removed, the wellhead and Xmas tree areas are clean and tidy
Written procedure for the venting of annular pressure, if necessary.
Once the Production Supervisor is satisfied that the status of the well is satisfactory, he will
sign the handover certificate in acceptance of the well. Examples of Well Handover
Certificates are shown in figure3-1 and figure 3-2.
Workover Wells
Workover is defined in this instance as any well operation which involves the change-out of
any completion component from the wireline re-entry guide to the Xmas tree.
Following the successful completion of a well which has been worked over, Well Operations
department will complete a Well Handover Certificate. Prior to handover of the well to
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Production the well status should be outlined as below:

Xmas tree installed and fully pressure tested
Swab cap installed and pressure tested
SCSSV installed and fully tested
All wireline plugs removed
Written procedure for the venting of annular pressure, if necessary
sign the handover certificate in acceptance of the well.
3.6.2 Well Intervention Handover Certificate

The Well Intervention Handover Certificate is to be used for all interventions such as:
Mechanical wireline operations
Electric wireline operations
Coiled tubing operations
Snubbing operations (except where these constitute a Workover)
Well stimulation operations.
Prior to handover of the well by Production to Well Services the Production Supervisor will
complete a Well Intervention Handover Certificate and ensure the following procedures are
completed:
1) All chemical injection lines on the flowline will be bled down and isolated.
2) The test and production, or injection, header isolating valves will be closed, and the
flowline bled down to the closed drains and isolated when no liquid or gas is observed
at the sample point. Blind flanges should be installed on the flowline termination.
3) The SCSSV control lines will be bled off ready to be disconnected. All lines from the
wellhead to the remote control panel will also be bled down.
4) If the tree is to be removed all instrumentation and control lines will be removed from
the well.
5) All obstructions (e.g. scaffolding) all instrumentation and control lines will be removed.
Once the Well Operations Supervisor is satisfied that the status of the well is satisfactory he
will sign the Well Intervention Handover Certificate in acceptance of the well.
Following an intervention operation the Well Operations Supervisor will complete a Well
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Handover Certificate. Prior to handover of the well to Production, the well status should be
outlined as below:
Xmas tree installed and fully pressure tested.
Swab cap installed and pressure tested.
SCSSV installed and fully tested.
All wireline plugs removed.
Written procedure for the venting of annular pressure, if necessary.
sign the Well Intervention Handover Certificate in acceptance of the well. An example of a
Well Intervention Handover Certificate is shown in figure 3-3.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
WELL HANDOVER CERTIFICATE

Well No: Date:
WELL DETAILS
Well Type: Producer/Injector/Gas Lift/__________________
PERFORATION DETAILS
ft MD/TVD ft MD/TVD
ft MD/TVD ft MD/TVD
ft MD/TVD ft MD/TVD
ft MD/TVD ft MD/TVD
Last Hold Up Depth: ft MD/TVD Date:
Details of Junk:
Bridge Plug(s) ft MD/TVD
TUBING DETAILS
Tubing Tubing Condition Producing Tubing Shut in Wellhead Date last on line
Size Grade or Injecting Fluid Pressure
SAFETY VALVE DETAILS

String Valve Open or Type Date Last Remarks
Closed Tested
TUBING PLUG DETAILS

String Plug Depth Date Test Remarks
Type Tested Pressure
figure3-1- Example Handover Certificate

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
XMAS TREE DETAILS

Type: Pressure Rating:
psi
Tested to: Date Tested:
S/N of Block
Valve S/N Status Valve S/N Status
Swab Valve Manual Master
Hydraulic Master Hydraulic Wing
Manual Wing Manual Wing
(prod) (kill)
ANNULUS DETAILS
Annulus Pressure Fluid Status
e.g. Shut-in, Open, Venting,
Seized Valves, etc.
Flowline Status:
ADJACENT WELLS
Well No SCSSV Plugs Xmas Flowline
Tree
Status Tested Date Status Tested Date Depth Status Status
All Production/Operations equipment removed from area ? Y/N

Remarks:
Changes From Programme Status:
Authorised By: Production/Operations

Accepted By: Production/Operations
figure 3-2 - Example Handover Certificate (Continued)
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
WELL INTERVENTION HANDOVER CERTIFICATE

Well No: Date:
Well Details : Producer/Injector : Single/Dual String :
Permit Order No:
Description of Operation
BARRIERS REQUIRED BARRIERS REMOVED (SITE TIDY)
SAFETY VALVE DETAILS

Handover Handback
String Status** Remarks** String Status** Remarks**
XMAS TREE DETAILS

Handover Handback
Valve Status Valve Status Valve Status Valve Status
** ** **
**
Prod Side Ann. Side Prod. Side Ann. Side
Flow Wing Man. Wing Flow. Wing Man. Wing
Choke Choke
Swab Valve Man. Master Swab Valve Man. Master
Hyd. Master Hyd. Master Hyd. Master Hyd. Master
Man. Master Man. Master
**OPEN/CLOSED, HYDRAULICS ISOLATED/DE-ISOLATED
ANNULUS DETAILS
Handover Handback
Annulus Pressure Fluid Status Annulus Pressure Fluid Status
Above P-Off Above P-Off
DOWNHOLE TUBING DETAILS

(e.g.: equipment set in nipple/component failures/fish in hole etc.)
Handover Handback
String Detail Depth Remarks String Detail Depth Remarks
Authorised By : Production/Well Services Authorised By : Production/Well Services

Accepted By : Production/Well Services Accepted By : Production/Well Services
Time/Date : Time/Date :
figure 3-3 - Example Handover Certificate
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4. HOLE PREPARATIONS
The procedures in this section described the preparation of the hole and surface facilities for
completion operations.
4.1 PRELIMINARY CHECKS

Sometime prior to completions operations, the following equipment should be checked to
confirm availability and to specification for the forthcoming operations:
a) Workstring of the appropriate grade and size in sufficient length, taking into
consideration if a tapered string is to be used.
b) BOPs are equipped with the correct size-pipe/variable (single or dual) rams to
cover all the range of tubulars to be run in the hole.
c) Wear bushing for the tubing hanger spool, equipped with the running/pulling tool.
d) BOP test tool with the appropriate running and pulling tools and a sufficient
quantity of seals.
e) All relevant handling tools for the workstring including elevators and slips
verifying they are in good working condition.
f) Safety valves have been tested and are available already made up with the
crossovers to the workstring and Weco connections to suit the kill line
connection.
g) The rig has been equipped with the safety and emergency systems as per the
contract and that they are fully operational.
h) Rig pumps are equipped with the appropriate liner sizes and that they have been
tested.
i) Mud logging or monitoring system is installed and operational.
4.2 WELL CLEAN UP PROCEDURES

After the production casing, or liner, has been cemented in place, a bit and scraper
assembly will be run. The purpose of this trip is to clean out any excess cement within the
casing, and particularly to remove any cement that may be on the casing wall at the packer
setting depth.
A suitably sized bit, or junk mill, and tandem scraper assembly will be run to clean out the
casing or liner of any excess cement, and to scrape the intended perforated interval(s). The
packer setting depth will also be scraped during this operation to ensure it will have a good
setting area. Precise details of packer setting depths, perforation intervals and maximum
clean out depth will be given in the well operations/drilling programme.
Note: The casing and liner string may be pressure tested at this point, and an
inflow test on liner laps and shoe tracks performed.
For detailed procedures on Well Control Policy Manual see (STAP-P-1-M-6150).
If a liner lap is a found to be leaking it may be necessary to run a tie back packer into the top
of the liner lap, otherwise it will be necessary to perform a remedial cement squeeze. The
decision on which method to adopt will depend on the location and nature of the leak.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4.3 BOP STACK CONFIGURATION AND TESTING

a) The BOP stack configuration including ram sizes should be in accordance with
the Well Programme.
b) Depending on the type of completion to be pulled the appropriate rams will be
installed into BOP:
On single completion install concentric rams
On dual completion single pulling string use off set rams
On dual completion when simultaneously pulling both strings use dual rams
plus centralisers rams
c) All components must be fully certified and will be tested with water in accordance
to company policy or local regulations, whichever is the most stringent. Testing
on a new completion will be accomplished by using either the test tool, when
pressures are lower than the internal casing yield pressure, or the tubing hanger
with the tubing hanger plug installed in the tubing spool when test pressures are
higher than the internal casing yield pressure.
d) Duration of pressure tests will be 10min with a maximum allowable pressure drop
of 100psi unless local legislation dictates otherwise.
e) If it is necessary to use a cup tester for testing the BOP stack, the test pressure
must not exceed the safe working pressure of the casing.
f) The test schedule will be according to local regulations but will be every 14 days.
If operational constraints prevent a scheduled pressure test, a dispensation will
be requested and issued by the authorities and held on file.
g) All BOP tests, drills, function tests, any malfunctions, repair or maintenance to
the mud system and well control equipment shall be recorded in the IADC daily
reports and shall be signed by both the Drilling Contractor's Toolpusher and
Company's Drilling and Completion Supervisor on the well site. They shall also
be recorded in the Companys Daily Drilling Report.
h) In workover operations prior to pulling the tubing, the BOP stack will be tested
against plugs set in the tubing hanger.
i) Function test at the same time as the BOP stack the surface control panel,
accumulator package and remote control panel. If using a subsea BOP stack,
check from both blue and yellow pods.
4.4 WELL CONTROL

Well control procedures will be in accordance with the Company Well Control Policy Manual,
(STAP-P-1-M-6150) a copy of which must be kept available on the rig.
4.5 OIL BASED MUD DISPLACEMENT

Prior to displacing the well to the completion brine, it will be necessary to displace the drilling
mud from the well. In order to ensure that circulation time, rig time and filtration time are kept
to an absolute minimum, it is essential that the well clean up is as efficient (and economical)
as possible in removing the mud, solids and any other associated debris in the well.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4.5.1 Displacement Objectives

Displace oil based mud out of the well with a minimal interface between the oil
based mud and the clean up chemicals.
Keep the brine interface to an absolute minimum.
Minimise filtration time and cost.
Change the wetability of all downhole surfaces from oil wet to water wet.
Prevent the discharge of oil based mud, contaminated water and/or
contaminated brine to the environment.
Minimise the requirement for back-loading oily water for disposal.
Remove pipe scale, solids, mud solids and other contaminants from the wellbore.
4.5.2 Logistical Considerations

In advance of the displacement, the logistics of the operation from start to finish should be
addressed. The areas which should be addressed include (but are not limited to) the
following:
a) Vessel(s) for back-loading mud and taking on the clean up chemicals, brine and
kill pill material.
b) The quantities of clean up chemicals, brine and kill pill material required including
any contingency material that may be required.
c) Pit space requirements for mud and brine and the permits required for cleaning
the appropriate pits and lines.
d) The equipment required to install and operate the filtration equipment.
e) Personnel requirements and available accommodation.
4.5.3 Drilling Fluid Preparation

1) Pick up the workstring with scrapers placed in it to ensure that the liner or casing
packer setting depths are thoroughly scraped during the trip. Once on bottom,
bottoms up should be circulated to remove any additional debris.
2) Circulate and condition the oil based mud with oil mud thinner or oil wetting agent in
order that the yield point and gel strengths are reduced but not to a point where the
fluid loses the ability to keep barite/drilled solids in suspension. Typically, the yield
point should be reduced to 12 lbs/100 ft2 and the 10min gel to <15 lbs/100 ft2. The
actual quantity of material required to do this must be determined by pilot testing
performed by the mud engineer to determine the most cost effective treatment.
3) Throughout the drilling fluid conditioning process, the flow rate used should be the
maximum practical rate. At a very minimum, the circulation rate should be just within
the turbulent flow regime.
4) Whilst conditioning the mud, the drill string should be reciprocated and rotated. The
combined effect of the scrapers being run in the hole, the high flow rate and the
reciprocation/rotation will help to remove/disperse large quantities of mud solids and
general debris. The reciprocation stroke should be +/-30ft and the rotation speed
should be +/-15rpm.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5) Near the end of the conditioning operation, temporarily shut down the pumps and
stroke each set of pipe rams to clear any debris from the ram cavities except any pipe
rams which are smaller than the workstring. Continue circulation to remove the debris.
6) During this operation, as much of the surface volume of mud should be removed from
the pits to accommodate the completion fluid and the well clean up chemicals. Once
the mud has been back-loaded, surface preparation can be carried out.
4.5.4 Surface Equipment Preparation

As much of the surface volume of mud should be sent back to the base leaving only one
tank into which the mud returned from the displacement can be dumped:
1) Wash and scrub all of the pits and storage tanks designated for the completion fluid
with steam cleaners. Once the top and sides are scrubbed, the bottom of each tank
should be swept to the suction line and the contents sent to a contaminated fluid
storage pit.
2) All pits, sandtraps, gumbo traps, flowlines, ditches and in particular areas where the
accumulation of solids can be overlooked such as underneath lines and grates, above
and behind angle irons, in the corners and crevices of beams should all be thoroughly
cleaned.
3) Once everything has thoroughly been cleaned, fill one pit with fresh water and add the
recommended volume of surfactant/flocculant. Agitate the pit to keep the product
dispersed.
4) Circulate the surfactant/flocculant pill at the maximum possible flow rate (for +/-
20mins) throughout the entire surface system including all pits, pumps, lines or other
areas that the completion fluid may contact.
5) Provided the water is not contaminated it can be dumped. If the water is
contaminated, it should be diverted to a pit designated for contaminated fluid.
6) As before, the pits should all be swept clean and dry.
7) Once all of the above has been done, dump valve seats should be inspected and
replaced wherever necessary and then guided into place to ensure they seal properly
before filling with brine.
8) Once sealed, all dump valves should be locked shut.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4.5.5 Well Clean Up Pill Sequence

The following is the normal sequence for pumping the various fluids and pills.
a) Weighted hard surface detergent pill
b) Viscous hard surface detergent pill
c) Drill water or seawater
d) Solvent pill
e) Drill water or seawater.
f) Surfactant/flocculant pill
g) Viscous hard surface detergent pill
h) Drill water or seawater (water should be pumped until returns are below 60 NTU,
usually 1-2 circulations).
i) Viscous pill
j) Filtered completion brine.
4.5.6 Pill Functions

a) The weighted detergent pill is pumped directly behind oil based mud to initiate oil
and filter cake removal.
b) The solvent pill has a solvating action on oil based mud residue and filter cake
residue. This is the main pill for actually removing the mud residue. It should not
be mixed with any water or base oil to cut it back as this reduces the efficiency of
the pill.
c) The surfactant/flocculant pill is used as a chemical flocculating agent to dislodge
any residue loosened by the solvent. A large pill is required to ensure adequate
contact time to remove all solids.
d) The viscous detergent pill is a detergent pill used to convert the surfaces into a
water wet state.
4.5.7 Pit Requirements

Pits/storage tanks will be required for the following:
a) Mud pit for the detergent pill
b) Mud pit for the surfactant/flocculant pill
c) The solvent pill in the cement unit
d) Drill water or seawater
e) The viscous pill in the pill tank
f) Completion brine.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4.5.8 Pumping Sequence

The pumping sequence and direction should be in accordance with the well programme.
The Mud Engineer should confirm the depths, volumes and rates, to provide the correct
contact times for the various pills.
Seawater should be pumped until returns are clear (1-2 circulations) after which time the
seawater can be displaced out with a viscous pill by the completion brine.
The viscous pill ahead of the brine should be built using the brine as the base.
4.6 DISPLACEMENT OF WATER BASED MUDS

The displacement from a water based mud to a clear fluid is an easier procedure requiring
fewer steps. This is due mainly to both fluids being compatible and all surfaces already
water wet.
As with the clean up of oil based mud, it is essential that the well clean up is as efficient (and
economical) as possible.
As before, the logistical aspect of the displacement from start to finish should be addressed.
The areas to be addressed include:
1) Transportation for taking well clean up chemicals, brine and filtration equipment/
consumables to the rig.
2) Personnel requirements.
3) Surface equipment cleaning.
4.6.1 Drilling Fluid Preparation

1) The mud properties should be reduced to the levels specified for oil based mud,
2 2
namely YP of 12 lbs/100 ft and 10min gel <15 lbs/100 ft . The most cost effective
method of treatment is by adding water to the system. However, this should only be
done under the direction of the Mud Engineer and only after pilot testing.
2) As per section 4.5.3.
3) The surface volume of water based mud can be dumped overboard (providing the
constituents allow) as can the mud returns from the displacement.
4.6.2 Surface Equipment Preparation

Same as section 4.5.4.
4.6.3 Well Clean Up Pill Sequence

The following is the normal sequence for pumping the various fluids and pills.
a) Drill water/caustic pill.
b) Surfactant/flocculant pill.
c) Viscous detergent pill (un-weighted).
d) Water, pump until returns are below 60 NTU (usually 1-2 circulations).
e) Viscous pill, using the completion brine as the base fluid.
f) Filtered completion brine.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4.6.4 Pill Functions

a) Drill water/caustic soda pill is used as a preflush to strip away and denature the
heavy, concentrated water based mud filter cake and solids.
b) Surfactant/flocculant pill is used as a chemical flocculating agent to remove the
residues dislodges by the drill water/caustic soda pill. A large pill is required to
ensure an adequate contact time to remove all solids.
c) Detergent pill is a polishing pill to ensure all downhole surfaces are thoroughly
cleaned prior to pumping the seawater.
4.6.5 Pit Requirements

a) Mud pit for the Caustic Soda Pill.
b) Mud pit for the surfactant/flocculant pill.
c) Pill tank for the detergent pill.
d) Drill water or seawater as required.
e) Pill tank for the viscous pill.
f) Completion Brine.
4.6.6 Pumping Sequence

The pumping sequence and direction should be in accordance with the well programme.
The Mud Engineer should confirm the depths, volumes and rates provide the correct contact
times for the various pills.
4.7 COMPLETION AND WORKOVER FLUIDS

4.7.1 Brines Transportation
Prior to loading any brine at the suppliers facility the tanks and manifolds will be inspected
for cleanliness and dryness.
Note: Manifolds may contain residual materials that could contaminate the
brine. Therefore all manifolds, pumps, etc. involved in brine delivery will
be thoroughly flushed and dried.
Brine will not be loaded onto a vessel or truck until the Companys responsible person is
satisfied that the brine will arrive at the rig site with the same clarity, density, and solids
content as originally loaded.
Samples of the brine will be taken during the loading operation from the loading tanks and
the vessel's receiving tanks or truck. The volume, density and clarity of the fluid after
loading must be identical to the fluid from the suppliers tanks.
Prior to transferring the brine to the installation from the tanks all hoses, connections, dump
valves, etc. will be checked for leaks.
The volume and density of the brine will be monitored as it is transferred from the
vessel/truck. Any discrepancies in density and volume will be recorded.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4.7.2 Completion And Workover Fluid Quality

The quality of the fluid used during a completion and workover operation cannot be over-
emphasised as the productivity is governed not only by the damage caused by visible
contaminants such as solids but also the damage caused by invisible contaminants such as
calcium ions, sulphate ions and dissolved iron. It is, therefore, essential that all of these and
other similar contaminants are controlled to as low a level as feasible and, wherever
possible, completely removed. (Refer to the Drilling Fluids Operations Manual (STAP-P-1-
M-6160).
Other contaminants such as iron and sulphates can be controlled on surface by chemical
treatment but can be avoided altogether by ensuring that the quality of the fluid supplied is
correct, the quality of all the sacked and drummed material meets the required specification
and the rig is thoroughly cleaned before taking on the completion brine.
During well completion and workover operations, all steps must be taken to ensure that, if
any fluid is in contact with the formation, it is both clean and filtered. A fluid in any other
condition will, for the reasons stated above, result in some degree of formation impairment.
4.8 FILTRATION SYSTEMS

Monitor P across the two filter units to control system efficiency.
The prime filtration system is the Diatomaceous Earth (DE) filter press with a bag filter
system for use as a downstream guard filter. Sometimes, on standby is a low pressure,
Cartridge Filter unit.
Both the DE and the cartridge units are capable of filtering down to 2 microns.
The DE is preferable as the prime equipment as it is more suited to high solids loading which
can be removed using various different grades of DE to form a porous, permeable filter cake
on a filter cloth. The nature of the DE is such that it must be added using a safe handling
system to ensure that there is a totally dust free environment thereby eliminating any hazard
to the operator or any other personnel in the vicinity. On no account should loose DE be
used.
4.8.1 Fluid Cleanliness

Before filtering, all the tanks should be thoroughly cleaned out and any mud residues
washed out (as per the pit cleaning procedure described earlier in section 4.5.4).
a) A pit of brine will not be filtered by circulation itself.
b) Filter brine from the dirty pit to a dedicated clean tank, or pump directly into the
well.
c) All filtered brine will be checked to ensure that it meets the required level of
cleanliness. Normal specifications are:
By laser particle counter: < 250ppm total undissolved solids
By turbidity meter: < 20NTU
By centrifuge: < 0.01% by volume solids.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4.9 LOST CIRCULATION

The use of lost circulation materials may be necessary if the well has suffered any serious
fluid losses as can be experienced such as in open hole, gravel pack or wells which are
perforated prior to running the completion, etc.
The types of LCM pills preferred for the various uses from slow seepage to high losses in
particular situations are fully described in the Drilling Fluids Operations Manual (STAP-P-1-
M-6160) along with the formulations and placement procedures.
Prior to using an LCM pill, consideration will be given to reducing the hydrostatic head by
reducing the brine weight (with drill water) and so reduce the level of losses. This will only
be attempted if the reduction in weight does not compromise the safety of the well.
Obviously the LCM pills used in completion operations should be selected in order to
minimise potential damage to producing formations. Some of the most common LCM pills
used in completion operations are described below.
4.9.1 Viscous Pills

These can be built, either, using drill water, completion brine or a higher weight brine as a
base and adding a predispersed liquid viscosifier to increase the funnel viscosity according
to the well programme. The addition of a predispersed liquid viscosifier is preferable as it
will yield rapidly without forming fish eyes which may cause a problem when it comes time
for the removal of the pill downhole.
There are both advantages and disadvantages is using high viscosity pills for controlling fluid
loss. These are as follows:
1) Advantages
They contain no particulate material to impair the formation.
They can be built quickly and easily.
They can be removed by thermal degradation, acid, chemical breakers or by
flowing the well.
2) Disadvantages
They are limited normally to temperatures <280 F.
They are only effective in low permeability formations where seepage losses are
low to moderate (<1.5 - 2bbl/min).
4.9.2 Sized Salt Pills

The actual composition of the sized salt pill will be determined primarily by the porosity,
permeability and temperature of the formation to be bridged.
Sized salt pills must be formulated in a saturated brine base to prevent solution of the
bridging material.
A typical formulation for a sized salt pill in a 10 ppg sodium chloride brine is as follows:
Volume per bbl - Vol. as required

Formulation Saturated Brine 0.94bbl
Bridgesal Plus 500lbs
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Notes:
1) The above formulation will give a final weight of 10.5ppg assuming that a 10ppg NaCl
brine is used as the base.
2) If a higher density is required, the formulation will require modification by the addition
of FL-7 Plus and Watersal A. The specific formulation will be determined by the Fluids
Engineer on the rig. However, typical formulations are as follows (see table below).
3) Mixing order of products should be listed.
4) A small amount of defoamer is required (0.2gal/bbl) to minimise foaming.
Density Density Density

11 ppg 12 ppg 12.5 ppg
Composition*
Saturated Brine (bbl) 0.88 0.75 0.69
Bridesal Plus (lbs/bbl) 40 30 30
FL-7 Plus (lbs/bbl) 2 4 4
Watersal A (lbs/bbl) 57 164 210
Properties
Plastic Viscosity (cp) 30 62 77
Yield Point (lbs/100 sq.ft) 35 61 67
10 sec Gel Strength (lbs/100 sq.ft) 8 10 11
10 min Gel Strength (lbs/100 sq.ft) 10 13 14
pH 7.4 7.1 7.2
4.9.3 Calcium Carbonate Pills

Calcium carbonate can be used as a drilling fluid and for LCM pills to control fluid losses. In
completion operations it is now the most commonly used fluid for controlling fluid losses.
The composition of a calcium carbonate LCM pill is dependent upon the formation porosity,
permeability and temperature. A range of particle sizes is available which may be mixed to
provide the ideal mixture for the formation pore size. The calcium carbonate uses a viscous
pill as a carrier (Refer to section 4.9.1 above).
Typical of a calcium carbonate fluid is Baker Hughes Inteqs reservoir drill-in fluid system
called Perflow that is designed to lower overall well completion costs while improving long-
term production rates.
Used as a drill-in fluid, Perflow maintains the properties of a drilling fluid while protecting the
well's pay zone against damage. It provides lubricity, inhibition, solids suspension, cuttings
removal, and wellbore stability. In its protective role, the fluid bridges pores opening
exposed to the wellbore, remains intact during completion and workover operations, and is
easily removed with production.
The system's performance has made it effective in a number of wellsite applications. These
applications include use as a drill-in fluid, coring fluid, fluid loss pill, underreaming fluid, TSO
(Tip Screen Out) prepad fluid, and as a kill fluid.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
The system's simplified cleanup reduces rig time during completion and workover
operations. While other fluids require costly processes for removal, removal is simply
accomplished by flowing the well.
The system utilises very pure calcium carbonate with a broad particle size distribution to
effectively bridge the pore openings of the formation. The bridging agent and polymer
chemistry form a thin filter cake to protect the pay zone from damage caused by fluid
invasion. The filter cake is effectively removed by low break-out pressures, leaving no
significant residual material to inhibit the well's production.
Before using a calcium carbonate pill, any potential damaging effects from the calcium
carbonate needs to be assessed as any particles trapped in pore spaces can only be
removed by an HCl acid treatment.
4.10 CASING GAUGE CONTROL

Prior to running any completion equipment, it is necessary to ensure the hole is within gauge
to allow passage of tools such as packers and TCP guns.
Checking the hole gauge is carried out by electric line services by running a gauge ring of a
size according to the casing drift size. It is normal practice to run the gauge ring in
conjunction with a junk basket after the well clean out procedure. The junk basket is run to
catch junk which has not been circulated out of the hole during the well clean out operation
(typically rubber, pieces of cement, etc.).
Any tight spots should be logged and reported. Ultimately the casing may require further
scraping. It is extremely important that the casing is drifted as the sticking of completion
equipment can incur high costs in retrieval, loss or damage to equipment and may even
cause a side-track.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5. PERFORATING PROCEDURES
5.1 GENERAL
Two methods are currently used to perforate wells: wireline conveyed guns and tubing
conveyed guns (Refer to the Completion Design Manual STAP-P-1-M-7100). In the drive to
obtain maximum perforating efficiency, tubing conveyed perforating is the preferred method
for most completion operations as the zones to be tested can be perforated underbalanced
in one run with large size charges, if possible. However, under some circumstances wireline
conveyed guns may still be preferred. The procedures for both methods are described in the
following sections.
The type of explosive to be used will depend mainly on the bottom hole temperature and the
length of time the guns are likely to be on bottom before firing. Refer again to the
perforating section in the Completion Design Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7100) and to suppliers
technical specification sheets.
The BOPs and the rig manifolds should have undergone a recent full programme of
pressure testing.
At the safety meeting, the perforating operation should be discussed in fine detail. Apart
from outlining the sequence of operations and contingency plans, all present should be
clearly aware of the extent to which their own area of responsibilities may affect, and be
affected by, the special requirements of a perforating operation.
The perforating engineer should have a diagram of the well, clearly indicating the interval(s)
to be perforated, the fluids present, the pressures/temperatures expected and the depths,
diameters and angles of any changes in the well geometry. There must be no doubt about
the method of referencing the top shot and the settings of the tools (e.g. shear pin settings,
timer delays, etc.). These must be discussed with the Completions Supervisor and fully
understood.
No crane lifts should be made over loaded perforating guns or over the logging cable.
Only essential personnel will be permitted in the vicinity of loaded guns, especially at the
loading area, catwalk, drill floor and spider deck. All personnel, except the perforating
engineer, should be clear of these areas while the guns are being armed.
Diving activities are not permitted during the perforating operation.
Electrical Activation
In addition, whenever the gun firing sequence is initiated by electrically operated detonators,
the following will apply:
Weather forecasts (two independent sources) must confirm there will be no
likelihood of electrical storms for the duration of the perforating operation.
Offshore, the perforating engineer should remain on the drill floor at all times
when TCP guns are in the hole still above ground level.
The perforating engineer must verify there are no stray voltages (greater than
0.25 V) between the rig and the casing or riser.
Radio silence must be in force before connecting the firing head and until the
guns are 100m below rotary table, unless the Schlumberger SAFE firing system
or similar is used (Refer to section 5.5).
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
The firing head detonator must not be installed until the Completion Supervisor
confirms to the Perforating Engineer that the rig is on radio silence.
On recovery of the guns, regardless of any indications that the guns have fired,
radio silence must be reinstated prior to the guns being retrieved above 100
metres below the sea bed. This period will end only after the detonator sub-
system has been removed and the perforating engineer has confirmed to the
Completion Supervisor that the guns have been made safe.
No electric/MIG welding is permitted during the perforating operation.
Cathodic protection should be shut down and isolated during the period of
radio silence.
No diving is to be allowed during perforating.
No crane lifts should be made over the wire during perforating, if applicable.
No boats should be alongside during perforating.
No helicopter landings should be allowed during radio silence.
All non-essential personnel should be excluded from the areas affected,
including the gun loading area, the catwalk, the drill floor and the moonpool,
around the riser below the drill floor.
5.2 METHODS OF PERFORATING

The perforating procedure is dependent upon the type of gun system used for the
application in the completion process. The six main methods are:
Wireline-conveyed carrier guns inside casing - perforating overbalance
Wireline-conveyed through tubing guns - perforating underbalance
TCP run on a temporary well test string - perforating underbalance
TCP guns run on the permanent completion string - perforating underbalance
TCP guns run on a perforating anchor - perforating underbalance
TCP guns run on coiled tubing - perforating underbalance
Common to all perforating operations, a safety meeting should be held before the operation
commences. This is important because perforating will impose restrictions on other rig
operations, such as radio silence, diving and use of the cranes. These procedures are to be
used as a guideline. They should be used only in conjunction with other company
procedures for these operations.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5.3 GENERAL SAFETY PROCEDURES

The following comments are applicable to both TCP and wireline conveyed methods.
Additional comments are given in section specific to wireline conveyed perforating.
a) All perforating operations, since they involve the handling and use of explosives
and possibly radioactive materials, require special safety procedures to be strictly
observed at all times.
b) Perforating operations should be carried out strictly according to the safety
policies of Company and the perforating Contractor. In the event of any
inconsistency between policies, the most conservative policy will apply.
c) Operations involving the use of explosives shall only be performed by
Contractors specialised personnel responsible for perforation and similar
operations. The number of persons involved shall be as low as possible.
d) Only perforating Contractors personnel are allowed to remain in the hazardous
area (gangway, rig floor etc.) during arming of guns. The number of personnel
should be limited when the guns are within 500ft of surface when tripping in and
out of the hole.
e) Any operation involving the use of explosives is not allowed in the presence of
thunder, lighting and thick fog, as these are sources of electric potential.
f) Explosives shall be kept on site for the shortest possible time; any remaining at
the end of the operation shall be removed from the installation.
g) Explosives shall be stored on site in proper containers, within a confined area on
the rig. Detonators shall be stored in separate boxes, in the same area as
explosives.
h) Warning signs must be placed around the hazardous area where explosives are
used.
i) All radio transmitters, radio beacons included, within a radius of 500ft from the
well, shall be turned off, (since they may detonate blasting caps), starting from
gun arming until perforating guns are 500ft below the well-head (similarly, when
pulling guns out of hole and guns above 500 ft). All portable transmitters shall be
placed inside the Company office and turned off to avoid accidental transmission.
Avoid critical periods of perforating coinciding with arrival and take-off of
helicopters.
j) Cranes and welding machines shall be put out of service starting from gun
arming till gun pulling out and unloading.
k) District Office shall be advised by the Well Operations Supervisor on the
estimated time of radio silence two hours before starting operations. The Radio
Operator shall communicate actual timing.
l) Casing perforating can be performed during daylight or at night. However, the
first series of shots must be carried out in daylight hours. Before perforating
casing, the acceptable cement job quality shall be ascertained by means of
CBL/VDL and/or by squeeze jobs.
m) Explosives are to be transported unarmed and clearly labelled to the site in
secure and protective containers. Extreme care must be applied during loading
and off-loading.
n) On the offshore rig it is the responsibility of the Installation Manager to ensure
that these precautions are taken.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5.4 WIRELINE CONVEYED PERFORATING

There are two alternatives to be considered when perforating using wireline conveyed guns:
casing guns and through-tubing guns. In both cases depth control is provided by running a
Gamma Ray/CCL above the gun, and the guns are fired by electrical signal.
Casing Guns
Casing guns are large diameter perforators which cannot be run through normal tubing
sizes. Therefore they must be used prior to running the test string and usually in overbalance
conditions (completion brine or drilling mud). A shooting nipple should be used when using
this method.
Through-Tubing Guns
Through-tubing guns are small diameter guns run through the test string. They can be used
to perforate underbalanced, and hence eliminate the risk of damaging the formation with
wellbore fluids immediately after perforating. Also, and especially in production situations,
they can be run and fired with the well nippled up and intrinsically safe. The gun size which
can be run is limited by the tubing size.
5.4.1 Casing Guns Run In Overbalance

1) A safety meeting should be held before perforating. The safety aspects of perforating
with casing guns are:
The well must be stable with an overbalance mud
There must be an adequate surface supply of kill fluid
The BOPs should have been recently tested
Radio silence must be in force before connecting the cable head until the guns
are 100 metres below the sea bed.
On recovery of the guns, regardless of any indications that the guns have fired, radio
silence must be in force before the guns are pulled back past 100 metres below ground
level and until the cable head is removed.
2) The logging engineer should be given a diagram of the well showing the depths of all
restrictions or changes in diameter.
3) Wireline should be rigged up as per the procedure in the General Wireline Procedures
Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7110).
4) If perforating inside casing ensure the length of the gun assembly is less than the
distance between the blind rams and the grease head.
5) The distance between the top shot and the GR/CCL should be measured. It may
sometime no be necessary to run a record the depth by GR or CCL if depth can be
correlated to a sump packer or bridge plug.
6) The logging engineer must not connect the cable head until the Well Operations
Supervisor, or his designated representative, has confirmed that radio silence is
instated.
7) There is no restriction on running speed but care must be taken at any restrictions and
when applying the brake.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8) The Logging Engineer must inform the Drilling and Completion Supervisor, or his
designated representative, when the guns are deeper than 100 metres below ground
level.
9) Tie on depth to the CBL/VDL/GR/CCL log. Record a short section of film across the
interval to be perforated showing at least five casing collars and the pup joint at the top
of the reservoir section. The well should be perforated from the bottom upwards.
10) When the gun is on depth and ready to be fired, the logging engineer must inform the
Well Operations Supervisor, or his designated representative, and the driller, who
should observe the well for losses or gains when the gun is fired.
11) Pull out at less than 5,000 ft/hour to avoid swabbing.
5.4.2 Perforating Procedures For Through Tubing Conveyed Guns

This operation will only be done once the cushion has been circulated into place.
Since only the first run can be perforated underbalance, it is common practice to perforate the
best (highest permeability) zone first, otherwise the well should be perforated from the bottom
upwards to minimise the chance of picking up debris on the cable.
1) A safety meeting will be held to review procedures and safety, specifically:

The well is in underbalance and will be live after the first run
The wireline BOPs and lubricator should have been pressure tested
The surface rig up must be pressure tested before each run
Ensure the GR/CCL log across zone of interest is available.
2) The logging engineer should be given a diagram of the well and test string showing the
depths of all restrictions or changes in diameter and he should check that he has
sufficient weights for the maximum anticipated wellhead pressure.
3) Rig up wireline for a full bore drift run. Run in the hole and drift the tubing.
Note: On offshore rigs, prior to arming the guns, the Offshore Installation
Manager will ensure that conditions for safe operations exist. He should
then inform base, standby vessels, supply boats and any relevant
persons that the rig is passing into radio silence.
4) The wireline should be rigged up with the lubricator system, grease flow tubes,
hydraulic stuffing box, tool trap, ball check valve and line wiper. Once radio silence
has been obtained, rig up the perforating guns into the lubricator and pressure test.
5) Monitor the pressure in the annulus.
6) Ensure the surface tree master and swab valves are open and run in the hole with the
perforating gun tool string.
7) Correlate the GR/CCL to the original GR log. Record a short section of film across the
interval to be perforated showing at least five casing collars and the pup joint at the top
of the reservoir zone. Do not run down into the perforations on subsequent runs.
8) Position the string at the desired perforating interval and fire the guns.
9) Observe and record WHSIP to confirm the guns have fired.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
10) Pull out of the hole with the perforating string, taking care when passing through
restrictions.
11) Repeat steps until the total required interval has been perforated. Do not flow the well
while pulling the guns back through the tubing to surface.
12) Stop when the guns are at 100 metres below ground level until the Completions
Supervisor, or his designated representative, confirms that there is radio silence.
13) The gun should be inspected at surface to check that all charges have detonated.
Care should be taken as pressure can be trapped by debris behind the gun ports. A
film record should be made of the job and the explosion register should be updated.
14) Open the well to flow and continue as per the Completion Programme.
5.5 SAFE SYSTEM

The SAFE system was developed for wireline conveyed perforating systems and will be
used unless otherwise authorised.
5.5.1 General
There are two types of detonators in general use today:
a) The Electric Detonator or Blasting Cap (which is classed as an Electro Explosive
Device).
b) The Percussion Detonator or Percussion Cap.
Both of these systems contain primary high explosives which are initiated by an electric
current heating a filament wire in the case of the blasting cap and a direct mechanical shock
in the case of percussion cap. The blasting cap can also be initiated by shock as it contains
primary high explosives.
In order to store and handle these detonators, special safety precautions must be taken.
These precautions include, in the case of electro explosive devices, the elimination of stray
electric potential differences while arming guns at surface and when returning to surface
after perforating.
Stray electric potential differences can originate from:
RF Radiation
Impressed Current Cathodic Protection
Electric Welding
Electric Generators and Motors
Lighting Storms.
The SAFE system was developed to preclude the loss of radio communication and other
vital equipment during perforating operations.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5.5.2 SAFE System Description (Slapper Activated Firing Explosives)

The two main components of the SAFE system are the EFI (exploding foil initiator) and the
ESIC (electronic secondary-explosive cartridge).
The EFI contains no primary high explosives and so cannot be set off with the application of
heat or mechanical shock.
With the guns on setting depth, DC power (positive or negative) is applied from the surface
to the ESIC, which steps up the voltage and stores this energy in a capacitor. The capacitor
is controlled by a triggering device. When the trigger threshold is reached, the capacitor
discharges rapidly into the EFI, thereby initiating the explosion chain.
The SAFE system is based on a series of basic units. These are manufactured in sizes
1
that allow a range of guns to be fired from 1 /16ins to 7ins. Several guns can be run
simultaneously in the hole and selectivity of shooting these is achieved by connecting an
ESIC cartridge to each gun.
Advantages:
Operates without shutting down radios, electric welding and cathodic protection.
Explosive components contain no primary-high explosive.
Overall operating time reduced.
Operates safely next to radio transmitters and powerlines.
5.6 TCP PROCEDURES

In case of DST testing with retrievable packer and TCP guns, use a minimum two
independent firing systems; in case of mechanical firing head, the firing system shall have a
double safety device in order to prevent accidental gunshot.
TCP perforating is now the most common method of perforating today as it has many
advantages over wireline conveyed perforating. These advantages include:
The guns can be made up and run in the hole on the completion string or on an
independent anchor system.
The packer is set and the string fully tested and completed before guns are to be
fired.
The well can be perforated underbalanced to increase the perforating efficiency
for completion.
Various methods of detonation can be utilised depending on well conditions.
Long perforation intervals can be fired in a singe run.
Accurate placement and efficient detonation in high deviation wells with selective
zonal perforations can be achieved.
Guns and charge size can be maximised for optimum perforating efficiency.
Guns can be loaded to perforate specific target intervals.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Perforating systems are available which allow several different intervals to be independently
perforated and tested during one trip in the hole.
Ensure that the casing/liner has been gauged and junk basket/junk sub trip has been made
prior to running the TCP guns.
Note: If the guns are to be dropped into the sump, it is essential that the depth
of the rat hole is sufficient to swallow the guns.
5.6.1 Well Preparation for TCP Operations

Cleanliness is of prime importance in being able to obtain optimum perforating efficiency.
Dirty tubulars and well conditions may lead to serious problems, therefore the following
points should be carefully considered.
Clean Casing
This helps prevent problems with packer setting. A bit and scraper run to clean up the casing
and condition the hole is essential, followed by a gauge ring run before TCP gun installation
(Refer to section 4.10). This provides a good clean area for the packer to set and seal off in,
hold high differentials and withstand the shock of the gun detonation.
Clean Tubing
This is also a vital factor that assists in a trouble free firing operation. Tubing should always
be calibrated before being run. This prevents any pipe scale, mud cake or general debris
from falling down to settle out and create a barrier around and over any firing head or
stinger. This is critical if bar drop methods or wireline conveyed firing heads are used.
Any preventative methods employed in the area of scale/dope are strongly recommended.
Clean Fluids
These are important in any perforating operation. By keeping the downhole fluid
environment as clean as possible, less problems will be encountered later in the operation.
As stated above, solids settling out can cause problems/delay/cost, so an emphasis where
possible on clean, filtered well fluids is essential. Perforation tunnel and near wellbore
damage are also a consideration (Refer to the Drilling Fluids Operations Manual (STAP-P-1-
M-6160) for recommended fluids policies, recipes and cost considerations.
BOP Tests
It must be taken into consideration that perforating/testing and killing operations may require
a considerable time; therefore the next scheduled BOP test may be rescheduled to take this
into account.
5.6.2 Ancillary TCP Equipment

The following is a list of the most common equipment used in conjunction with the gun
sections to help installation and firing.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Bullnose
Allow the test string to enter top liner easily. It may also be ported to allow pressure
communication with a pressure activated firing head on the bottom of the guns.
Circulating Sub
This sub is optionally run above the mechanically activated firing head. It is a ported sub
which allows circulation and beneath the ports is a brass or glass disc preventing debris from
dropping onto the mechanical firing head. The drop bar must pierce the disc before passing
on to the firing head. The ported sub acts as a perforated anchor after the guns have fired.
Gun Drop Sub

If the perforated zone is to be production logged or stimulated with coil tubing a gun drop
sub should be incorporated into the string. This releases the guns, which fall into the sump
for which sufficient sump must be provided. Gun drop subs can be operated; mechanically,
using slickline, hydraulically by pressuring up on a dropped ball, or automatically on gun
detonation.
The recommended method is to use slickline as it is less complicated and less liable to fail.
With any of the methods, it is prudent to make a conformation check run to ensure the guns
have dropped.
Spacer Tubing
Spacer tubing is inserted between the gun drop sub and the top of the guns. The distance
between the gun drop sub and the top perforation should be at least 50ft if production
logging is to be performed.
Shock Absorber
This is an optional tool which may be run to protect downhole equipment from the shock of
gun detonation. This is important when, in particular, downhole gauges are run below the
packer. Both radial and longitudinal force shock absorbers are available.
Radioactive Sub
A radioactive tag in a sub should be installed in the string within the proximity of the packer.
This sub is used as a marker when performing the GR/CCL correlation for depth control. If
the formation has little GR character, radioactive collars can also be included in the casing
string for definitive depth control. If chrome tubulars are being used consideration must be
given to the non magnetic properties of the pipe with regard to the CCL.
TCP String
If using a test string to conduct a shoot and pull procedure, the full range of string
components such as packer, test tubing, tester valve, circulating valves, etc. need to be
employed as per the Company Well Test Procedures Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7130).
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Shot Detection
Shot detection equipment comprises acoustic detectors (hydrophones), vibration detectors
(accelerometers) and the normal surface pressure gauges. Using a combination of the data
detected by these sensors it is usually possible to confirm gun detonation.
5.6.3 Firing Systems for TCP Operations

It is normal practice to run the TCP guns with two firing systems, whenever possible, to
improve the chance of a successful operation especially when running the guns on the bottom
of a completion. A common combination is to use a tubing pressure actuated system as the
primary means of detonating the TCP guns with a mechanical system as the back up. There
are four main types of firing mechanisms for TCP guns. Only top down firing mechanisms
should be used for safety when arming the guns. The operation of each firing mechanism is:
Tubing Pressure Activated

The guns are fired by pressuring up the test string and then bleeding off the pressure
immediately. A time delay device is incorporated to allow time to bleed off. This device can
be either hydraulic or a slow burning fuse. Some of the firing heads for this system are
wireline retrievable which gives another back up option. However, this would preclude the
use of the drop bar system as a back up. Although this technique could be expensive on
nitrogen, it is well suited to the use of a nitrogen cushion but the time delay on the system
will have to be increased to allow time for the nitrogen cushion to be bled off.
Mechanical Impact
The TCP guns are detonated by the mechanical impact of a firing bar, which for safety must
be run on wireline. (This system is colloquially known as the drop bar system.) Since the
system can be affected by debris in the tubing, the completion fluid must be kept clean. The
system is preferred as a back up instead of the primary firing mechanism because of the
need to use wireline.
Electrically Activated
With this system, the guns are fired with an electrically-initiated detonator which must be run
on a logging cable. Therefore the pressure control system must be rigged up. Since an
inductive or wet electrical connection must be made at the firing head, the system is also
susceptible to debris. This system is rarely used on well tests as the firing heads for this
system are wireline retrievable, hence the guns can be run unarmed and, in the case of a
misfire, the firing head can be recovered on wireline to determine the cause of the misfire.
Retrievable Slickline Firing Head

This type of head was primarily designed to overcome the concerns over about the
possibility of guns being detonated by stray pressure or tools/debris/unnamed articles which
could fall down through the tubing string and force the detonating pin into the initiator. With
this type of head, this possible problem has been completely eliminated due to the design of
the system.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
The guns are run in the hole without the firing head. Then, when ready to arm the guns, the
head is run to depth on slickline and latched on to the firing stem or stinger. This system
provides its own back-up because if the firing head does not work, it can be retrieved and a
replacement be run.
Retrievable firing heads are available with mechanical, hydraulic or electric triggering.
5.6.4 General TCP Safety Precautions and Running Procedures

A safety meeting should be held before running the guns. The following safety aspects of
perforating with TCP guns should be discussed:
The well is underbalance and will be live after firing.
Radio silence must be in force before connecting the firing head until the guns
are 100 metres below ground level. On recovery of the guns, regardless of any
indications that they have past 100m below rotary table until the firing head is
removed.
A 3m spacer should be installed on top of the gun so that it will be armed with the
guns below the rig floor.
Firing heads must be removed before the guns are pulled back above the drill
floor.
The guns must include a pressure bleed off so that any trapped pressure can be
released.
Running procedure
1) The elevators should be changed out to match the special lift sub and the correct slips
for the gun size must be used together with a dog clamp. The perforating engineer will
provide a list of the correct torque for each component of his equipment.
2) After clearing the area of non-essential personnel, pick up the guns on a tugger with
the special lift sub. The guns are made up just as tubing singles but avoid mechanical
shock because the internal carriers can be displaced.
3) Check the booster positions and 'O' rings before making up guns. The firing head
delay will have previously been set according to the test programme and agreed by the
Perforating Engineer.
4) Before connecting the firing head, clear the drill floor and cellar deck areas of all non-
essential personnel.
5) A spacer sub must be installed so that the top shot is well below the rig floor when the
gun is armed. Do not pull the gun back above the drill floor once the firing heads are
installed.
6) Run the rest of the test string but take special care that no debris shall fall down on top
of the firing head. If tubing is in poor condition, ensure it is cleaned and calibrated to
remove all loose rust and scale.
7) The string must be run without jarring to avoid premature detonation because most
firing heads use shear pins.
8) Run the string to set the guns approximately on depth.
9) Rig up the main logging cable and run a gamma ray logging tool down to the
correlation depth. Tie on depth to the reference log and record sufficient film to show
both radioactive pip markers and any zones of gamma ray character on the log.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
10) The required spacing out should be calculated according to the section 8.
11) Set the packer and land the completion string. If there is any doubt about the space
out, re-run the gamma ray tool to ensure that the guns are set on depth.
12) Install the surface equipment (Xmas tree or flowhead) and pressure test as per the
well programme.
13) Circulate the cushion into place and line up the well to flow.
5.6.5 Firing Procedure for Tubing Installed Pressure Activated Head

Complete the steps in section 5.6.4.
1) Start recording wellhead pressure.
2) Pressure up on the tubing with the cement pump, or with the nitrogen unit, if a nitrogen
cushion is employed.
3) Hold the pressure for one minute. Close the kill wing valve and bleed off pressure via
the choke manifold to provide the desired underbalance.
4) If there are no indications that the guns have fired after a reasonable amount of time,
re-pressure up the string in stages to 1,000 psi above the firing pressure, observe for
leak off then bleed back to the underbalance.
5) If there are still no signs of gun detonation after a further hour, use the back up firing
system.
6) Continue with the completion programme.
5.6.6 Firing Procedure for Wireline Installed Pressure Activated Head

The procedure for perforating with a wireline retrievable pressure operated firing head is
exactly the same as that in section 5.6.5 except that the head is run into the receptacle after
the string has been installed and pressure tested.
In the event that there is no indication of firing with this system, the head is simply retrieved
for checking and another head reinstalled.
5.6.7 Firing Procedure for Mechanical Impact Activated Head

In case of use of mechanical firing head, the firing system shall have a double safety device in
order to prevent accidental gunshot.
1) Rig up the slickline lubricator.
2) Ensure that there is sufficient weight on the wireline toolstring and inspect/clean the
firing bar impression nose.
3) Pressure test the lubricator, equalise, open the tree valves and run into the hole.
4) Slow down 100m above the debris barrier and very gently tag the barrier confirming
the depth reading.
5) Pull back up and run in at moderate speed to break the debris barrier.
6) Start recording the wellhead pressure which may be rising due to the string contents
warming up; establish the trend.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
7) Run in at reasonable speed to detonate firing head. The slickline operator should note
the depth and time.
8) If there are definitive signs of the guns firing, continue pulling out. If there are no
indications of detonation, check the tag depth of the firing head to check for debris. If
there is debris, attempt to jar through it. If there is no debris, observe the well for
30min, after which if there is no change, jar down twice again before pulling out.
9) Pull the tool back into the lubricator. Close the tree upper master valve and bleed off
pressure through the flowline.
Close the swab valve and recover and inspect the firing bar impression nose. If
there is an impression, it is very likely that the guns have fired. But if there is no
impression of the firing head then the string is blocked by debris. If there is a
back up firing system, it should be employed. Otherwise reverse circulate or
attempt to bail the well.
10) Rig down the wireline lubricator system.

11) Continue with the completion programme.
5.6.8 Firing Procedure for Electrically Activated TCP Guns

1) Rig up the electric wireline lubricator, double BOPs, grease flowtube, stuffing box, tool
catcher, ball check valve and line wiper.
2) Ensure that there is sufficient weight on the wireline toolstring. If the firing head is to be
run as well as the wet connection activator, radio silence and the other safety
procedures must be observed until it is 100m below rotary table.
3) Pressure test the lubricator against the swab valve.
4) Equalise, open the tree valves and run in the hole.
5) Slow down 100m, start recording the wellhead pressure which may be rising as the
string contents warm up, monitor the trend.
6) Run in and tie on depth with the casing collar locator. Latch onto the firing head, and
detonate the guns. The winch operator should note the depth.
7) If there are indications of gun detonation, continue pulling out. If there are no
indications of detonation, check the latch depth of the firing head to check for debris. If
there is debris, the logging engineer may attempt to jar through it. If there is no debris,
observe the well for 30min, after which if there is no change, attempt to re-latch and
fire the guns, before pulling out.
8) Pull the tool back into the lubricator. Close the upper master valve and bleed off
through the flowline.
9) If a wireline retrievable firing head was used, pull it, observing the radio silence
precautions when it is above 100m below rotary table. If this is not possible, employ
the back up firing system.
10) Continue with the programme.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5.6.9 Procedure For TCP Anchor Running

General
1) There is no requirement for radio silence in the use of hydraulic firing heads.
2) A hot work permit is required.
3) A cold work permit may be required.
4) A safety meeting should be held to advise all relevant personnel of the required
procedures.
5) Clear all non-essential personnel from the rig floor and lower deck level.
6) Use barriers and warning signs to keep all non essential personnel away from the
danger area.
Pick Up Procedure
Refer to Figure 5-1 TCP Anchor System.
1) The guns should be pre-loaded and spaced, and laid out in numerical order on the
pipe rack. The bottom gun (#1) should be next to the catwalk and the top gun, hanger
and firing system furthest away.
2) The 20ft section gun will be lifted up the V-door by the platform crane, using slings
double wrapped. Alternatively, if lift subs are attached to the guns, single joint
elevators and an air winch may be used.
3) Do not lift by means of the thread protectors.
Note: Never move a gun section that does not have protection on each
connection.
4) Use a tag line to guide the guns.

5) The guns will be lifted in numerical order, with the bottom gun (#1) being lifted first and
the firing system last.
TCP Anchor Make Up

The TCP contractor will have a detailed procedure for make up and arming the guns and
firing system used. The following are to be used as a guide only:
1) With the gun set in the slips, the TCP representative will visually inspect to see if the
booster is correctly aligned, and check the height using a measuring gauge.
2) The guns should be made up using 36 ins pipe wrenches or chain tongs. Rig power
tongs will not be used to make up the gun assembly.
3) The guns will be supported using drill collar slips and dog collar as backup.
Note: The dog collar must always be made up prior to unlatching the elevators.
(As the gun assemblies have no external set up)
Radioactive sources are present within the gun. These pip tag positions
have been labelled on the outside of the carrier and no contact should be
made at these markings by the rig crew. (Radiation levels will be
monitored by an Instruments Engineer)
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4) Make up the anchor assembly complete with setting tool and a 27/8 ins EUE pup joint.
5) Make up a 30ft joint of 27/8in EUE tubing, crossover and RA marker sub. Check gun
assembly weight.
6) In order to prevent surging or mechanical shock when running or pulling armed guns,
running speeds should be restricted, particularly through downhole restrictions.
7) The guns should be handled carefully at all times to avoid shock, and time taken to
make connections etc. Slips should be set gently. In bad weather, use tag lines when
lifting. Try to keep the lift subs clean. Do not set a gun down on an unprotected pin.
TCP Anchor Setting Procedure

Refer to Figure 5-1 TCP Anchor System.
1) Run the guns in the hole on drill pipe.
2) When entering the guns into a liner, great care must be taken prior to and entering the
TCP anchor.
3) Continue to run into depth.
4) Set the slips.
5) Rig up wireline and run in with a GR/CCL.
6) Correlate the guns on depth.
7) Pull out of the hole and rig down wireline.
8) Re-latch the elevators and move the string to position the guns on depth. Mark the
pipe at the rotary table (re-check string weight).
7
9) Move up the string to a more workable level and drop in the /16in ball into the work
string (the ball falls at around 1,000 ft/5 mins in brine).
10) Make up a circulating head or top drive onto the work string.
11) Re-position the string on depth and start to pressure up the string once the ball has
seated.
12) Increase the pressure using the cement unit to set the anchor and release setting tool.
13) Re-check the string weight up and down.
14) Gently slack off weight to lightly tag the top of the anchor (6,000lbs approx.).
15) Pick up string weight plus 5ft.
16) Pump a slug and pull out of hole.
5.6.10 TCP Anchor Firing Head Installation

Pre-Installation checks
1) Rig up slickline lubricator and pressure test against swab valve.
2) Run in hole with dummy firing head sinker bars and spang jars to ensure clear path.
3) Continue slowly running in the hole and stop 30ft above the receptor.
4) Pull up and record the pull weight.
5) Continue to run in hole and locate receptor and jar down gently to get an imprint on the
lead insert.
6) Pull out of the hole and confirm latch by checking for receptor impression.
If no problem is encountered proceed as follows.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Running Procedure
1) Rig up slickline lubricator and pressure test against swab valve. Care must be
exercised to not exceed the minimum shear pin rating of the firing head.
2) Run in with firing head, sinker bars and spang jars.
3) Continue slowly going in the hole and stop 30ft above the receptor.
4) Pull up and record pulling weight.
5) Continue to run in hole and locate receptor and jar down gently to latch confirm latch
by over pulling 300-500lbs above pulling weight.
6) Jar down to release firing head. Recover toolstring to surface.
7) Before commencing the pressuring up operation, the shot detection chart recorder
should be set and running.
8) Tubing pressure can now be applied to fire the guns. Pressure the tubing steadily up
to the predetermined level to shear the pins (upper limit), hold for 1 min, then bleed off
swiftly to the required tubing pressure (for correct underbalance).
Note: Once the pins have sheared, the hydraulic time delay begins and the guns
will fire when the delay is complete.
9) If no shot is detected, wait 11/2 times the estimated delay. Slowly increase the tubing
pressure until the pressure below the packer is just above formation pressure. Shut in
the well and monitor for fluid leak-off. If there is no leak-off into the formation, increase
tubing pressure to the tubing test pressure or leak-off pressure, whichever is lower.
Hold briefly and bleed off swiftly to the required underbalance pressure and continue to
1
monitor for firing. If no shot is detected after 1 /2 times estimated delay, resort to
secondary firing system.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Figure 5-1- TCP Anchor System

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5.7 COILED TUBING GUN DEPLOYMENT

The Coiled Tubing Gun Deployment is used to run perforating guns into and out of a
producing well without having to kill the well.
Special equipment and procedure are required for deploying long through tubing gun strings
under pressure when the Lubricator is shorter than the gun string.
Coiled Tubing Gun Deployment is particularly useful to perforate the well in under-balance
condition and to retrieve long gun string from a perforated well without killing the well.
The system can be used also for multiple perforating runs without killing the well between
runs or to retrieve and part a long gun string after a single under-balance run.
Maximum gun string length and maximum level of under-balance under which perforations
can be done are usually dictated by the CT mechanical limits.
The Coiled Tubing Gun Deployment system is also used when well deviation limit the gun
length. CT can push to the desired depth or to overcome wire line weight limitation.
5.7.1 System functions

The surface equipment to operate the Coiled Tubing Gun Deployment consists of a
conventional Lubricator and BOP Stack equipped with the BOP Deployment System which is
generally provided with dual hydraulic (or mechanical) actuators:
The Lower Actuator is a No-Go Ram with a Lock to position and grip the
Connector.
The Upper Actuator is a Guide Ram with a Rack to operate the locking
mechanism of the Connector.
The main components of the system are:

Connectors, to connect the gun sections together.
BOP Deployment Stack, to deploy the tools and operate the connections and
disconnection inside the well (between BOP and Lubricator) under pressure.
Gate Valves; The need of Gate Valve depend on Connector design; If the
Connectors lower section cant be contained between the BOPs No-Go Rams
and Blind Rams (see Figure 5-2), one or two Gate Valves shall be mounted on
top of BOP Deployment Stack to isolate the Lubricator from the well pressure.
5.7.1.1 CONNECTOR
Gun Connector is the ballistic link between the gun sections in the Lubricator.
Connector consists of a sealed ballistic transfer system and in a mechanical connector
activated by an external manipulation.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5.7.1.2 BOP DEPLOYMENT STACK

The BOP Deployment Stack is installed at top of BOP Stack, below the Gate Valve, and is
hydraulically operated
It includes Lower Actuators (No-Go Ram) to hang the bottom section of the Connector and
the Upper Actuator (Guide Ram) a mechanism to disengage the Connectors upper
section.
The system allows connection or disconnection of the Connector under pressure inside the
Lubricator Assembly.
5.7.1.3 GATE VALVES

After the Connector is parted, the upper part of the string is pulled up inside the Lubricator
above the Gate Valve.
Gate Valve is closed and the Lubricator pressure is bled off and it is disconnected and
removed from top of Gate Valve.
Gate Valve is the effective sealing barrier when the lower parted string is hung inside the
BOP and the upper section is retrieved.
5.7.2 GUN DEPLOYMENT

The length of the Perforating Gun Sections depends on the length of the Lubricator available
above the deployment stack.
The perforating guns can be deployed in 10, 20, or 30 ft. Sections.
5.7.3 JOB PREPARATION
General procedures
The following generic check list is an example of what should be used to ensure the safe
deployment of the guns into the well.
Check list shall be developed between Company and Coiled Tubing contractor to ensure
that objectives such as safety and best practices are met.
1) A pre-job safety meeting should be held prior to commencing the rig up operation (ref.
on herein par.5.4.2)
2) The tool string should be checked and the distance from the Casing Collar Locator
(CCL) to top of guns accurately measured.
3) Pressure tests shall be carried out on surface equipment as per Contractors
procedures and all tests shall to be recorded on chart recorder and signed by
Contractors operator and Company Supervisor.
4) BOP and BOP Deployment stack must be functionally tested with the Connector
system installed.
5) Guns sections should be loaded as per programme and the Connectors installed on
their terminations.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
6) All pressure operated firing system and associated tools should be verified and ensure
that are compatible with each other.
7) Hydraulic calculations must be checked and approved by Company Supervisor prior to
make up the gun string.
8) Each gun sections with the Connector installed should be individually measured and
numbered; all measurements should be cross checked by the Company Supervisor.
9) Contractors Supervisor must make a drawing of the bottom hole assembly showing
the relative position of all tools in the well bore.
10) Verify presence and compatibility of all the pick-up subs and lifting equipment.
5.7.3.1 RUNNING IN HOLE GENERAL PROCEDURE

A pre-job safety meeting with rig crew, related service company and Company personnel
should be held before running the Coiled Tubing deployed guns.
Topics to cover shall be running practices and safe handling of tools and rigged up Coiled
Tubing pressure control equipment.
A running procedure developed as a check list should be available to the CT and TCP
Supervisors and to the Company Supervisor.
Running in hole
Coiled Tubing riser and pressure control equipment should be rigged up and pressure tested
as per standard Coiled Tubing operation (ref. Completion Procedure Manual Par. 13.4)
a) Break the riser at quick connect sub.
b) Make up the BHA by connecting together Gun, Connector and Deployment Assembly
(composed by weight bars and CT Connector), and connected to the CT.
c) Make up the Riser connection, fill up with completion fluid and pressure test the riser
above the Gate Valve (ref. Completion Procedure Manual Par. 13.4.3)
d) Keep the Lubricator pressurised to the well pressure, if present.
e) Open the Gate Valve; all BOP and Christmas Tree valves should be open.
f) Pressure up the control line and open the SCSSV.
g) Set zero depth on the counter.
h) Proceed with running in hole as per TCP / CT Supervisors check list.
i) Connector should be positioned across the No-Go Rams into Deployment Stack.
j) Pump closed No-Go Rams, slack off CT weight.
k) Close the Guide Rams and disconnect the Connector and the Deployment Tool
Assembly.
l) Pick up on Coiled Tubing and close the Gate Valve
m) Bleed off the Lubricator pressure and break out the Riser connection ready for the next
BHA connection.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
All the gun sections and the safety spacer are made up following the steps a to l.
n) Make up the Firing Head to the CT BHA.

o) If request, make up the wireless Depth Correlation Tool on the BHA as per gun
deployment procedure.
NOTE: The wireless CCL technology enables coiled tubing operations to benefit
from real time surface read out with the accuracy of an electric line,
p) Remake the Lubricator connection and conduct the required pressure testing.
q) Run in hole few hundred feet, start pumping to confirm that the depth correlation tool
(CCL) is functioning and data acquisition is available from the tool.
r) When CCL is confirmed operational, RIH the BHA to the TD and correlate with the
existing logs. (for Coiled Tubing running procedure ref. par.13.5)
s) Displace completion fluid by circulating through the BHAs proper port a volume to be
confirmed by Company Supervisor, to give the required under-balance.
t) If required make the final correlation log as per Company procedure.
u) When depth as been correlated, apply injector break and proceed with the steps to
activate the firing system. (par. hereinafter)
v) Observe well for indications of gun firing.
Warning:
Flowing the well at surface has to be avoided to prevent CT and BHA to became stuck in
wellbore by the presence of perforators debris in the CT/Tubing annulus.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Figure 5-2 Coiled Tubing Gun Deployment System

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5.7.4 Firing Systems for Coiled Tubing Gun Deployment

It is normal practice to run the CT Deployment Guns with two firing systems, whenever
possible, to improve the chance of a successful operation especially when running and/or
retrieving the guns on the bottom of a completion in a live well A common combination is to
use Pressure actuated and/or Hydraulic actuated system as the primary and secondary
means of detonating the CT guns.
There are many types of Pressure / Hydraulic actuated systems firing mechanisms for CT
deployment guns.
Coiled Tubing firing systems commonly utilise a modified TCP technology adapted to Coiled
Tubing (ref. herein par. 5.6.3).
Only top down firing mechanisms should be used for safety when arming the Coiled Tubing
Deployed Guns.
The operation sequences and the pressure values of each firing mechanism should be
suitable for the well conditions and in accordance with the Company requirements stated on
Well Completion/Testing Program.
5.7.4.1 COILED TUBING PRESSURE ACTIVATED FIRING HEAD

The firing head is activated when a stainless steel ball is dropped from the surface or is
circulated downhole into the hammer piston and a differential pressure is established
across an operating piston that exceeds the value of the installed shear pins.
Pressure applied to the coiled tubing shears the retaining pins and forces the hammer
piston into the firing pin.
The firing pin detonates the initiator, which starts the detonation of the perforating assembly.
5.7.4.2 COILED TUBING HYDRAULICALLY ACTIVATED FIRING HEAD

System is suited for highly deviated well completion and when well conditions are
unfavourable for dropping a bar or a ball.
This pressure sensitive tool is designed to hydraulically detonate the gun at a prescribed
pressure.
When enough hydrostatic pressure is applied, the shear pins on a piston shear allowing a
firing pin to be driven into the initiator. This action detonates the guns.
5.7.4.3 COILED TUBING ELECTRONIC FIRING HEAD

Electronic type firing heads can be operated by a coded sequence of pump rate changes
through the Coiled Tubing.
The change in pump rate is measured at an orifice in the tool sensor, and the unique
combination of these pulses creates the special signal required to activate the battery
powered firing head.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Other electronic type firing head use Electromagnetic Telemetry waves sent through a
power amplifier through the earth to a downhole receiver which decodes the signal and
activates a controller assembly to release the safety mechanism allowing the firing pin to
detonate the gun.
5.7.5 Pulling out of hole procedure
The following generic check list is an example of what should be used to ensure the safe
deployment of the guns out of the well.
Check list shall be developed between Company and Coiled Tubing contractor to ensure
that objectives such as safety and best practices are met.
a) Start to POOH maintaining balanced pressure in the annulus and inside CT and
continue to monitor and record the two pressures.
b) Pull back BHA into Stripper to zero-depth reference
c) Run back to position the Connector across the No-Go Rams into Deployment Stack.
Record CT weight.
d) Record Static Tubing Head Pressure (STHP), close SCSSV and if required displace
well fluid from Lubricator and surface wellhead.
Reverse deploy guns as per deployment procedure.
5.8 MISFIRE PROCEDURES

In the event of any total misfire or no-fire of the perforating guns, it is imperative that the
perforating contractor is contacted immediately. The perforating contractor should, after
assessing the sequence of events, prepare a detailed procedure for recovery of the guns.
5.8.1 Mechanical Firing Head

1) Due to the nature of the mechanical system, the guns can be fired during any
subsequent fishing operations and this should be taken into account.
2) Adequate time should be allowed for the detonating bar to reach the firing head before
a misfire is suspected. Allow twice the estimated time. If the guns do not fire, it is
probably due to the detonating bar hanging up on debris on top of the firing head, or in
a restriction further up the tubing.
3) Once a misfire has been established fishing operations will commence in an attempt to
fire the guns. Record the following data:
OD of fishing neck
ID of the smallest restriction in the string
Depth of the firing head.
Length of the detonating bar
Distance from the top of the firing head to the communication ports in the tubing.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4) Ensure that the following slickline tools are available and on site:
Overshot designed to catch the fishing neck
11/4 ins OD bailer
11/4 ins lead impression block
Chisel point bailer bottom for the 11/4 ins bailer.
5) Make sure that the length of the lubricator is adequate to accommodate the toolstring
and the length of the detonating bar if recovered.
6) Confirm the distance from the firing head to the ports in the tubing string. This should
be sufficient to allow both the toolstring and detonating bar to remain below the ports.
7) Rig up slickline and prepare the toolstring with an overshot to catch the detonating bar.
8) When running in hole, confirm the fluid level in the well. Record this depth.
9) Shot detection equipment will be used and it should be monitored during all fishing
operations and attempts to fire the guns.
10) When the detonating bar is located, spud down as hard as possible. Do not pick up
straight away. If the bar moves, chase it to the firing head as quickly as possible. This
will ensure that the slickline tool will not be above the entry ports (should the guns fire)
and be blown up the well. Repeat this process three times.
11) If the guns do not fire fish the detonating bar and pull out of the hole.
1/4
12) Rig up with 1 ins bailer and Chisel Point bailer bottom. The bailer should be
dressed to a sharp point.
13) Run in the hole and jar down as hard as possible on the firing pin. Again ensure that
the toolstring does not get pulled above the entry ports. Pull out of the hole and
inspect the leading edge of the chisel point. Damage will indicate whether or not
something hard (firing pin or foreign object) is being struck.
14) Carefully observe for any material recovered in the bailer, it may indicate what is
preventing the detonating bar from reaching the firing pin. Fine black powdery
deposits are an indication that the guns have fired and will be associated with a smell
of burnt cordite. Hydrocarbons may also be present.
15) Repeat bailing operations until it is certain that the bailer is striking the firing pin.
16) If it becomes obvious that the bailer is striking something other than the firing pin, run a
lead impression block.
17) Check the fluid level in the well during every wireline run. Monitor carefully for
losses/gains.
18) When it has been determined that the firing pin has been struck, and the guns have
not fired, pull out of the hole with the drop bar.
19) In the event that a retrievable head has been used, this should be retrieved at this
point and inspected.
If it has not fired, run another firing head on slickline and repeat the procedure.
If the head has fired, rig down wireline.
20) Top up the well with fluid, and if not already done so, rig up circulating lines from the
cement unit to the production string. Attempt to pump into the formation to confirm
that the guns have not fired. The leak-off pressure should be taken into consideration.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
21) Unseat the packer and circulate the well contents to kill fluid. Circulate and condition
the brine. Prepare to pull the completion and retrieve the guns.
22) Once the firing head has been retrieved the guns are safe, and can be pulled from the
well.
23) If it proves impossible to retrieve the detonating bar, the string and guns will have to be
pulled. This is potentially very hazardous. Refer to base and seek the advice of the
TCP gun manufacturer and senior Company personnel. No further action should be
taken without written instructions endorsed by all parties concerned.
5.8.2 Hydraulic Firing Head

The hydraulic firing head (tubing pressure) is normally run with a time delay to allow
underbalance conditions to be re-established after the tubing pressure is increased.
1) If no indication of the guns firing is observed, twice the duration of the time delay
should be allowed before repeating.
2) If the guns will not fire at the design pressure, increase the pressure (in increments of
500 or 1,000psi) and re-apply, allowing twice the time delay before repeating.
3) Monitor any fluid gains or losses.
4) Monitor the shot detection equipment. In the event that it is established that the guns
will not fire, the TCP representative on location will evaluate the situation in conjunction
with the Company representative. Both Company and the TCP contractor bases will be
consulted. A detailed procedure will be prepared based on the current status of the
operation, prior to any further action.
5.8.3 Fixed Hydraulic Firing Head

With this type of firing head, a misfire is potentially the most hazardous situation and both
Company and the TCP contractor operations management staff must endorse any further
instructions or procedures for recovery of the guns.
5.8.4 Retrievable Hydraulic Firing Head

The firing head must be recovered using slickline, thus disarming the guns prior to their
recovery. The TCP contractor will at this point provide a procedure based on the current
status of the operation. Once the firing head has been recovered, the guns are entirely safe
and can be retrieved from the well.
5.8.5 Coiled Tubing Perforating

Perforating procedures using coiled tubing has been extensively employed to fully take
advantage of perforating long intervals underbalanced and possibly in high angle or
horizontal wells. The procedures used are contractor equipment and field specific and need
to be drafted for each individual situation.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
6. GRAVEL PACKING PROCEDURES
There are two gravel pack applications, one for open hole completions and the other for
inside cased hole. This section contains the common procedures for both open hole and
internal gravel packing.
For perforating gun applications and gun design options, refer to the Company Completion
Design Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7100).
6.1 GRAVEL PLACEMENT OBJECTIVES

It is imperative that the perforation tunnels and the screen to casing annulus, or screen to
open hole annulus, be completely filled with clean, highly permeable gravel pack sand. In
addition a gravel reserve above the top perforation should be created to allow for any settling
of the pack that may occur. Completely filled perforation tunnels and annular areas result in
minimal pressure losses through the gravel packed completion, which in turn enables
maximum productivity.
While pumping the gravel pack slurry, after it passes the crossover tool, there are only two
paths for the carrier fluid to flow. One flow path for the fluid is through the gravel pack
screen then returning to surface. The other flow path for the fluid is through leak off to the
formation.
In internal gravel packs, carrier fluid leak off to the formation through the perforations is
essential to carry the gravel pack sand into and efficiently pack off the tunnels. If insufficient
leak off is caused, the perforations will not be filled with gravel pack sand. However on the
other hand, if excessive leak-off is encountered, the gravel pack sand may bridge
prematurely in the annulus, resulting in voids throughout the length of the gravel pack.
These voids may fill from above due to gravity settling of the pack but if the voids do not fill
with gravel pack sand, two results may occur:
Produced sand will erode holes in the screen and the gravel pack will fail.
The voids will fill with much lower permeability formation sand and productivity
will be reduced.
6.2 SCREEN SIZE

The sand grade used in gravel pack designs is usually selected with a size 5 to 6 times
greater than the average formation sand particle size, which is determined by sieving. The
space between the wires in a screen is termed the Gauge which in turn is selected
according to the grade of pack sand the screen must retain. The gauge is usually 0.5 - 0.9
of the smallest pack sand grain. Tables of the various sand grades, grain sizes and
recommended screen gauge is available from any of the gravel pack service providers.
The OD of the screen is selected according to the production casing size in order that there
is enough annulus clearance whilst running and fishing with an overshot, if necessary. The
recommended annulus clearance is circa 1.000ins. The Well Operations Supervisor should
check the screen clearance and fishing capability before running.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
6.3 GRAVEL CALCULATIONS

The fluids programme to be used will be detailed in the Completions Programme including
pre-pad and slurry recipes. The slurry and sand volumes contained in the programme need
to be verified before the gravel pack operations using the calculations given below.
6.3.1 Sand Volume Required

The first stage of a sand volume calculation is to prepare a spreadsheet with information
about the well geometry and should focus on the spaces to be occupied by pack sand. The
3
standard issue of pack sand is in 100lb sacks which occupies 1ft , therefore the volume of
3
the spaces should also be calculated in ft .
This calculation depends on whether it is an open hole or internal gravel pack job and if a
sump packer is used.
Open Hole
Step 1
Calculate the total annular volume outside the screen to the planned height of the sand:
Total Annular Volume = Screen/Hole Annulus + Blank Pipe/Hole Annulus + 40-60ft
volume surplus
If the planned sand height was up into the casing, this reduced volume would need to be
considered.
Step 2
Calculate the volume of sand in the rat hole, if applicable:
Hole volume below screens.
Step 3
Calculate total sand required:
Add the calculated volumes from steps 1 and 2.
Internal
Step 1
Calculate the annular volume outside the screen to the planned height of the sand:
Screen/Casing Annulus + Blank Pipe/Casing Annulus + 40-60ft volume surplus
Step 2
Calculate the volume of sand in the rat hole, if applicable:
Hole Volume below screens
Step 3
Calculate the volume required for the perforations:
3
Length of Perforations x Volume factor (usually 1ft /ft)
Calculate total sand required:
Add the calculated volumes from steps 1, 2 and 3.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Total Sand Weight

Total Volume ft3 x 100lb/ft3
6.3.2 Carrier Fluid Volume

The weight of carrier fluid is dependent upon the weight of fluid required to control the well.
An amount of the carrier fluid is usually set aside for use as pre-pad and sometimes a post-
pad or push pad to segregate if from the other wells fluids. The pre-pad is normally about
10bbls and the post pad 5bbls.
The total volume of the slurry then depends upon how much sand can be carried by the
carrier fluid at for that particular weight of fluid to be used. This will be confirmed in the well
programme or by the gravel pack technician. The total volume (galls) of slurry then required
is simply the total sand volume required divided by the sand carried per gal.
Total Slurry Volume (galls) = Total Sand Volume lbs/Sand Volume (lbs per gall)
Some of the early part of the gravel pack procedure should be conducted in the squeeze
position to pack it into the perforations. If no losses are caused, there will be no sand
packed to the end of the tunnels.
6.4 COMMON GRAVEL PACK PROCEDURES

Refer to the well clean up procedures in section 4.
1) Thoroughly clean all rig circulating system equipment. Prepare a dedicated active pit
for filtered completion fluid.
2) Filter the completion fluid with a Diatomaceous Earth (DE) filter press and downstream
absolute cartridge filters to remove all potential damaging particles. Pump from the
storage pit and return the filtered completion fluid into the active clean pit.
Note: All fluids pumped downhole during the completion phase must be filtered
prior to use.
3) Run in hole with casing scrapers and a short open ended tailpipe on workstring.
Thoroughly scrape the casing through all intervals to be perforated and all packer
setting depths (Refer to section 4.2).
4) Displace the wellbore fluid with the filtered completion fluid. Circulate with filtered
completion fluid till returns are clean according to the well programme.
5) Rig up electric line. Make gauge ring and junk basket run to TD. Pull out of the hole
with the gauge ring and junk basket, if necessary.
6) Verify screen gauge and gravel delivered is correct according to the well programme.
6.5 OPEN HOLE GRAVEL PACK PROCEDURE

The procedure described herein is based on Bakers gravel pack systems.
1) Pick up the hole opener and trip to the bottom of the production casing.
2) Establish circulating rates and pressures, then drop the activating ball to open the hole
opener.
3) Drill the open hole length with the hole opener.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4) Pull out of the hole.

5) Conduct any stimulation treatment that may be necessary for the particular formation
(this may be done post gravel pack, if desired).
6) Ensure the fluid in the hole has been properly filtered and cleaned before running the
gravel pack.
7) Drift all BHA tubulars including GP equipment and wash pipe.
8) Pick up and assemble the gravel pack assembly in the rotary table as follows, from
bottom up, running at a slow speed to prevent damage to the packing element and to
prevent prematurely setting the packer.
Blank bull nosed plug
Sand screens
Blank pipe.
9) Run flush joint washpipe inside, and to the bottom of, the screen and blank pipe. The
assembly consisting of the following items is then picked up and made up onto the
screen assembly.
Knock Out Isolation Valve
Blank pipe
Shear Out Safety Joint
Indicating Sub
Crossover Sub
Gravel Pack Extension with Sliding Sleeve
Gravel Pack Packer.
10) The gravel pack service toolstring assembly is then made up to the previous assembly:
Shifting Tool
Gravel Pack Crossover Tool
Hydraulic Setting Tool.
Note: Apply thread compound sparingly to the pin ends of the connections
only.
11) Run in the hole slowly with the completion assembly (90sec per 90ft stand). Set down
into, and pick up gently out of, the slips.
12) Record the pick-up and slack-off weights when reaching the packer setting depth.
13) Once the assembly is positioned on depth, rig up the gravel infuser pumping
equipment, manifold and lines. Test to 5,000psi.
14) Establish circulation, record circulating pressure and drop the packer setting ball.
Allow time for ball to gravitate to the ball seat in the crossover tool, roughly
5min/1,000ft.
15) Set the packer by slowly pressuring up the workstring according to the steps and
pressures stated in the well programme.
16) Verify slip anchoring of the packer by alternately setting down and picking up 10,000-
15,000lbs weight.
17) Slack off to the neutral position and test the packer by pressuring the casing to
1,000psi for 5min.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
18) Since 1,000psi annular pressure releases the crossover tool from the packer, the
crossover tool may now be snapped out of the packer. Alternatively, the crossover tool
may be released from the packer by turning 15 rotations to the right at the packer
depth holding a slight upstrain.
19) Raise the crossover tool to the reverse circulating position. Apply the appropriate
workstring pressure to shear the ball seat in the crossover tool. Break circulation in the
reverse direction at 3bpm and record the pump pressure.
20) Pickle the workstring by circulating the pickling agent to the end of the workstring.
Reverse circulate 1.5 workstring volumes of filtered completion fluid until returns are
clean.
21) Lower the crossover tool and set down 10,000lbs on the packer. This is the squeeze
position; mark the pipe at the rotary table level. Establish injection pressures at 3, 2, 1,
and 0.5bpm. Do not exceed the formation fracture pressure.
Note: If injectivity is low, an acid stimulation treatment may be conducted prior

to performing the gravel pack.
22) Raise the crossover tool to neutral weight plus an additional 2ft. This is the circulating
position;
1
mark the pipe at the rotary table level. Establish circulating pressures at 3, 2,
1, and /2 bpm. Monitor the return rate with a flowmeter to determine the leak-off rate
to the zone. If full returns are observed, partially close the annular BOP to hold back-
pressure and induce leak-off. Do not exceed the formation fracture pressure.
23) Raise the crossover tool to the reverse circulating position. Infuse gravel pack sand
into completion fluid at the desired mix ratio and pump a circulating rate of 3bpm. 1 A
pump rate of 3bpm must be maintained to achieve a fluid velocity of 500ft/min in 3 /2
workstring.
24) When the sand is 5-10bbls above the packer, lower the crossover tool into the
circulating position. Continue displacing the gravel with filtered completion brine until
an initial pressure increase is observed due to gravel covering the screens. While
pumping, allow the pressure to build to 1,500-2,500psi over the initial circulating
pressure at a1 given rate. Maintain this sandout pressure while slowing the pump rate
to 2, 1, and /2 bpm. Allow the pressure to bleed off to the formation. Calculate the
gravel height above the screen top using the linear flow equation.
25) Do not re-stress the pack. Close the annular BOP and apply 500psi to the annulus.
Raise the crossover tool to the reversing position. Reverse out excess gravel plus two
workstring volumes. Divert the gravel returns to the slurry dehydration tank and
determine the volume of gravel reversed out. The volume of gravel placed can then be
calculated by subtracting the volume reversed out and the screen/open hole, blank
pipe/open hole and blank pipe/casing annular volumes from the total volume of gravel
pumped.
26) To test the gravel pack, lower the crossover tool into the circulating position and
attempt to circulate at the same rate and pressure achieved earlier. If sandout
pressure cannot be achieved, mix and pump another batch of gravel. Reverse out
excess gravel. Repeat this step until final sandout occurs.
27) Pull out of the hole with the service toolstring.
28) Revert to the completion procedures in the completion programme.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
6.6 CASED HOLE GRAVEL PACK PROCEDURE

The procedure described herein is based on Bakers gravel pack systems.
1) Prepare the hole as per section 6.3.2.
2) Run in hole with the sump packer on electric line. Correlate with the GR/CCL to the
reference log and set the packer at approx. 6ft below the planned depth of the bottom
perforation. Pull out of the hole and rig down the electric line.
3) Pick up the perforating assembly and run in the hole (Refer to section 5).
Note: Use a Tubing Conveyed Perforating system with the highest possible shot
density (typically 12spf), with Gravel Pack or Big Hole charges.
4) Establish the desired underbalance.
Note: This operation should be performed with the underbalance stated in the
well programme (normally 500-1,000psi depending on the formation
strength.
5) Verify the proper positioning of the perforating guns by tagging the sump packer and
space out the string at the correct depth.
6) Set the packer.
7) Rig up the control head and surface lines (if on a floater this will be done before step 6
above).
8) Detonate the perforating guns by appropriate procedure.
9) Flow the well to sufficiently remove all debris from the perforations.
10) Reverse circulate two workstring volumes with filtered completion fluid to stabilise the
well. Continue circulating and filtering until returns are clean.
11) Monitor the well to determine if it has stabilised. Record any fluid losses or gains. If
necessary to control fluid loss, spot a fluid loss control pill.
12) Unseat the packer and reciprocate the string to fully release the packer and repeat one
more complete circulation.
13) Pull out of the hole with the TCP assembly, monitoring for fluid losses.
14) If there is evidence of formation sand in the returns, pick up and run a scraper with a
tailpipe to enter and wash down to the sump packer.
15) Pick up and assemble the gravel pack assembly in the rotary table as follows, from
bottom up, running at a slow speed to prevent damage to the packing element and to
prevent prematurely setting the packer.
Snap Latch Seal Assembly
Sand screens
Blank pipe
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
16) Run flush joint washpipe inside, and to the bottom of, the screen through the blank
pipe. The assembly consisting of the following items is then picked up and made up
onto the screen assembly.
Knock Out Isolation Valve
Shear Out Safety Joint
Crossover Sub
Gravel Pack Extension with Sliding Sleeve
Gravel Pack Packer.
17) The gravel pack service toolstring assembly is then made up to the previous assembly:
Shifting Tool
Gravel Pack Crossover Tool
Hydraulic Setting Tool.
Note: Apply thread compound sparingly to the pin ends of the connections
only.
18) Run in hole slowly with the completion assembly (90sec per 90ft stand). Set down into,
and pick up gently out of, the slips.
19) Record the pick-up and slack-off weights when reaching the packer setting depth.
20) Record pick-up and slack-off weights one stand above the sump packer. Tag the
sump packer and set down sufficient weight to force the latch of the snap latch to
engage the packer. If desired, the latch may be snapped out of the packer with pull to
verify correct operation.
21) Once the assembly is positioned on depth, rig up the gravel infuser pumping
equipment, manifold and lines. Test to 5,000psi. Establish circulation, record
circulating pressure and drop the packer setting ball. Allow time for ball to gravitate to
the ball seat in the crossover tool, roughly 5min/1,000ft.
22) Set the packer by slowly pressuring up the workstring according to the steps and
pressures stated in the well programme.
23) Verify slip anchoring of the packer by alternately setting down and picking up 10,000-
15,000lbs weight.
24) Slack off to the neutral position and test the packer by pressuring the casing to
1,000psi for 5min.
25) Since 1,000psi annular pressure releases the crossover tool from the packer, the
crossover tool may now be snapped out of the packer. Alternatively, the crossover tool
may be released from the packer by turning 15 rotations to the right at the packer
depth with a slight upstrain.
26) Raise the crossover tool to the reverse circulating position. Apply the appropriate
workstring pressure to shear the ball seat in the crossover tool. Break circulation in the
reverse direction at 3bpm and record the pump pressure.
27) Pickle the workstring by circulating the pickling agent to the end of the workstring.
Reverse circulate 1.5 workstring volumes of filtered completion fluid until returns are
clean.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
28) Lower the crossover tool and set down 10,000lbs on the packer. This is the squeeze
position; mark the pipe at the rotary table level. Establish injection pressures at 3, 2, 1,
and 0.5bpm. Do not exceed the formation fracture pressure.
Note: If injectivity is low, an acid stimulation treatment may be desired prior to

performing the gravel pack.
29) Raise the crossover tool to neutral weight plus an additional 2ft. This is the circulating
position;
1
mark the pipe at the rotary table level. Establish circulating pressures at 3, 2,
1, and /2bpm. Monitor the return rates with a flowmeter to determine the leak-off rate
to the zone. If full returns are observed, partially close the annular BOP to hold back-
pressure and induce leak-off. Do not exceed the formation fracture pressure.
30) Raise the crossover tool to the reverse circulating position. Infuse gravel pack sand
into completion fluid at the desired mix ratio and at a circulating rate of 3bpm. A pump
1
rate of 3bpm must be maintained to achieve a fluid velocity of 500ft/min in 3 /2
workstring.
31) When the sand is 5-10bbls above the packer, lower the crossover tool into the
circulating position. Continue displacing the gravel with filtered completion brine until
an initial pressure increase is observed due to gravel covering the screens. While
pumping, allow the pressure to build to 1,500-2,500psi over the initial circulating
pressure at1
a given rate. Maintain this sandout pressure while slowing the pump rate to
2, 1, and /2bpm. Allow the pressure to bleed off to the formation. Calculate the gravel
height above the screen top using the linear flow equation.
32) Do not re-stress the pack. Close the annular BOP and apply 500psi to the annulus.
Raise the crossover tool to the reversing position. Reverse out excess gravel plus two
workstring volumes. Divert the gravel returns to the slurry dehydration tank and
determine the volume of gravel reversed out. The volume of gravel placed behind the
casing can then be calculated by subtracting the volume reversed out and the
screen/casing and blank pipe/casing annular volumes from the total volume of gravel
pumped.
33) To test the gravel pack, lower the crossover tool into circulating position and attempt to
circulate at the same rate and pressure achieved earlier. If sandout pressure cannot
be achieved, mix and pump another batch of gravel. Reverse out any excess gravel.
Repeat this step until final sandout occurs. Pull out of the hole with the service
toolstring.
34) Revert to the completion procedures in the completion programme.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Service
Seal Unit
With X-Over
Open
Automatic
J-Latch
Shear Pins
Tying Seal
Unit to Packer
Production
Permanent- Seal Unit
Retrievable
Packer
Swivel
Saftey
Joint
Gravel Pack
Sand Screen
figure 6-1 - Typical Open Hole Gravel Pack Installation

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Service
Seal Unit
With X-Over
Open
Automatic
J-Latch
Shear Pins
Tying Seal
Unit to Packer
Production
Permanent- Seal Unit
Retrievable
Packer
Swivel
Saftey
Joint
Gravel Pack
Sand Screen
figure 6-2 - Typical Cased Hole Gravel Pack Installation

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
7. PACKER INSTALLATION
In some completion programmes, packers may be set on electric wireline, such as when
installing reference packers for gravel packs or using a packer as a plug. Normally it is
preferred to install a production packer on the completion tubing string in order to obtain
single trip installation saving unwarranted wireline trips and, hence, reduce cost. Refer to
the Completion Design Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7100) for various packer completion designs
and installation methods.
An advantage of setting a packer on wireline is its quick and simple and accurate setting.
This ensures that the packer is not set across a casing coupling or can be used as a
reference for TCP gun depth correlation. A disadvantage, other than trip cost saving, is that
the packer is not pressure tested until the tubing string is installed.
Packers to be set in highly deviated wells may be installed on a workstring where wireline
would not reach. The packers set on a workstring can be set mechanically or hydraulically by
applying pressure to the workstring.
Selective completions may have a number of tubing retrievable type packers installed in a
single trip which are set in sequence.
Company policies for the use of retrievable and permanent packers are fully outlined in the
Companys Completion Design Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7100).
Both tubing and wireline set packer installation procedures are described in this section.
7.1 HOLE PREPARATION

Before running any packer (wireline or tubing installed), a junk basket with a gauge ring
should be run to below the depth at which the packer is to be set. This is to ensure that the
packer can successfully reach the setting depth. The gauging/junk basket procedure is:
1) Rig up the electric line for running in cased hole.
2) Confirm that the gauge ring is the correct size for the production casing or liner.
3) Run the junk basket and gauge ring slowly observing the CCL to confirm that the tool
is moving at the same speed as the cable.
4) If the junk basket is run to TD, when pulling out of the hole, it is important not to slack
off on the cable as this will open the junk basket and release the contents. Speed and
tension should be closely monitored while pulling out.
5) If the junk basket is full of junk, repeat the procedure until no more debris is recovered.
7.2 WIRELINE PACKER SETTING PROCEDURE

In this method the packer is run on a setting tool and is set by application of controlled
pressure from a slow burning powder charge acting through a piston which, in turn, forces
the packer through its setting sequence. When the sequence is completed the packer
setting tool is automatically released from the packer and is confirmation of correct
operation.
The procedures given below are generic and not specific to any particular packer
manufacturer, therefore alterations to these procedures may be necessary to suit a
particular packer.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
7.2.1 Running Procedure

As the setting tool is operated using an explosive charge, radio silence will be required when
making up and running the tool. Also, when the tool has been fired, the body will contain
high pressure gas, hence special care will have to be taken when it is being rigged down at
surface.
1) The Company Supervisor shall verify that the completion equipment, including the
packer system, corresponds to the details in the completion programme and has the
appropriate correct part numbers, serial numbers and certification.
2) Assemble the packer adapter kit and setting tool. Each packer will have an
appropriate packer kit to fit between the specific type and size of packer and the type
and size of setting gun.
3) Rig down the gauge ring/junk basket.
4) Pick up the lower packer tailpipe assembly and set it in the rotary table installing a
collar clamp above the slips as there is little weight at this time.
5) Pick up the other tailpipe sub-assemblies and make up them up in sequence according
to the well programme.
6) Make up the packer to the top of the packer tailpipe.
7) Install a plug by wireline in the packer tailpipe landing nipple; fill up the assembly with
brine.
8) Install the packer test adapter and pressure test the packer/packer tailpipe assembly to
the pressure stated in the Completion Programme.
9) Remove the test adapter and retrieve the wireline plug.
10) Obtain radio silence and make up the cable head to the setting tool/packer assembly.
11) Pick-up the packer running tool assembly and make it up to the packer.
12) Pick up the assembly and remove the collar clamp and pull the slips.
13) Conduct a weight check.
14) Run in the hole at the recommended speed given by the packer supplier or the logging
contractor whichever is applicable.
15) Make a correlation logging pass over a suitable interval and record the GR/CCL log.
16) Correlate the depth measurements to the reference log depths.
17) Position the assembly at the correct setting depth.
18) After the Logging Engineer and Well Operations Supervisor have satisfied themselves
that the toolstring is at the correct depth, the setting charge will be fired.
Note: Do not tag the packer after setting, as the adapter kit may become stuck
in the packer, resulting in a fishing job.
19) Pull the tool back to surface carefully, ensuring that all radio silence procedures are
followed.
20) When the toolstring is back at surface, inspect the adapter kit and setting tool to verify
the proper setting of the packer, handling carefully in case there has been a misfire.
21) Release any pressure from the setting tool and rig down.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
7.3 TUBING INSTALLED PACKER SETTING PROCEDURE

If the packer is to be set on a workstring, a packer adapter is required to allow connection
between the packer and the workstring. If the packer is to be set by hydraulic pressure, a
setting tool similar to that describe for wireline setting is required and attached to the
workstring.
If the packer is to be installed on the completion tubing string, all the completion components
will be installed in the string as it is run. This includes the packer tailpipe, tubing movement
device, landing nipples, circulating devices, SSSV, etc.
7.3.1 Workstring Running Procedure

The hole will be gauged according to section 7.1.
2) Assemble the packer adapter kit (and setting tool, if hydraulic set). Each packer will
have an appropriate packer kit to fit between the specific type and size of packer and
the type and size of setting gun or workstring.
4) Pick up the other tailpipe sub-assemblies and make up them up in sequence according
to the well programme.
6) Install a plug by wireline in the packer tailpipe landing nipple; fill up the assembly with
brine.
7) Install the packer test adapter and pressure test the packer/packer tailpipe assembly to
the pressure stated in the Completion Programme.
8) Remove the test adapter and retrieve the wireline plug.
9) Pick up the setting tool and first joint of tubing and make up onto the packer.
10) Pick up the assembly and remove the collar clamp and then the slips.
11) Run in the hole at the recommended speed given by the packer supplier.
12) Trip to depth according to pipe measurement.
13) If accuracy is required, rig up electric line and run a GR/CCL and correlate the
workstring to the casing.
14) Set the packer mechanically or hydraulically according to the packer setting procedure.
15) If possible, pressure test the packer according to the programme.
16) Shear off the workstring from the packer and pull the workstring. The hydraulic
running tool usually self releases from the packer similar to the wireline setting
procedure, therefore do not set back down to check the packer otherwise the adapter
may be come stuck.
17) Pull the workstring with the adapter kit back to surface and check the shear pins to
verify the setting of the packer.
18) Rig down.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
7.3.2 Completion String Running Procedure

The hole will be gauged according to section 7.1.
3) Pick up the other tailpipe sub-assemblies and make up them up in sequence.
5) If it is felt necessary to pressure test the packer tailpipe, run a wireline plug and
conduct the test as per the manufacturers procedure.
6) Pick up the other packer accessories and install onto the packer.
7) Pick up the assembly and remove the collar clamp and then the slips.
8) Run in the hole and set the slips and collar clamp again.
9) Pick up the first joint of tubing and make up onto the string.
10) Run in the hole at the recommended speed given by the packer supplier installing all
completion components.
11) Trip to depth according to pipe measurement.
12) Rig up electric line and run a GR/CCL and correlate the string depth, hence packer
depth to the casing. If the tubing is high chrome content, consideration must be given
to a different method of depth correlation
13) Determine spacing out for the tubing hanger and install pup joints and the tubing
hanger.
14) Trip into the hole, record string weight and place the packer on the correct depth.
15) Conduct a tubing string gauging procedure to confirm nipple depths and sizes.
16) Either, drop the packer setting ball or rig up wireline and run the packer setting plug/
standing valve (Refer to the General Wireline Procedures Manual STAP-P-1-M-7110).
17) Rig up the pump line to the test head and fill up the string with brine.
18) Pressure up on the string to set the packer, according to the manufacturers
procedure.
19) Set the tubing hanger, if not already set, and conduct all other completion pressure
and function test procedures.
20) Pull the packer setting plug/standing valve, if necessary.
21) Continue with the completions programme.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8. COMPLETION INSTALLATION
The procedures in this section describe the procedures for equipment pre-installation
checking and completion installation.
8.1 CARBON STEEL AND PLASTIC COATED TUBING

1) Tally and number the tubing joints as soon as they are unloaded from the transport.
2) On the pipe rack remove the thread protectors to allow inspection and cleaning.
3) All pin and box ends should be inspected for damage paying particular attention to the
seal areas.
4) All joints must be drifted with a suitable tubing drift. Drifts should be 42 long to
standard API/ISO specification, blunt nosed, and plastic coated or with rubber ends to
prevent damaging the seal areas on the connections.
5) Rejected joints should be clearly marked with red paint and prepared for back-loading
as per API RP5A5.
6) While the tubing is being laid out on the pipe deck, the pin and box threads should be
cleaned with either a suitable detergent or steam or high pressure water. Avoid using
water, if at all possible. Ensure the detergents used are in accordance with personnel
Safety Policies.
7) When preparing a tubing tally, measurements should be carried out twice, preferably
by two independent personnel with different measuring tapes. When a comparison of
the measurements is made, if any length is off by more than 0.01ft, recheck the tally.
Simple errors of +/- 1ft are sometimes made where the tape has been mis-read.
8.2 CHROME TUBULARS

Chrome tubulars are extremely susceptible to galling and to local cold working if improperly
stressed or impacted during shipping and handling.
Excessive bending during lifting of single joints, or bundles of joints, can also cause
unacceptable levels of stress to be imparted.
Improper handling can lead to an increase in hardness or change in mechanical properties
which may result in detrimental forms of corrosion such as sulphide stress corrosion
cracking and uneven corrosion.
8.2.1 Transportation
Handling, transportation, and temporary storage of tubular goods will comply with Section 3
of API RP 5C1.
8.2.2 Transport From The Mill

Chrome tubulars will be dispatched from the mill in special transport frames. These will be
loaded into wooden crates for shipment. The tubulars will be covered by nylon sheets, and
wrapped with Drilltec Econorap. The transport boxes are designed to prevent movement of,
and contact between individual joints during transportation. The wrapping will also minimise
the risk of the tubing coming into contact with seawater during transportation. The transport
frames will be removed from the wooden crates prior to shipment offshore.
Note: Webbing type strops for cargo handling is not permitted.

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8.2.3 Road Transport

The transport boxes will be properly loaded, and supported along their entire
length.
Chrome tubulars will not be removed from their transport frames until arrival on
the installation.
Security of the bolts on the transport frames will be checked by a Company
representative, or an approved designate, before lifting to ensure that the
tubulars are secured, and so prevent movement of the tubulars within the
transport frames.
The transport frames will be secured using nylon straps.
Any loose tubing should also be secured by nylon straps.
8.2.4 Marine Transport

The transport frames will be arranged on deck in order to prevent longitudinal
movement.
Protection, such as tyres or heavy rope, will be used to protect the transport
frames from other cargo.
The transport frames will not be stacked more than three high.
No other cargo will be placed on top of the transport frames.
8.2.5 Handling At The Wellsite

1) Chrome tubulars must not be allowed to contact other metallic material, including
supports and tubulars of the same material.
2) Chains, monkey wrenches, hooks, shackles, etc. will not be used for handling chrome
tubulars.
3) Where metal impact or handling devices have inadvertently been used the tubing joint
will be set aside for further checking.
4) Only lift tubulars with nylon strops.
5) Plastic supports will be used to support chrome tubulars and prevent rolling. Wood
and rope are not recommended as they tend to retain moisture, and may become
contaminated with chlorine or other chemicals harmful to chrome tubulars.
6) The recommended stacking heights for various sizes of tubing are:
7 29 lbs/ft 6 rows
51/2 17 lbs/ft 8 rows
1
4 /2 12.6 lbs/ft 9 rows.
7) Chrome tubulars will have sufficient supports to accommodate the weight and number
o
of pipe, and will be laid out with enough space for a full 360 revolution for cleaning
and inspection purposes.
8) The supports will be properly spaced to prevent bellying of the pipe, and so prevent
water accumulation.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Note: Where possible, the pipe should be racked at a 20o incline to ensure
proper drainage of water, with the box end being raised to prevent
accumulation of water in the threads.
9) As each row is laid out the thread protectors will be removed and cleaned and the
threads cleaned and inspected by an approved thread inspector, i.e.:
Clean the threads using a steam jet.
Do not use oil based solvents and wire brushes.
Dry the threads with compressed air.
Apply a thin coating of Molycote to the clean threads.
10) If driftable open ended protectors are provided then they will be installed (after
cleaning as above), and the tubing drifted with the appropriate size drift.
11) If closed end protectors are provided then they will be installed after drifting the tubing.
12) The tubing will be drifted from end to end using a nylock drift to API/ISO spec. The drift
dimensions will be as per (API RP 5A5):
7" 29 lbs/ft 6.059" (153.9 mm)
51/2 " 17 lbs/ft 4.767" (121.1 mm)
1
4 /2" 12.6 lbs/ft 3.833" (97.3 mm).
13) The diameter of the drifts will be checked regularly during the drifting operation.
14) Extreme care should be taken at pin and box sealing areas.
15) If a joint is rejected for any reason, i.e. fails to drift, or if the threads are damaged, the
joint will identified with red paint. It will then be repackaged and sent back onshore. A
report detailing the reason for rejection will be sent to the Workover Superintendent in
the Company office.
16) The tubing will be measured from the end of the coupling to the pin threads by the
designated Company Representative and the entire length corrected for make up loss.
For shouldered connections measure the length from box end to the shoulder on the
pin.
17) Record the joint number as per stencilled description. The measurements will be
recorded on the tubing tally form.
18) Make up loss details should be sourced from manufacturers technical data sheets.
8.2.6 Thread Compounds

Only API Modified thread compounds with a friction factor of 1 will be used as per (API Bul.
5A3).
Note: A thread compound described as API Modified does not necessarily have
a friction factor of 1.
1) Avoid contamination of the thread compound by water, rain, snow, etc. whilst it is being
applied.
2) Do not use thread compounds which have been contaminated by any kind of
extraneous matter, i.e. sand, dirt, water, solvent, drilling fluid, etc. It is recommended
to use a new can of compound and new brushes for application.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
3) Thread compound should be kept warm to ensure even distribution.

4) Thread compound should be applied with an automatic pipe dope applicator when
available. This is used on the box end, and will apply only a thin film of thread
compound, as recommended both for joint make-up, and to avoid extrusion of excess
pipe dope into the tubing.
5) If no pipe dope applicator is available, apply thread compound sparingly to the entire
pin end and to only the shoulder seal and first three threads of the box using a new,
clean, 1 ins fibre brush, ensuring that it fills the thread roots and covers the seal faces
and torque shoulder adequately.
Note: When using a brush, it is easy to over apply the joint with thread dope.
By applying thread compound to the pin end only the amount extruded
into the tubing as the connection is made up will be minimal, thus
minimising any build up on wireline tools, and contamination of the
formation.
7) For VAM connections the minimum quantity of dope required is given by the following
relationship:
Minimum weight (grams) = 10 x pipe OD (ins)
i.e. 51/2 pipe requires 55 grams or 2 ounces.
8) Store thread compounds in a clean, warm, dry environment away from direct sunlight.
Upturn the compound containers periodically while in storage to prevent solids
separating out.
9) A thread inspector must inspect all threads.
8.2.7 Running Chrome Tubulars

Before running any chrome tubulars, a pre-job meeting will be held with all relevant
personnel, i.e. drill crew, tong operators, deck crew, crane operator, etc. to ensure that they
are aware of their responsibilities.
1) Padding material will be fitted to the V-door and catwalk areas to prevent damage to
the tubulars.
2) The power tongs will be fitted with the correct size non-marking dies.
3) Single joint and side door elevators will be fitted with non metallic inserts.
4) Confirm that the torque turn analyser has been correctly set-up.
Note: Calibrate the tong on a spare joint of tubing.
5) Pick up lines to the single joint elevators will be arranged to allow the joint to be
stabbed to hang vertically over the hole, so that no undue pull will be exerted on one
side during make up.
6) The tubulars will be transferred to the catwalk with thread protectors installed. Nylon
slings wrapped around the joints will be used for lifting purposes.
Note: On no account will metal slings be used when handling chrome tubulars.
All new tubulars will be supplied with Econowrap LE.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
7) Use single joint pick up elevators for handling tubulars onto the drill floor.
8) Tubing slips will be dressed with low stress dies.
9) Care will be taken when setting pipe in the slips to prevent shock loading and impact
damage.
10) After removing the thread protector the threads will be cleaned and inspected (if not
already done on the pipe deck).
Note: Do not use a wire brush for cleaning chrome thread forms.
11) Any joints with damaged threads will be laid out, and clearly identified.
12) Apply API Modified thread compound with a friction factor of 1, using an automatic pipe
dope applicator (Refer to section 8.2.6)
13) A non-metallic (i.e. plastic) stabbing guide will be used to guide the pin correctly into
the box.
14) The joint will be lowered slowly into the stabbing guide to allow the man on the
stabbing board, and the man on the rig floor to guide the pin into the stabbing guide.
Throughout the stabbing operation the pipe should be kept as vertical as possible.
15) If the stabbing operation was unsuccessful both pin and box threads will be inspected
for damage. If the box was damaged consideration will be given to replacing it. If the
pin was damaged the joint will be laid out.
16) After successfully stabbing the pipe the first four or five turns of the make up will be
done by hand using a nylon strap wrench.
Note: The use of chain wrenches is not permitted.
17) The last turns will be made using a torque turn unit with a graphical torque turn
analyser to confirm the correct make up value.
18) The make up speed should be between 3 to 10rpm. Final make up should be at 5
RPM.
19) The running speed will be limited to a maximum of 14 joints per hour.
8.2.8 Retrieving Chrome Tubulars

1) Before retrieving any chrome tubulars a pre-job meeting will be held with all relevant
personnel i.e. drill crew, tong operators, deck crew, crane operator, etc. to ensure that
they are aware of their responsibilities.
2) As a field matures it is possible that scale deposition may occur in production wells.
Some of this scale may be LSA (Low Specific Activity), and special handling
techniques and precautions will be required.
3) Padding material will be fitted to the V-door and catwalk areas to prevent damage to
the tubulars as they are being laid out.
4) Ensure that the power tongs are fitted with the correct size non-marking dies.
5) Tubing slips will be dressed with low stress dies.
6) Care will be taken when setting pipe in the slips to prevent shock loading and impact
damage.
7) The connection will be broken using a power tong at a low speed of 2 RPM.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8) Once the thread has been broken the connection will be backed off using a strap
wrench.
9) The threads will be cleaned using a high pressure jet of fresh water, or a quick
evaporating petroleum solvent (chlorine free), and then dried. High pressure cleaning
equipment must be used in accordance with platform procedures.
10) After inspection of the threads storage, compound will be applied and clean thread
protectors installed.
Note: If LSA scale is present, closed end protectors will be installed and the
joints clearly identified as being LSA contaminated. The designated
responsible person will check all tubing joints for LSA scale
contamination and will ensure that the correct action, documentation,
manifesting and notifications are adhered to for shipment of all LSA scale
contaminated tubulars.
11) The tubulars will be transferred from the rig floor using nylon slings wrapped around
the joints.
Note: On no account will metal slings be used or hooks inserted into the pin
and box ends.
Note: If possible, the crane will be used to lift the joints from the rig floor to the
transport boxes.
12) Each joint will be clearly marked, and an 'as pulled' tally prepared by the Well
Operations Supervisor.
13) Before placing the tubulars in their transport frames they will be flushed with fresh
water.
14) Any joints with damaged threads will be clearly identified and laid out for back-loading
in a separate transport frame.
15) A detailed report will be prepared by the Well Operations Supervisor on the condition
of the recovered tubulars. This report shall contain details of thread damage,
corrosion, scale build up, position in well of damaged tubulars, etc., and will be
forwarded to the Completions and Workover Superintendent in the Company office.
8.3 EQUIPMENT PRE-INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

The activities outlined below are to be conducted as soon as completion equipment is
received on the well site to allow sufficient time to correct for damaged or missing items.
8.3.1 Material Requisition Lists

Confirm that all of the required completion equipment is available on site. Reference should
be made to the Material Requisition Lists provided for each individual completion. The
Company Supervisor shall verify that the completion equipment corresponds to the details in
the completion programme and has the appropriate correct part numbers, serial numbers
and certification.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8.3.2 Completion Sub Assemblies

The on site equipment manufacturers representative will have copies of the sub-assembly
drawings for identification purposes.
Sub-assemblies containing chrome tubulars require special handling procedures as per
section 8.2.
1) Remove the sub-assemblies from the completion basket and lay them out on the deck
for inspection. Check that the workshop numbering of the sub-assemblies is correct or
number them for the correct running order if this has not already been done. This is of
particular importance with nipple sub-assemblies.
2) Compare the sub-assemblies with the preliminary completion diagrams provided with
the individual well programme. Check that flow couplings are installed in the correct
places. For production completions these should be located above nipples, gas lift
mandrels, crossovers, and SCSSVs. Injection completions will have flow couplings
installed below nipples, crossovers and SCSSVs. Measure the overall sub-assembly
lengths and correct if in error by more than 0.01ft.
3) Check that the equipment part numbers stamped on the equipment agree with those
on the completion diagram. If they do not agree, report the discrepancy to the Well
Operations Supervisor. The final completion diagram must be corrected to depict the
actual part numbers on the completion sub-assemblies.
4) Clean and inspect the connections and thread protectors. Refer to the specific
guidelines for handling chrome tubing. Confirm that all sub-assemblies have the
correct crossovers as required.
5) Look through each sub-assembly to confirm that all test plugs have been removed.
Ensure that no items of debris remain inside the sub-assemblies, and that all protective
wrappings and coatings are fully removed before final assembly of the completion
string.
6) Inspect the packer rubber and seals on the tubing anchor for any signs of damage.
8.3.3 Tubing Hanger

The tubing hanger and running tool should have been prepared in the workshop. Relevant
information is contained in the manufacturers Wellhead Manual.
1) Inspect and drift the assembly.
2) Measure the pup joint installed in the bottom of the hanger, confirming the thread type,
grade, and condition.
3) If the running tool was not installed previously, check the condition of the threads
before having the Wellhead Engineer make it up to the hanger.
8.3.4 Landing Joint

Make sure that a suitable landing joint is available, made up from pups to a length sufficient
for the required stick-up above the rig floor. The assembly must be drifted with a suitable
drift prior to each use.
Ported slick joints are available which have ports for the SCSSV control lines through the
BOP stack.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8.3.5 Control Line

The control line should be visually inspected for any signs of damage received during transit
and then pressure tested to 1,000 psi above the maximum expected wellhead pressure or
maximum test pressure, whichever is the least, for 15 mins. Report this test on the daily
drilling report.
Ensure the test fluid is the same as that used in the control system.
8.3.6 Xmas Tree

Check that the Xmas tree components and fittings are on location. Make sure that all
necessary seals and ring gaskets are available and in good condition. Reject any suspect
items as unfit for service. Plan the method of lifting the tree in place and confirm that the
required lifting equipment, including the drawworks, is available. Confirm with the
Production Superintendent that all pressure vessels and flowlines with the drop radius have
been isolated have been bled off and vented. Also check the tree orientation with the
Production Supervisor.
Check that the bolts and ring joint are of the correct material composition.
8.3.7 Flowline
Check with the Production Supervisor that the flowline is on site and that it is the correct
length (the amount of curvature applied to coflexip flowlines is critical) and that it is ready to
be connected to the Xmas Tree.
Also confirm that the tree choke valve is present on site.
8.4 COMPLETION ASSEMBLIES

All completion assemblies will arrive at site after being fully prepared, assembled and
pressure tested by the supplier and witnessed by a Company Representative. Back up
assemblies should be available and on site in case of damage/failure during running and
testing. If any of the assemblies should require further work, due to damage in transit for
example, the procedure outlined in section 8.3 should be observed.
8.4.1 Workshop Make-up and Test Procedures

Prior to being transported, all completion sub assemblies will be made up, drifted and
pressure tested in the suppliers workshop. Completion components are made up using
torque turn equipment to ensure smooth make up and application of the correct amount of
torque. All pressure tests are to WP for 15min, unless otherwise stated. For detailed
technical specifications, see the manufacturers literature.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8.4.2 Sub-Surface Safety Valves

Tubing retrievable SCSSVs or wireline retrievable SCSSVs landing nipples will be made up
as assemblies with flow couplings and/or tubing pup joints. Both will be tested as follows:
Tubing Retrievable SCSSV Test Procedure

1) Flush the control line through with proper clean control line fluid.
2) Attach the control line to the valve.
3) Cycle the valve open and closed to ensure proper operation.
4) Record the volume to open the valve against the pressure and check to ensure it is
within specification.
5) Install test subs, open the valve and fill the assembly with test fluid.
6) Pressure test the body to WP for 10min
7) Close the valve and pressure test from below to WP for 10min.
8) Remove the test subs.
9) Drift the assembly with the API drift.
10) Record all component serial numbers and stencil the sub-assembly with ID number.
11) Complete the Documentation Package and ensure all torque and pressure charts are
included.
Wire line Retrievable SCSSV Test Procedure

1) Attach the control line to the nipple.
2) Flush the control line through with the proper clean control line fluid.
3) Install the valve in the nipple assembly.
4) Cycle the valve open and closed to ensure proper operation.
5) Record the volume to open the valve against the pressure and check to ensure it is
within specification.
6) Install test subs, open the valve and fill the assembly with test fluid.
7) Close the valve and pressure test from below to WP for 10min.
8) Remove the test subs.
10) Record all component serial numbers and stencil the sub-assembly with ID number.
included.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8.4.3 Wireline Nipple Assemblies

Wireline nipples will normally be made up as an assembly with adjoining tubing joints or pup
joints. The test below ensures computability of the lock mandrel and pressure integrity of the
connections.
2) Set the appropriate positive plug in the landing nipple.
3) Install test subs, fill up with test fluid and pressure test to WP for 10min both above
and below the plug.
4) Remove the test subs and retrieve the plug.
5) Record all component serial numbers and stencil the sub-assembly with the ID
number.
included.
8.4.4 Side Pocket Mandrels

1) Drift complete assembly with the correct size API/ISO drift.
2) Ensure the correct SPM valve or dummy valve is installed.
3) Install test subs, fill up with test fluid and pressure test the assembly to WP for 10min.
4) Re-drift assembly with the API/ISO drift.
5) Record all component serial numbers and stencil sub assembly with the ID numbers.
included.
8.5 COMPLETION RUNNING PROCEDURES

8.5.1 General
1) Assemblies should be made up on the rig floor and landed off low in the rotary table.
The correct torque should be applied according to the manufacturers instructions.
Connections are to be made up with a hydraulic casing tong fitted with an internal
back-up tong. The tong should be calibrated for torque turn readings. Rig tongs must
never be used to make up the completion sub assemblies.
2) Ensure that a safety valve is located on the rig floor complete with crossover to suit the
tubing thread being run. If two sizes of tubing are being installed, two safety valves are
required.
3) Make sure that the appropriate retrieving/fishing tools are on site when running the
completion.
4) Ensure that collar clamps are used when running the tailpipe assembly.
5) Drift each nipple with the appropriate standing valve, lock mandrel or equalising sub
(without packing or keys) when the packer/tailpipe assembly is suspended in the rotary
table. Drift through the complete packer/tailpipe assembly with an appropriate gauge
cutter.
6) Run the tubing as specified in the well completion programme.
7) Extreme care should be observed when running the completion, run in the hole at a
steady uniform speed and apply the brake slowly. Do not jerk the completion string
when applying the brake. After lowering the slips into the rotary bushing, slack off the
string weight with care.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8) Check the composition of the completion fluid at regular intervals, and maintain the
required levels in the tubing and annulus.
9) If running chemical injection or downhole gauge systems, attach an across-coupling
and mid joint protectors (one each per joint) to secure the lines to the tubing. Do not
over-tighten to allow movement for stretch induced by temperature changes. Pay
particular attention to the lines when lowering the slips.
10) When changing tubing sizes, count all the remaining previous tubing left on the pipe
rack. Make sure that this agrees with the running list. If there is a problem do not
proceed until it has been resolved.
11) Continue running the completion to depth where the SCSSV is to be installed.
Pressure test the tubing string to the pressure given in the well programme.
12) Make up the SCSSV. Install the control line and pressure test to the pressure stated in
the well programme for 15min. Bleed off the pressure to WP and maintain this
pressure whilst running in the hole. Secure control lines with the across-coupling and
mid joint protectors.
13) When running tubulars with control lines attached, take care to ensure that the string is
properly centralised to prevent stripping off the protectors.
14) When pressure testing equipment, build up pressure slowly. Pressure should be built
up in a series of stages to the required maximum. Maintain pressure for the required
time and record on a suitable chart recorder.
15) After the final space out, drift the complete string using an appropriate drift.
8.5.2 Running Procedure

The following is a generic procedure for a single trip packer completion.
1) Pick up the tailpipe packer assembly. Do not install a standing valve. The completion
should be run in open ended.
2) Pick up and run the completion assemblies as per the running list. Ensure that the
correct torque is applied. Remake any connection identified as suspect by the JAM
unit. Reject tubing joints as required.
3) In gas lift completions, an intermediate pressure test will be performed after running all
the gas lift mandrels. Set a standing valve in the appropriate nipple in the tailpipe, and
pressure test to the pressure stated in the well programme. Do not exceed this
pressure.
4) After making up the hanger assembly, the wellhead engineer will supervise the
operation of setting the hanger. The setting sequence will have been determined
earlier and be described in the well programme. No deviation from this procedure is
allowed.
5) Run in the completion until the packer is almost at setting depth.
6) Rig up electric wireline and correlate the packer setting position according to section
7.3, if required.
7) Pull back and space out the tubing string as required according to the log correlation
results.
8) Check continuity of electric cables, if applicable.
9) Run back into depth for packer setting.
10) All completion equipment should now be in the hole. The packer should be at setting
depth, and the tubing hanger should be oriented and proud of its hang off point if the
tubing is to be set in compression.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11) Check the completion running list; make sure that all remaining equipment left on deck
agrees with the running list.
12) Rig up slickline and set a standing valve in the tubing nipple. Pressure test the tubing
integrity to the pressure stated in the well programme. The SCSSV control line
pressure must be increased to the appropriate pressure when conducting this test (test
pressure + valve opening pressure + margin), refer to the following sections on SCSSV
installations. Retrieve the standing valve.
13) Set a standing valve in the packer tailpipe nipple.
14) Check that the packer is at the correct setting depth. Slowly pressure up the tubing to
the specified differential pressure according to the programme. The shear screws
locking the packer setting mechanism will shear with the applied tubing pressure
differential, then the setting cycle of the slip mechanism will be complete, and the pack
off element fully set. Hold the setting pressure for 10min.
15) After setting the packer, pressure up to pressure test the entire completion string. Hold
the pressure until a 15min straight line is recorded on the recorder. Records of this
test are to be retained in the well files.
16) Run in hole with slickline and retrieve the standing valve.
17) Pressure up the well through the production string to pressure test the packer from
below. This test should be according to the programme (or the same as the casing
test pressure), observe the pressure is stable for 15min.
18) Pick up to shear out the tubing movement device, if applicable. This should be
observed at surface.
19) Set down and slack off string weight, land and set the surface hanger as per the
manufacturers instructions. This operation may sometimes be carried out prior to
setting the packer.
20) Pressure test the annulus according to the programme; observe the pressure is stable
for 15min.
21) If the well has been perforated, set a wireline plug in the tubing string and the plug in
the tubing hanger profile.
An alternative procedure for testing the packer without having to remove the tailpipe plug, is
to utilise a ported slick joint in the landing string on which the pipe rams or annular can be
closed. The packer is then pressure tested by applying 500psi to the annulus. This saves
installation time.
8.5.3 Tubing Retrievable SCSSV Installation Procedure

When running the completion, the SCSSV will be installed at the appropriate point so that it
will be positioned at the correct depth when the completion string is landed off.
1) Pick up and make up the SCSSV assembly onto the completion string.
2) Lower it through the rotary table to waist height and set the slips where they will not
cause any damage to the valve.
3) Flush through the control line from the pump manifold for a short period of time to
ensure the fluid is clean.
4) Attach the control line to the valve and cycle the valve open and closed observing that
it fully opens and closes, recording the volumes required meet with specification.
5) Pressure test the control line according to the pressure stated in the programme.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
6) Lock and monitor the pressure in on the reel keeping the valve open as it is run in the
hole preventing pressure locking, allowing the string to self fill and checking for control
line leaks.
7) Attach an across-coupling protector at the first connection and ensure the control line
is flat against the tubing and is in tension.
8) Run in the hole on tubing applying the protectors at every connection and mid joint,
keeping tension on the control line. Never rotate the tubing with control line in the
hole.
9) When the spacing out procedure has been completed, wrap the control line around the
pup joint below the hanger to provide contingency if the line is damaged during make
up and landing.
10) Bleed the pressure off the control line, cut it and connect it to the hanger control line
port.
11) Attach the remaining control line from the reel to the exit port in the hanger and
pressure test the line according to the completion programme.
12) Reduce the pressure to the required calculated operating pressure.
13) Land off the completion, install barriers, perform all hydraulic tests and close the valve
prior to rigging down the BOPs.
14) Remove the control line.
15) Install the Xmas tree, pressure test and function test.
16) Cycle the SCSSV, checking the returns are per specification ensuring the valve is fully
opening and closing.
17) Continue with the Completion Programme.
8.5.4 Wire line Retrievable SCSSV Installation Procedure

When running the completion, the SCSSV landing nipple will be installed at the appropriate
point so that it will be positioned at the correct depth when the completion string is landed
off.
1) Install the dummy valve into the landing nipple assembly.
2) Pick up and make up the SCSSV landing nipple assembly onto the completion string.
3) Lower it through the rotary table to waist height and set the slips where they will not
cause any damage to the valve.
4) Flush through the control line from the pump manifold for a short period of time to
ensure the fluid is clean.
5) Attach the control line to the valve and pressure test the connection and the dummy
seals according to the pressure in the programme.
6) Lock and monitor the pressure in on the reel to check if any leaks occur.
7) Attach an across-coupling protector at the first connection and ensure the control line
is flat against the tubing and is in tension.
8) Run in the hole on tubing applying the protectors at every connection and mid joint,
keeping tension on the control line. Never rotate the tubing with control line in the hole.
9) When the spacing out procedure has been completed, wrap the control line around the
pup joint below the hanger to provide contingency if the line is damaged during make
up and landing.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
10) Bleed the pressure off the control line, cut it and connect it to the hanger control line
port.
11) Attach the remaining control line from the reel to the exit port in the hanger and
pressure test the line according to the completion programme.
12) Reduce the pressure to the required calculated operating pressure.
13) Land off the completion, install barriers, perform all hydraulic tests and close the valve
prior to rigging down the BOPs.
14) Remove the control line.
15) Install the Xmas tree, pressure test and function test.
16) Continue with the Completion Programme, pulling the dummy valve and installing the
SCSSV according to the procedures in the General Wireline Procedures Manual
(STAP-P-1-M-7110).
If direct acting SSSVs (storm chokes) are being used, they will be calibrated and then
installed also according to the procedures in the General Wireline Procedures Manual
(STAP-P-1-M-7110).
An option to steps 5 through 8 is to install a check valve on the SCSSV control line port and
open the valve locking in the pressure. This then allows tripping in the hole to space out
without the control line in the hole.
8.6 CHRISTMAS TREE

8.6.1 General
The system composed by the Wellhead and the Christmas Tree is one if not the most
important component of the well from the safety point of view.
Besides being the interface between the topside network/treatment plant and the well, they
compose the system which guarantees the well integrity towards the external environment
and as such act as the main safety barrier.
Wellhead is the drilling part of it and guarantees the suspension of the casing system while
running it and its anchorage when cemented.
Christmas Tree system is composed by valves and fittings connected to the Tubing Hanger
which is the uppermost portion of the completion attached to the tubing string.
The system integrity is vital for the well integrity, even if back up system are in place in case
of abnormal malfunctioning/blasting, also because is the more operated system in a well,
and its functionality shall be guranteed throughout the well life.
8.6.2 Christmas tree new design

Christmas Tree configurations have been modified through the years starting from very
simple configurations to very complicated ones; this depends mainly on rating required
which, due to increased difficulty of wells to be drilled, is continuously evolving.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8.6.2.1 COMPACT WELLHEAD AND SOLID BLOCK TREE

Presently there has been a great push, especially in offshore applications, to develop and
install Compact (Unitised) Drilling Wellheads.
Their application, together with the use of Solid Block Tree, offers the main advantage of
total wellhead height reduction, which has a big impact in reducing the clearance between
floors of offshore platforms, with an evident CAPEX reduction in offshore structures.
Solid Block Tree is a forged solid steel with the valves and fittings machined into it.
8.6.2.2 QUICK CONNECTORS

Together with this development a great operational improvement has been obtained with the
use of Quick Connectors to replace the API flange. Their use, derived from subsea
applications, has greatly reduced the nipple up/down time especially when dealing with
offshore BOP and risers systems.
Installation time has passed with this new design from hours to minutes, not diminishing or
jeopardizing at all the overall safety consideration.
8.6.3 Christmas tree components
8.6.3.1 TUBING HEAD SPOOL
On top of the last casing spool it is mounted the Tubing Spool which, rated for the maximum
well pressure and made of the proper class of material, has the function of suspending the
completion, providing a load shoulder for the Tubing Hanger.
It is composed of a lower connection, one or two side outlets and a top connection with an
internal Tubing Hanger bowl.
As well as the Casing Head Spool, the two studded outlets (normally 2 nominal) allows the
annulus control and monitoring; in particular one outlet is usually provided with a flanged
Gate Valve; the other outlet with a companion flange and a monitoring pressure gauge
The tubing spool seals around the production casing either with the Annulus Packing
assembly or with a metal pack-off when this is required.
A secondary seal recess is provided in the lower flange to accommodate the production
casing secondary seal unit, normally elastomeric type. Secondary metal seal can be
foreseen in HP/HT wells.
The top flange is usually equipped with Lock Down Screws to hold the Tubing Hanger down
under light loads or to energise the Annulus Packing.
8.6.3.2 TUBING HANGER
Completion is suspended inside the Tubing Head Spool by means of the Tubing Hanger.
The Tubing Hanger seals inside the Tubing Head Spool either with an elastomer pack-off
assembly or with a metal pack-off when this is required.
Tubing Hanger also shall be anchored inside the Tubing Head Spool to avoid that, during
production it can be lifted off by the tubing string elongating for temperature increase; this is
usually accomplished by tie-down screws which radial acts on a conical shaped ring which at
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
the same time energise the Tubing Hanger Packing Seal.
Tubing Hanger top preparation is designed to fit different Tubing Head Adapter (Seal
Flange) bottom bowl shapes:
in its simplest version it can have a solid neck which intrudes inside the Tubing
Head Adapter ( Bonnet) where O rings segregates circumferential galleries for
Safety Valve/s Control Line/s hydraulic control fluid.
transfer carriers throughout the hanger body which seals inside the Tubing Head
Adapter body can be provided. These transfer carriers can be provided with
elastomeric O rings or with metal seals (crash rings usually manufactured with a
softer plastic stainless steel).
in other cases, Control Lines continuous type, have separate outlets through the
Tubing Head Adapter or Tubing Head Spools body ; so their is granted by
passages through the Tubing Hanger body . Block Terminations arrangements
are provided on Control Line exit.
Tubing Hanger internal profile always foresees either for a seat for the Back Pressure Valve
or for a wireline plug. Both devices have the scope of plugging the production bore before
removing the X-mas tree and nippling up the BOPs.
The advantage of the wireline plug against the use of the BPV, is the possibility to run or
retrieve it under pressure using normal wireline pressure equipment, while the retrieval of
BPV under pressure requires the use of special tools.
8.6.3.3 TUBING HEAD ADAPTER
Is the equipment which adapts and seals the Tubing Hanger to the lowermost Christmas
Tree bottom connection.
Tubing Head Adapter bottom bowl shall accommodate the elastomeric or metal seal pack
off to seal on Tubing Hanger neck and appropriate Test / Vent Ports should be provided for
test all the sealing elements.
It also provides access to the casing tubing annulus through side outlets.
Control Line exits are foreseen on Tubing Head Adapter body when Tubing Hanger with
Control Line Transfer Mandrel is used.
In Continuous Control Line configuration, Control Line exits can be provided on Tubing Head
Adapter or through the Tubing Head Spool body.
8.6.4 CHRISTMAS TREE CONFIGURATION
If the individual valves and fittings are bolted together the Tree is referred as Composite
Tree.
However, if the Tree consists of a solid steel forging with the valves and fittings machined
into it, is called Solid Block Tree. Solid block Tree, being more compact, offer space-saving
advantages, therefore, are particularly suitable for off-shore production platforms or cluster
lay out land wells.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Christmas Tree typical arrangement might consist of:
Vertical flow path
a Lower Manual Master Valve

an Actuated (remotely controlled) Upper Master Valve
a Cross
a Manual Swab Valve
a X-mas Tree Cap
Horizontal flow path (departing from the cross)
a Manual Wing Valve

an Actuated Wing Valve
a Measuring Flange with Chemical Injection/P&T pockets block.
A Choke Valve (usually covered by Topside Engineering)
X-over to the flowline connection
a Manual Kill Valve (opposite side of the cross - optional)
a Companion Flange with quick hammer type connection (optional)
NOTE: On off-shore locations one master valve and at same time the wing valve
will be fitted with a hydraulic or pneumatic Actuator and serves as an
automatic surface safety valve. The uppermost valve called Swab Valve,
sometimes Lubricator or Top Valve, is used primary for well access by
wire line or other intervention techniques.
8.6.5 Gate VALVE
Valves used on X-mas Tree are almost invariably the Gate type Valve, providing full bore
access to the well.
Gate Valves for Xmas Tree are of different configuration mainly with respect:
1) To the closure system:

Floating Slab Gate
Expanding Gate
2) To the Stem type:

Rising/Non rising Stem
Balanced/Non balanced Stem
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8.6.5.1 SLAB GATE (FLOATING SEAL)

Slab Gate Valve (Figure 8-1) is provided with a Gate and upstream and downstream Seats.
Floating type seats permit bi-directional sealing and can be replaced while the valve is in
line.
Slab gate valve seats are generally manufactured in special hardened steel or protected
with corrosion resistant materials. Each seat can be provided with one frontal TFE ring and
one O-ring on the cylindrical external surface. The TFE ring assures a temporary seal
between seats and gates during the opening or closing of the valve and provides for gate
cleaning.
With the valve in closed position the thrust generated on the gate surface realise the seal
between seat and valve body by pushing the downstream seat towards the valve body and
prevents pressure lock on the valve body when upstream pressure is reduced to zero.
A shoulder provided on the stem can be placed in back seat position against the valve body
allowing the packing replacement with the valve on stream.
Grease fittings on the valve bonnet are designed to lubricate body and seats and to
discharge the pressure beyond the packing and pump it out after the back seat.
The slab gate permits these valves to be equipped with hydraulic and pneumatic actuators
fail close in wellhead use. Lack of control pressure in the actuators, will cause the actuator
spring to close the valve helped by the well pressure if present.
In this application slab gate must be reverse bore type with the gate closed in the full outside
extended position.
All closure of these valves will cause the backseat of the stem to the valve bonnet seat.
In the most advanced versions of these valves, for corrosive and/or high pressure/fire safe
applications metal elastic rings replace the O-rings while seat to gate surface are lapped.
Manual valves for application at working pressure above 5000 psi can be provided with
balanced stem, because this eliminates the hydrostatic thrust on the stem itself and make
easy the opening-closing operations.
The axial thrust on the stem is generally supported by two taper roller or ball bearings which
minimise the operating torque; the stem seal can be given by non-elastomeric packing for
normal application and it has a special configuration in fire safe valves.
Slab Gate Valves are available as rising stem or non rising stem.
8.6.5.2 EXPANDING GATE

Expanding Gate Valves (Figure 8-2) are provided with two parallel expanding gates retained
together by a spring, which, moving on the opposite cones, expands to mate the seats,
granting a simultaneous tight seal on upstream and downstream seats and isolating the
body from the flowing pressure. This feature allows a very long integrity of the sealing
surface as well as the valve stem.
Flow helps in forcing the two seats to better close. Since the valve is wedged also in open
position, usually this type of valve is not provided with an affective backseat.
In its intermediate position the gate does not exert any appreciable pressure on the seats.
The axial thrust on the stem is generally supported by two taper roller or ball bearings which
minimise the operating torque; the stem seal can be given by non elastomeric packing for
normal application and it has a special configuration in fire safe valves.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Valves for application at working pressure above 5000 psi can be provided with balanced
stem, because this eliminates the hydrostatic thrust on the stem itself and eases the
operations.
This kind of valve is not usually applicable with fail-safe actuators.

Expanding Gate Valves are very seldom used in X-mas tree applications and tends to be
substituted by slab gate valves which are also more economical in cost.
Expanding Gate Valves are available as rising stem or not rising stem.
Figure 8-1 Slab Gate Valve Figure 8-2 Expanding Gate Valve
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Figure 8-3 Expanding Gate Balanced System

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8.6.6 Surface Safety valve (Actuators)

Actuator design for Xmas Tree application is covered by API 6A for engineering, testing and
quality control
Actuators for Surface Safety Valves can be Hydraulic or Pneumatic type according to the
safety system design and power supply available.
Both type of actuators can be easily replaced on the field without removing the Valve from
the line.
8.6.6.1 HYDRAULIC ACTUATOR

Hydraulic actuators (Figure 8-4) are used in production wells to automatically shut in the well
at surface in the event of a flowline leak, fire or explosion at the wellhead, abnormal
pressure fluctuations or critical fluid level in surface equipment.
Figure 8-4 Hydraulic Actuator

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8.6.6.2 PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR

Pneumatic actuators (Figure 8-5) use instrument air as control fluid as external source to
move a piston counterbalanced by a spring which, when air would be vented, will cause the
gate valve to fail safe close.
Due to the reduced pressure at which air is distributed they usually require large piston area
which increases the installation overall dimensions and sometimes makes this unacceptable.
Generally their application is more frequent on single land applications.
Figure 8-5 Pneumatic Actuator
8.6.6.3 FAIL SAFE CLOSE FEATURE
Hydraulic actuators use hydraulic fluid (control fluid) as external source to move a piston
counterbalanced by a spring which, when hydraulic power would be removed will cause the
gate valve to fail safe close; properly sized coil springs provide a reliable return stroke to
close.
The new design of actuators usually allows easy conversion in the field of manual gate
valves to automatic.
Sound engineering practices in selecting an actuator should look at the exposure of seals to
the environment and to the correct coating of surfaces contacted by saline offshore
atmosphere.
Also considerations should be placed on the volume of hydraulic fluid needed to operate the
actuator. Big volumes means long closure times due to the return line friction losses
especially offshore where control cabin are usually far from the wellhead area.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8.6.6.4 FAIL SAFE CLOSE/ WIRE CUTTING FEATURES

Several types of installation use directly on the X-mas Tree Master Valve the wire cutting
actuator, while other operating companies prefer not to use this costly actuator on each
Xmas tree but use it on an actuated spool valve mounted below the wireline/coil tbg
lubricator when this is installed for servicing.
This kind of actuator enables operators to comply with legal requirements for two barriers
across every conduit during workover/well servicing operations.
To cut wireline or coil tubing this type of actuator shall incorporate devices or powerful
springs that store supplemental energy and release it for the cutting action on the wire.
Different configurations are available on the market.
8.6.7 CHOKE
Choke is a device fitted downstream of the Wing Valve to restrict, control and regulate the
well flow.
It may be Positive or Adjustable type.
Positive Choke is composed of a body with internal provision of receiving

replaceable element with a fixed orifice diameter (flow beans) of various sizes
which are installed manually.
Adjustable Choke has a variable orifice which can be adjusted externally to give
the required flow orifice opening.
Figure 8-6 Positive Choke Valve Figure 8-7 Adjustable Choke Valve
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
8.6.8 Christmas Tree Installation

The variety of Xmas trees and the various configurations are too wide to be covered in this
manual. The procedure given below is generic but manufacturer specific procedures must
be provided, either, in the well programme or in technical manuals available on site.
8.6.8.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

Specific procedures for installing the wellhead and Xmas tree are given in the relevant
Manufacturers Wellhead Manual (Refer to Figure 8-8 for a typical example of Company
wellhead and Xmas tree). The following are general precautions which should be observed:
1) All personnel are to be aware of the dangers involved in the lifting of heavy equipment.
2) Ensure that the correct lifting apparatus is available and has been checked. Use a
lifting flange on top of the Xmas tree for handling.
3) Close in all neighbouring wells and depressurise flow lines as necessary, before
commencing heavy lift operations.
4) Check all sealing or mating surfaces for damage before they are made up.
5) All sealing elements, metal ring gaskets etc. should be carefully examined for any sign
of damage. Clean all mating surfaces and ensure freedom of movement in grooves
and recesses.
6) Check that the tubing hanger is landed off correctly, and is both centrally and vertically
aligned.
7) Use flange protectors where recommended.
8) Ensure that a pressure tested plug is installed in the hanger before removing the BOP.
9) Use the block whenever possible to lower the tree.
10) Ensure that all the tree valves are open before installation.
11) Orientated and lower the tree into position using bolts or alignment bars in position to
provide guidance. Tighten the bolts in the specified sequence ensuring that correct
torque is applied, and the seals energised.
12) All pressure testing of energised seals should be carried out according to the
procedures stipulated in the manufacturers manual or well programme procedures.
When testing is complete, bleed off pressure from the test port, remove test
apparatus, replace the check valves and plugs.
13) Pressure test the tubing hanger seals by pressuring through the Xmas tree bore. The
test port in the flange must be open during this test to monitor for leaks.
14) Pressure test the tubing hanger seals and ring joint from the test port of the flange,
ensuring the casing side outlet valves are open during this test.
15) Record all the pressures on a chart recorder for file.
16) Install the flow wing and kill wing valves. Liaise with the Production Superintendent to
have the choke and control lines connected.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
At this stage the Xmas tree should be API pressure tested to the required pressure against
the hanger plug in the tubing hanger. This test should be carried out in two stages:
1) With the flow and kill wing valves closed and the choke open.
2) With the valve downstream of the choke and kill wing valve closed, and the flow wing
valve and choke open.
When all tests are complete, the hanger plug should be removed from the tubing hanger and
the tubing plug retrieved by wireline.
8.6.9 Post Completion Test procedures
8.6.9.1 SCSSV TEST PROCEDURE

Even though the frequency of SCSSV testing will be determined independently for each
development, the criteria should be reviewed periodically. This is considered necessary due
to changing well conditions (water cut, wax formation, gas composition) which could
adversely affect valve performance.
The routine closure test will be performed after the well has been closed in (not a slam shut
test) as this reduces the stress on the valve component parts which will not, therefore, be
weakened as a result of regular testing. It also provides a more stringent test of the valves
ability to hold pressure.
The SCSSV routine closure test procedure will be as detailed in the Completion Design
Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7100). The procedure is as follows:
1) Close in the well using the flow wing valve.
2) Depressurise the control line pressure.
3) Conduct a pressure test across the closed SCSSV, to a maximum of 1,000psi
pressure differential, by bleeding off pressure above the valve.
4) If there is a rapid leak, cycle the valve and repeat the test.
5) Maintain the pressure differential for 30min, recording the tubing head pressure. This
allows the leakage rate to be calculated and determining the leak is less than the
maximum allowable leak across the valve according to API specification.
6) Equalise pressure across the SCSSV, preferably by applying pressure from another
well, open the SCSSV and return the well to production.
7) If an SCSSV fails the routine closure test, the well will be returned to production/
injection. A pre-tested wireline valve will be inserted in the nipple profile as soon as
operationally practicable.
The results of all SCSSV tests will be forwarded to the Completion and Workover
Superintendent, and a copy retained in the onsite production well file.
8.6.9.2 X-MAS TREE VALVE TEST PROCEDURE

The closure time of the Xmas tree, UMGV and wing valves will be checked in conjunction
with the SCSSV testing.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Figure 8-8 - Typical Wellhead and Xmas Tree Assembly

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
9. GAS LIFT INSTALLATION
As nearly all gas lift designs use Side Pocket Mandrels (SPM) for gas lift valve installation,
the procedures in this section are concentrated on this basis and ignore earlier less effective
methods (Refer to
figure 9-1).
The gas lift method and applications are thoroughly described in the Completion design
Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7100).
9.1 MANDREL INSTALLATION

On production of the gas lift design, the depths of the mandrels will be specified in the well
programme. It is essential to have them accurately positioned in the string (to within the
nearest joint connection) for optimum well performance providing the gas lift design is based
on accurate well parameters and well data.
The side pocket mandrel may be installed during the initial completion or during a re-
completion sometime later. Once the mandrels have been installed, the valves can be run
and installed on wireline at any time it is desired to place the well on gas lift.
9.1.1 SPM Installation Procedure

Make up the mandrel sub-assemblies as described earlier in section 8.3.2. The sub-
assemblies should be checked and drifted before installation and generally are run with
dummy valves installed in order that the completion string can be pressure tested from both
the tubing and annulus sides. The dummy valves are left in situ until the well is placed on
gas lift when the dummies will be replaced with gas lift valves.
The gas lift valves installed on all upper SPMs above the operating point are termed
unloading valves and their function is to allow unloading of the annulus from completion
fluid to gas lift gas. The valve installed at the operating depth is the operating valve through
which the gas is injected into the tubing.
Ensure the SPM depths are stated in the well programme. It will be noted that the SPM
spacing is closer towards the bottom becoming wider towards the top of the hole.
The installation procedure for the SPMs is as follows:
1) When running the tubing, on reaching the tubing connection nearest the depth at
which the lowest SPM should be installed, pick up the first mandrel according to the
running list. Do not use pup joints to place the mandrel exactly on depth as the design
is not accurate to that degree.
2) Install the mandrel onto the string and continue running tubing.
3) On reaching the connection closest for the second mandrel, repeat step 2.
4) Repeat until all mandrels are installed.
5) Continue with the Completion Programme.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Tubing
Pressure
Latch
Packing
Casing
Pressure
Packing
Retrievable Mandrel
(pressure valve shown)
figure 9-1 - Typical Side Pocket Mandrel

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
9.1.2 Gas Lift Valve Installation Procedure

As previously stated, the upper gas lift valves are unloading valves and only the lower valve
is the gas lift operating valve. The sequence of installation is not important but it is normal
practice to install the valves from the bottom to the top.
A good practice is to install a gas lift valve catcher in the bottom of the tubing below the
lower SPM to catch valves which may be accidentally dropped during the wireline operations.
The catcher is usually a lock mandrel set into a landing nipple with a long sump on it which
will accommodate two valves. If a valve is dropped, operations can continue until a second
valve is dropped requiring the catcher to be pulled to retrieve the dropped valves.
If a catcher is not used the valves would probably be lost into the rat hole.
The installation running tool termed, a kick-over tool, sometimes is furbished with a catcher
below on the bottom of the tool but even then it is still good practice to install a catcher sub
as contingency.
The calibration/setting of the unloading valves and operating valve is normally carried out in
the workshop before shipment to the well site due to the equipment complexity. The valves
will be set in accordance with the gas lift design. Extra valves are usually supplied as
contingency for dropping or damage during transporting and operations.
The wireline procedures for a gas lift valve installation and retrieval are fully described in the
General Wireline Procedures Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7110). Normally the procedure is:
1) Rig up W/L according to the General Wireline Procedures Manual (STAP-P-1-M-
7110).
2) Install the gas lift valve catcher sub.
3) Install the kickover tool with the appropriate dummy valve pulling tool.
4) If possible, ensure the pressure across the SPM is equalised before step 5 below.
5) Run in the well, locating the lowermost SPM and pull the dummy valve. The tubing
and annulus will now be in communication.
6) Pull out of the hole and retrieve the valve.
7) Pick up and install the operating gas lift in the lubricator, run in the hole and install it in
the lower SPM.
8) Pressure up on the tubing to check the valve is correctly located. Do not pressure up
on the annulus as the valve allows circulation annulus to tubing.
9) Repeat the procedure in sequence bottom to top for all the other unloading valves.
10) Retrieve the catcher sub.
11) Rig down wireline.
12) Check the operation of all of the surface gas lift system.
13) Unload the well in accordance to the well specific programme.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
9.2 UNLOADING PROCEDURE

Gas lift installations can be damaged in the first hour or two of unloading by uninformed or
impatient operators. All of the liquid above the top valve must go through the top valve
during unloading. The gas pressure must be increased slowly during the U-tubing process
to prevent high differential pressure across the top valve. Desirably, this differential pressure
should be kept less than 100psi.
The following guidelines are recommended for kicking off a continuous flow installation.
1) Remove the choke from the choke tee on the production side of the Xmas tree.
2) Make sure all valves between well and separator are open.
3) Start injecting gas slowly so the gas pressure increase at the rate of 5psi/min until the
gas pressure is 300psi greater than the production pressure at the wellhead.
4) Increase the gas injection rate so the pressure increases by 10psi/min until gas is
circulated through the top valve.
5) Adjust the choke on the injection gas for the desired unloading rate.
6) Continue the unloading process for all the other valves until reaching the operating
valve.
7) After the well is unloaded, adjust the choke on the injection gas to meet with the
desired production rate through the operating valve.
Record and monitor all production and gas injection data including pressures to enable
comparison of the well performance versus the design. If production is not as expected,
conduct a fault finding exercise.
The gas lift design can be optimised by making adjustments to the injection rates, pressures
or changing the operating valve settings (by changing out the existing valve). Complex
software programmes are available to optimise gas lift production.
9.3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Gas lift installations are designed to unload and operate with a minimum amount of manual
control. Constant observation of the wells performance is necessary to maintain maximum
production. These observations include well tests, casing-tubing pressures, gas input
volumes, flowing pressure-temperature surveys, acoustical surveys, static bottomhole
pressures and producing characteristics.
Should an installation fail to function satisfactorily, it should be analysed carefully before
changing gas lift valves. Most problems can be determined while the well is still gas lifting.
Many problems can be corrected or minimised at the surface by changing the surface
parameters. Should it be necessary to pull valves, the new installation should be based on
the analysis of the previous installations.
Well test data, flowing parameters are most commonly tools used for gas lift analysis. A two
pen pressure recorder should be used every time a well is unloaded.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
10. DOWNHOLE PUMP INSTALLATION
This section contains generic procedures for downhole pump installations, namely ESP, Rod
Pumps and Hydraulic Pumps.
10.1 ELECTRICAL SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

There are a number of different applications and ESP installations which are fully described
in the Completion Design Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7100).
This section provides recommended practice on the handling, installation and operation of a
generic ESP system. Because both safety and economic run life are dependent on correct
procedures, the importance of following the recommended practices cannot be
overemphasised.
10.1.1 Handling
The downhole components, motor, pump, protector, and intake are usually shipped in a
metal shipping box for protection. The shipping boxes are painted red on the end that
should be placed towards the wellhead when the equipment is delivered to the wellsite. The
shipping boxes should be lifted with a spreader chain or bridled with a sling at each end.
Severe equipment damage can result from dropping, dragging, or bouncing the boxes. The
shipping boxes should never be lifted by the centre of the box only.
The cable reel should be lifted by using an axle and a spreader bar. If a fork lift is used, the
forks should be long enough to support both reel rims when the reel is picked up from an
end. The ends of the cable should be covered or sealed to protect them from the elements.
Transformers and switchboards are provided with lifting hooks. To avoid damage, the
recommended practice is to lift with a spreader bar to maintain a vertical position. Variable-
speed drives are normally skid-mounted with fork lift slots and lifting eyes. Some VSD
models are manufactured with pull bars.
Additional information on ESP handling and installation procedures is available in API
Recommended Practices for Electric Submersible Pump Installation.
10.1.2 Installation
There are five phases to every ESP installation. These are:
Well preparation
Site layout
Equipment preparation
Assembly and installation
Start up of the equipment.
The well-preparation procedure involves determining the downhole clearance conditions.

Site layout prescribes equipment and rig locations as well as size and capacity. Running
equipment in the well and start-up procedures define the steps in equipment handling, test
procedures, and responsibility of the rig crew and servicemen.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4
3
2
4 1
4 3
3 2 4
2 1
3
1 2
1
Typical Onshore Offshore Sumersible Pumping Completions

ESP Completion
- No SSV Or Packer - No Downhole - Downhole Gas - Downhole Gas
- Downhole Gas Seperation Gas separation Separation Separation
- Retrievable Packer - Permenant Packer - High-Set Packer
- SCSSV Sleeve Type With Annular Vent
Common Components - Annulus SCSSV
Deep SSCSSV
1. Motor - SCSSV - SCSSV
2. Seal - Wireline Bypass
3. Intake/Gas Separator
4. Pump
- Cable
- Flat Cable
- Cable Clamps
Reservoir Fluid Completion Fluid
figure 10-1 - Typical ESP Installations

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Well Preparation
1) Prior to beginning installation of the ESP equipment, the well must be cleared of any
tubing, rods, packers, etc., that would prevent the downhole equipment from reaching
target depth.
2) The casing flange and wellhead should be examined for burrs and sharp edges. This
is very important in small-diameter casing because cable damage can be caused by
burrs and sharp edges catching cable bands.
3) A gauge ring should be run in (particularly in 4.5 casing) to below the setting depth of
the downhole equipment. If gauging indicates tight spots, a scraper or reamer run
should be conducted to remove the obstruction (scale, paraffin, burrs, or partially
collapsed casing). This will ensure adequate clearance for the ESP downhole
equipment as it is run into the well.
4) The BOP, if used, should be checked for adequate clearance as well as burrs and
sharp edges. Cut-out profiled rams are available for most tubing and cable sizes. They
should be installed in the BOP for well control in the event of a kick during equipment
installation.
Site Layout
1) The pulling rig should be centred over the well as close as possible. The guide
wheel/cable sheave should be secured safely to the rig mast no higher than 30 to 45ft
above the wellhead. The guide wheel should be at least 54 in diameter.
2) The cable reel or spooling truck should be positioned about 100ft from the wellhead in
direct line of sight of the rig operator or driller. One person should be responsible for
the cable operation. The responsibilities of this person are to ensure that there is
minimum tension on the cable (the cable should be run at the same speed as the
tubing), that the cable is kept clear of the power tongs during tubing makeup or break,
and that no one stands in front of the cable reel/spooler.
3) The cable junction box must be located at least 15ft from the wellhead. The
switchboard must be located a minimum of 50ft from the wellhead and 35ft min from
the junction box. The junction box normally is located 2 to 4ft above ground level to
ensure there is adequate air circulation and easy access. The junction box must never
be located inside a building.
Equipment Preparation
The ESP manufacturers field representative must thoroughly check all equipment before
installation.
During installation his responsibility is to supervise the pulling and/or running of the
downhole equipment. All equipment delivered to the wellsite is checked to determine that all
components necessary to complete the installation have arrived and are not damaged. The
ESP manufacturers field representative will perform the following checks and procedures.
1) Remove the shipping box covers and record all component serial numbers from name
plates
2) Check the casing, wellhead and pack-off materials.
3) Check the switchboard for proper fuses, potential transformer set-up, and current
transformer ratios.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4) Check all couplings for shaft diameter and spline match. Check that the shaft is
centred correctly (as impact can cause misalignment).
5) Check the flat cable length, size, and pothead type.
6) Check power transformers for correct primary and secondary voltage rating.
7) Confirm that the pump design setting depth and capacity match the well conditions and
the specification in the Completion Programme.
8) Check the power cable and flat cable with instruments and a high voltage megger.
Assembly and Installation Procedures

Once the equipment, cable, and verification procedures are completed, the assembly and
installation of the downhole equipment can begin. The manufacturers field representative
must direct the assembly and check the equipment as it is being run-in. The steps of
assembly and checks of equipment can be summarised as follows:
1) Assemble the motor, protector, intake, and pump.
2) Fill the motor/protector assembly with motor oil.
3) Mechanically check the free rotation of downhole components.
4) Check the electrical connection and test the motor, power cable, and flat cable
pothead.
5) Check the torque of connecting bolts is correct (use spring washers to prevent loosing
of the bolts).
6) Run the pump in the hole installing all the various completion assemblies.
7) Terminate the cable to any pre-made up pigtails through packers, etc.
8) Clamp the cable to tubing string with protectors.
9) Splice the cable or repair any damaged cable.
10) Test the cable continuity and isolation at various depths as it is being run.
11) Terminate the cable to the hanger pigtail.
12) Land the hanger, test the cable integrity and complete the other completion operations.
13) Connect the power cable to junction box and switchboard.
14) Complete the flowline connections.
15) Once the run-in procedures are completed and final electrical tests completed, the
manufacturers representative will complete the electrical connections.
16) The switchboard settings will be performed and verified by the manufacturers
specialist according to the conditions expected for each well.
17) Phase rotation should be checked carefully to ensure that the pump will rotate in the
correct direction. Start the pump. Fluid pump-up time, load and no-load voltage and
amperage on each phase must be recorded.
18) Monitor the wellhead pressure while the string is still full of completion fluid to verify
correct pump operation.
19) The quantity of production oil, gas, and water should be monitored on start up and
regularly for the time required to achieve stability.
A careful study should be made on any pump installation that does not produce at the
designed rates. As much information as possible, should be gathered to aid in specific
identification of problems and appropriate remedial actions. This will help ensure that
subsequent ESP installations will provide satisfactory run life.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
10.1.3 Pulling Procedure

Pulling the equipment out of a well involves essentially the reverse process of the installation
procedure.
If the equipment failure is judged to be premature, the condition of cable, flat cable, pump
rotation, and motor/protector fluid will be useful in determining the cause of the failure.
10.1.4 Troubleshooting
This section outlines recommendations to identify typical ESP problems and provide
solutions. The sole method that a failure can be analysed and its cause determined, is by
data collection. When problems occur, obtaining as much data as possible is essential.
Data Collection
Information that should be routinely compiled on each ESP installation includes:
Production data (such as water, oil, and gas rates)
Run life in days
Number of unit start ups and stoppages
Dynamic and static fluid levels
Pump setting depth
Perforation depths.
Information also should be obtained on:

Ammeter charts
Well conditions (abrasives, corrosives, H2S, etc.)
Electric power quality (surges, sags, balance, negative sequence voltages, etc.)
Visual observations of equipment and cable condition in previous workovers
Reasons for equipment workover (failure, workover, size change, etc.)
BHT recordings
When an ESP well is first placed on production, data should be collected daily for the first
week, weekly for the first month, and a minimum of monthly after the first month. Production
data during the first month are very important because they will indicate whether the pump is
performing as designed. If a downhole pressure instrument is installed, operating BHP is
equally if not more important.
The major source of information when troubleshooting an ESP installation is the recording
ammeter. The recording ammeter is a circular strip-chart accessory mounted in the
switchboard that records the amperage drawn by the ESP motor. A number of changes in
operating conditions can be diagnosed by interpreting ammeter records. The following
addresses ammeter chart reading and typical problem situations.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Normal Operation
A normal chart is smooth, with amperage at, or near to the motor specification amperage
requirement. Actual operation may be, either, slightly above or below the specification
amperage, however, as long as the curve is symmetric and consistent over a period of time,
operation is considered normal.
Normal Start-up
The start-up spike is caused by the inrush surge as the pump comes up to operating speed.
The subsequent amperage requirement is high but trending towards the normal level. This
is principally a result of the fluid level being drawn down to the design TDH, resulting in a
high but declining amperage requirement. Using the modern variable speed units this
problem has been overcome.
Power Fluctuations
Operating ESP amperage will vary inversely with voltage. If system voltage fluctuates, the
ESP amperage will fluctuate inversely to maintain a constant load. The most common cause
of this type of fluctuation is a periodic heavy load on the primary power system. This load
usually occurs when starting up another ESP or other large electric motor.
Simultaneous start-up of several motors should be avoided to minimise the impact on the
primary power system.
Ammeter spikes also can occur during a thunderstorm that is accompanied by lightning
strikes.
Gas Locking
Gas locking occurs as fluid level approaches the pump intake and intake pressure is lower
than the bubble-point. There are three possible remedies for gas locking:
Install a gas intake and/or a motor shroud
Lower the setting depth of the pump (but not lower than the perforation unless
the motor is shrouded)
Reduce the production rate of the pump by using a surface choke (but ensure
that the production rate remains within the recommended range for that pump).
It is entirely feasible that none of these solutions are satisfactory, then the pump should be
replaced with a pump that does not decrease the fluid level or reduce intake pressure below
the bubble-point.
Another possible solution is to add a variable speed drive (VSD) to the existing system. The
VSD controls the speed of the pump, which in turn controls the pump capacity. Thus the
pump output can be fine-tuned to protect against pump-off and gas lock while contributing to
improved pump life.
If the problem is confirmed to be due to reservoir conditions, then a stimulation operation
may be considered to reinstate the original PI and therefore allow operation of the current
ESP design.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Fluid Pump-Off
Fluid pump-off occurs typically when an ESP is too large in relation to the inflow capacity of
the well. The remedial actions are much the same as those listed for a gas lock and, in
addition, a well simulation treatment may increase the wells productivity closer to a match
with the pump.
In general, cycling an ESP will have an adverse effect on optimal run life. As a temporary
measure, the amount of time delay before automatic restart can be increased if the
switchboard is equipped with a Redalert Motor Controller. This may allow the fluid volume to
build up to prevent a high frequency of shutdown occurrence. Nevertheless, the pump and
well are not compatible and the pump size should be checked on the next change-out or the
well worked over to improve productivity.
Gassy Conditions or Emulsion

Continuous amperage fluctuation results from alternating free gas and heavy fluid pumping.
Generally this condition results in a reduction of stock tank barrels in relation to the pump
design rate.
This is also typical of emulsion conditions. The fluctuations are caused by the frequent,
temporary blockage of the pump intake. If it is an emulsion block, spikes are normally lower
or below the normal amperage line.
Solids and Debris

When solids or debris are produced in a well, the amperage will display fluctuations
immediately after start-up. Typically, when solids such as sand, scale, or weighted mud are
produced, special care must be taken on start-up to avoid pump damage. It may be
necessary to apply back-pressure on the well to prevent excess amperage until the kill fluid
is removed and/or sand production begins to decline to a safe volume.
Overload Shutdown
A pump will automatically shut down when it reaches an overload condition. When an
overload condition shutdown does occur the unit must not be restarted until the cause of the
overload has been identified and corrected. Some motor controller overload-detection
circuits contain a built-in time delay, ranging from 1 to 5 secs at 500% of the set point to 2 to
30 secs at 200% of the set point. However, they will not automatically restart the unit on an
overload condition. A restart attempt in an overload condition can destroy the downhole
equipment if the cause of the overload is not identified and corrected first.
The most common causes of overload conditions are:
Fluid pump-off
Increased fluid specific gravity
Sand production
Emulsion formation
Scale
Electric power supply problems
Worn equipment
Lightning damage
Many of the problems outlined above have been reduced due to the use of VSD.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
10.2 ROD PUMPS

There are two separate phases to a rod pump completion, the installation of the completion
tubing string and the installation of the rod pump and power mover.
10.2.1 Completion Installation

There are two common types of completion string configurations which are described in the
Completion Design Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7100). The first is when the tubing is simply
suspended in the well from a tubing hanger and the other is run with tubing anchor to anchor
the bottom end of the tubing string.
A tubing anchor counters tubing movement caused by the reciprocation of the rods and
pump plunger within the tubing and pump barrel saving wear and tear.
There are also two types of pumps designs, where the barrel is installed, either, in the tubing
(tubing installed pump) or run in on the sucker rods (rod installed pump). (Refer to figure
10-2)
The installation procedures for both options are described below.
10.2.2 Tubing String Installation

The well specific and pump manufacturers installation procedures should be provided in the
well programme.
1) Prepare the hole for the completion by conducting any stimulation operations and
ensuring the well completion fluid is clean and in proper condition (Refer to section
4.2).
2) Prepare the rig for running the completion string.
3) Ensure all the completion assemblies have been pressure tested, function tested and
drifted.
4) Ensure the tubing has been properly cleaned and drifted and the connections
inspected for damage. Prepare the tubing for running as per section 7.3.2.
5) Pick up the tubing anchor and tubing anchor assemblies, whichever is applicable, and
place in the rotary table setting the slips with a dog collar.
6) Pick up and make up the pump barrel assembly or the pump barrel landing nipple
assembly (if the pump barrel is installed on the rods).
7) Pick up the first joint of tubing, make up to the barrel, or barrel nipple, and begin
running in the hole.
8) Continue running tubing until reaching the design depth.
9) Attach the tubing hanger and landing joint. If the tubing is to be placed in tension to
prevent tubing movement, run to the calculated depth which will apply the correct
tension, set the tubing anchor, pull the tubing into tension and set the tubing hanger. If
the tubing is to be set in neutral, land off the hanger then set the tubing anchor.
10) Pressure test the tubing hanger.
11) Rig up wireline and make a drift run with a gauge cutter.
12) Run and install the standing valve.
13) Rig up the test head and pressure test the valve and tubing to the pressure specified in
the well programme.
14) Rig down wireline.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Tubing
Sucker Rods
Working Barrel
Plunger
Travelling Valve
Working
Barrel
(Heavy Wall)
Standing Valve
Shoe
Tubing Pump Rod Pump
figure 10-2 - Types of Bottom Hole Rod Pumps

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
10.2.3 Rod Installation

1) Prepare the rig for running the sucker rods.
2) Ensure that the rods and pump assemblies have been properly checked and tested.
3) Pick up the pump plunger (with or without the pump barrel) and set in the rotary table.
4) Pick up the first sucker rod and make up to the pump plunger.
5) Run the plunger in the hole on the rods.
6) When near the barrel or barrel landing nipple, run very slowly in the hole and tag the
barrel confirming the depth correlates correctly.
7) Pull back to space out the rods so that the polished rod will be positioned correctly
through the stuffing box.
8) Attached the polished rods and stuffing box.
9) Make up the stuffing box to the wellhead and pressure test through the flowline against
the standing valve.
10) Suspend the polished rod and move the rig off the well.
11) Clear the area to allow the prime mover to be positioned.
12) Bring in the prime mover, locate and check the position of the horse head over the well
centre. Bolt down the prime mover.
13) Conduct tests on the mover to ensure its correct operation prior to connection to the
polished rods.
14) Attach the bridle and carrier bar to the polished rod and adjust to the correct
height/stroke position.
15) Connect up the flowline to the production facility.
16) Connect the annulus gas outlet line into the flowline.
17) Pressure test according to the programme.
18) Begin the pump commissioning process bringing the well onstream.
19) Monitor that the initial produced fluid volumes is as per the design.
20) Collect data of production and prime mover current consumption.
21) Optimise the pump speed to maximise stable production flowing conditions.
10.3 HYDRAULIC PUMPS

There are three main types of hydraulic pump installations, jet pump, turbine pump and the
piston pump.
The applications and installation methods for each of these is fully described in the
Completion Design Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7100). The installation procedures are addressed
below.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
10.3.1 Jet Pump

Jet pumps are usually installed in a ported receptacle such as a wireline ported landing
nipple or a sliding side door as communication between the tubing and annulus is necessary
to provide a flow path for the power fluid.
A completion in not usually specifically designed for jet pump lift but is designed for both
natural flow and with the jet pump ported landing nipple or SSD installed for contingency
during later well life. The flow areas of the completion, however, also need to be considered
in the design stage for the efficiency of the pump design.
Jet pump designs include the use of the annulus or a second tubing string to deliver the
power fluid to the pump. If a second tubing string was to be employed, the well would need
to be re-completed as a dual or concentric completion.
A pump design will have been produced specifying the pump nozzle size, power fluid
pressure and volume requirements, and production target. The major work to convert to jet
pump is in the provision and recycling of the power fluid which will require additional
pumping facilities in conjunction with separation equipment to recover the power fluid.
1) Install all surface jet pump facilities, make connection to the annulus, function and
pressure test, and commission.
2) Rig up wireline on the well according to the procedures in the General Wireline
Procedures Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7110).
3) Install the required shifting tool to open the SSD or expose the port in a ported landing
nipple. Check for communication by pumping on the annulus or tubing.
5) Install the jet pump having ensured it is correctly set up and attached to the proper lock
mandrel. Run in the hole and set it in the receptacle.
6) Pull out of the hole and rig down wireline.
7) Begin pumping slowly gradually increasing the rate, monitoring and measuring power
fluid returns and production rates.
8) Gather all pump and production data and analyse the data to ensure the pump system
is performing within the design parameters.
9) Optimise pump performance by tuning the injection pressure to obtain the highest
possible stable flowing production. This may involve retrieval of the jet pump and
changing the nozzle size.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
figure 10-3 - Hydraulic Pump Design Options

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
10.3.2 Turbine Pump

The surface facilities described for the jet pump apply to the turbine pump also. However the
installation of the downhole turbine pump usually requires re-completion of the well as the
pump is tubing installed and retrieved.
As the turbine pump is capable of pumping much higher volumes than the jet pump, the flow
path area is more critical to pump capacity and efficiency.
The completion design options could require a second flow conduit (Refer to figure 10-3).
10.3.3 Piston Pump

The piston pump completion procedure is exactly like that of the jet pump except that a
positive piston pump is installed into the ported receptacle.
The procedure for installation of the pump and commissioning is the same as the jet pump.
Scheduled maintenance change-outs of the pump should be planned as the pump design is
more complex than the jet pump and more susceptible to wear and tear.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11. SUBSEA COMPLETIONS
The design and installation procedures for subsea wells are significantly different from land
and platform wells. Although the downhole completion equipment is generally the same, the
subsea wellhead and subsea Xmas tree systems are totally different and are also
manufacturer specific.
Similarly, well interventions methods from floating vessels are much more complex requiring
specialised well intervention or workover systems.
In todays technology, there are two main types of subsea Xmas tree and intervention
systems termed Conventional and Horizontal.
The conventional subsea completion system utilises a Xmas tree with valving configurations
similar to dual surface Xmas trees, to which a dedicated well intervention riser, run from the
vessel, can be attached. After latching to the subsea Xmas tree and testing the integrity of
the system, well servicing operations such as wireline and coiled tubing can be safely
conducted through the riser into the wellbore. This riser system is also utilised for the
installation and retrieval of the subsea tree.
This design, however, has some drawbacks in that the dedicated riser systems are
extremely costly to purchase and maintain, especially for fields with only a few wells over
which to share the costs. Nowadays, some standardisation has been adopted between
manufacturers and riser systems which are adaptable to various manufacturers subsea
trees are offered on a rental basis, however their availability at critical times may not always
be guaranteed. Further to this, in order to re-complete or workover a well, the conventional
system requires the subsea tree to be recovered and a marine riser system deployed to be
able to pull the completion string.
A less costly alternative to the conventional subsea tree system, is the Horizontal
(sometimes refereed to as Spool) system. This only requires the use a conventional drilling
marine BOP riser system for re-completion or workover. Tie-back strings and tooling back to
surface are deployed through the riser to enable access to the tubing bores. The horizontal
system design uses a casing head spool through which casing and the completion string can
be installed (with the tree production valves equivalent to two master valves on the horizontal
flowline bore). This enables re-completion or workover operations to be conducted without
having to pull the subsea tree and without having to purchase a dedicated riser system. The
drawback of these systems is the complexity of the re-entry tools used inside the marine
riser for wellbore re-entry (dual subsea tree, tubing running tool, etc.).
Note: As subsea completion systems designs and procedures are specific to

the project/manufacturer, the conventional Cooper system is described in
this section as a typical example of a subsea completion system (used on
the Agip UK Toni Field).
11.1 SUBSEA EQUIPMENT PRE-DEPLOYMENT TESTING

Refer to specific field downhole, and subsea completion equipment, contained in the
completion programme. The pre-deployment procedures given in this section are intended
to be generic, however some designations or abbreviations used may tend to reflect the
Company experience in the development of subsea wells.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11.1.1 Guidewire Establishment Tool

Guidewires can be run and attached to the guideposts separately by lowering the latches
attached with a suitable clump weight and having a diver or ROV aligning them to each post,
in turn. The alternative method is to use a guidewire establishment tool. This tool is simply a
frame deployed on drill pipe which correctly spaces out the latches and attaches all four
guidewires at once after a diver or ROV has aligned the frame.
The tool should be checked to ensure it has not been damaged and is intact.
Check that the connectors fit the tool.
Check the lower/pulling pad eyes and shackles, etc.
An alternative guidewire running tool for use in deep water, combines a camera and guide
frame deployed on drillpipe which is steered by fluid jets. Pumping down the drillpipe steers
the tool via the jetting nozzles, and the camera allows the observation of the positioning and
orientation of the collet connector above the guide post. One draw back of this tool is the
ability to run only one guideline connector at a time.
The tool should be checked to ensure that it has not been damaged and is intact.
Check that the connectors fit the tool.
Check the nozzles operate correctly.
Attach the camera umbilical and ensure the camera is operational.
11.1.2 Guidewire Latchess

Ensure that the collet latches are in good serviceable condition and that the guidewires have
been correctly attached. Ensure that contingency attachment and retrieval procedures are
available in the event a post is damaged, unless retrievable guideposts are installed (Refer
to section 11.1.3).
11.1.3 Diverless Guideposts

Diverless guideposts are run and installed in the permanent guidebase or production
guidebase and should be check prior to running.
Check the latching mechanisms or post retainer pins to observe that they are
fully operational (by ROV).
Check the latching profiles on the posts to ensure they are not corroded or
damaged.
11.1.4 Casing Hanger Elevation Test Tool

Some systems have an elevation test tool to check the casing hanger has been correctly
installed. It is run through the drilling riser to check the hanger before committing to pulling
the BOP stack.
The tool usually consists of a locating shoulder and lead impression blocks which when
landed off and pumped out will establish the vertical position of the hanger in the wellhead,
once the impressions are inspected and measured. With this type of tool it is necessary to
close the diverter or a set of pipe rams and pressurise the annulus to 500psi to ensure full
retraction of the impression blocks.
Ensure the impression block system is operative and set in the retracted running
position. Check the connection and that any crossovers required, are on hand.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11.1.5 Tubing Hanger System

The tubing hanger assembly consists of the hanger and a pup joint, typically 10ft long, and
necessitates the hanger stand being located over a suitable hole in the deck or drill floor. A
typical configuration of tubing hanger equipment including the running tool, prior to running,
is shown in figure 11-1.
The following sequence of pre-deployment testing is typical for a tubing hanger.
1) Locate the tubing hanger stand in a suitable location over a hole on the deck for the
pup joint/joints. This location must be within the reach of a crane which can access the
derrick V-doors.
2) Proceed to set up the seals, inspect and check the tubing hanger as per the
manufacturers operating manual.
In addition, note the following:
Ensure that anti-rotation pins are fitted.
Check that the hanger bores are clean and undamaged.
Check landing nipple profiles where fitted.
Check that the correct orientation key is fitted, if applicable.
Grease the appropriate parts of the hanger lock-down parts.
Fit the control line tubing connectors to the tubing hanger.
Inspect electrical cable tails where fitted.
There is a considerable risk of causing damage to the tubing hanger nose seal
area when installing or retrieving a hanger in the tubing hanger stand, therefore,
the hanger should be installed in the stand a minimum number of times.
3) When preparation of the tubing hanger is complete, leave the tubing hanger in the
tubing hanger stand or remove the hanger from the stand and lay back down in its
shipping box. Protect the tubing hanger from mechanical and weather damage.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
figure 11-1 - Typical Tubing Hanger Configuration Prior to Running

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11.1.6 Tubing Hanger Running/Orientation Tools

This section details the pre-testing of a typical production tubing hanger running tool system
consisting of the following items of equipment (shown with common abbreviations):
Tubing Hanger Running Tool, (THRT)
Tubing Hanger Orientation Joint, (THOJ).
Some systems have the THRT and THOJ as separate tools, whilst other systems have a
single run/set and orientation tool.
For setting up of the orientation of the THRT/THOJ refer to the Manufacturers Operations
Manual.
Pre-deployment testing may be performed, either on the rig deck or drill floor, and involves
stack-up of the THRT on the tubing hanger and utilises the test stands. Tests, according to
the manufacturers operating procedures manual, will be required to verify the integrity of the
system. These will cover the following aspects:
Cleanliness of the hydraulic systems meets with the specification, especially the
sub-surface safety valve line, usually to NAS 1638 class 6 or better.
Operation of all of the THRT functions.
Pressure integrity and operation of all hydraulic lines from the panel to the tubing
hanger.
The following tests are required to test the integrity of the system. Afterwards the THRT and
tubing hanger assembly will remain as one unit stored on the rig floor, connected to the utility
umbilical, if possible. A second or back-up system must be available for testing. The testing
procedure can be modified as long as the overall testing requirements are satisfied:
1) Check the tubing hanger in its shipping box (Refer to previous section).
2) Install the tubing hanger in the tubing hanger stand over a suitable hole in the deck.
3) Position the THRT tool stand.
4) Install the THRT in its stand and test.
5) Interface test and flush the THRT with the tubing hanger in the stand.
6) Check and position the tubing hanger body seal.
7) Check the THOJ and flush through the tool.
8) Move the THRT and stand up to the rig floor.
9) Move the THOJ to the rig floor with the handling tool and make up to THRT.
10) Return the complete assembly to the deck and test.
11) Before running the tubing, return the complete tool to the rig floor.
12) Run through the rotary and make up to enough joints of tubing or 5 DP to stand the
assembly back in the derrick.
13) Hook up the utility umbilical.
14) Stand back in the derrick.
15) Test the function lines.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
These activities are described in more detail in the following sections. Refer to the specific
manufacturers Operation and Maintenance Manual for additional instructions.
It should be noted that pressure tests conducted through flexible hoses will be subject to
some pressure decay caused by umbilical expansion. For this reason, acceptable pressure
decay should be established during chart recorded tests.
All site received inspections and ECR punch list items relating to this equipment must have
been satisfactorily addressed before proceeding.
THRT Preparation
1) Locate the THRT stand adjacent to the tubing hanger stand on the rig deck and within
hot-line range of the control panel.
2) Perform THRT preparation according to the Manufacturers Operating Manual.
3) Perform LATCH/UNLATCH and LOCK/UNLOCK tests.
4) Check the orientation key function and that the correct key is selected to ensure
correct orientation of the hanger.
5) Install the running tool back onto the stand.
Interface THRT with the Tubing Hanger

1) If not already done, install the tubing hanger in its stand. Ensure that all seal pockets
are clean and lubricated with control fluid. Install a connector (or dummy) into the top
of the downhole pressure transducer bore, if not already fitted, to enable a peripheral
test to be conducted and the connector to be tested. (Beware of damaging any nose
seal components against the tubing hanger stand).
2) Using hotlines connected to the THRT, proceed to remove the tool from its stand and
interface it with the tubing hanger according to the operating procedures. The tubing
hanger must be in the locked position prior to this activity.
3) The TH/THRT interface should now be tested (by chart or gauge) in order to verify the
interface and all functions.
4) Additionally, all TH lines must be flushed to the correct cleanliness specification.
5) Fill the TH/THRT cavity.
6) Proceed to function and pressure test.
7) Pump control fluid through the sub-surface safety valve line and injection lines to check
continuity. Cap the pre-installed fittings in each bore in the bottom of the tubing
hanger and pressure test each line.
8) Unlock the tubing hanger.
9) Disconnect the THRT from the tubing hanger. Pick up and land in the nose protector.
Secure and vent all pressure to the THRT.
10) Leave the tubing hanger in its stand and remove the electrical connector. Ensure that
the hanger top face is protected against damage and weather.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
THOJ Preparation
1) Check end connections and seals when horizontally located on the deck. Check that
there is no evidence of orientation sleeve and slot damage. Check the orientation
sleeve securement pins and field welds for damage or distortion. Check the downhole
pressure transducer connectors.
2) Fit the flushing tool to the bottom end of the joint, hook up the utility or test umbilical to
the top and circulate/flush as necessary to achieve the required hydraulic cleanliness.
3) Disconnect the utility or test umbilical and cover/protect any quick couplers.
4) Fit the handling tool to the top end of the joint.
Connect THOJ to THRT (if required)

1) The THRT and its nose protector must be moved to a position close to the rotary table
to enable stabbing of the orientation joint.
2) Check all faces, seals and alignment pins and replace as necessary.
3) Check the downhole pressure transducer connector.
4) Pick up the prepared THOJ and pre-fitted handling tool and make up to the THRT
checking all seals and connectors, etc.
5) Pick up the assembly and return to the test area on the deck where access to the utility
umbilical is available.
THOJ and THRT Interface Tests

1) Temporarily connect the utility umbilical to the THOJ, securing the umbilical
termination.
WARNING: Do not bend the umbilical beyond its minimum specified bend radius.
2) Function and test all lines.

3) Vent all pressure after the testing.
4) Insert a test plug in each of the lower end stab pockets in turn and pressure test and
flush to specification.
5) Check the transducer connections for continuity and resistance from the utility reel to
the lower end of the running tool. If necessary, test the THOJ/THRT interface during
the electrical test and record on a chart.
6) Recheck all seals at the base of the THRT after testing, replace as necessary and refit
the nose protector.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Make Up and Testing the THOJ/THRT

1) Make-up a handling string of tubing joints or 5 drill pipe and lay down on the catwalk.
2) Disconnect the utility umbilical from the THOJ, ensuring minimum contamination to the
hydraulic system.
3) Pick up the riser handling tool/THOJ/THRT assembly and move to the rig floor.
4) Make-up the handling string of tubing joints or drillpipe to the riser handling tool.
5) Pick up the assembly, taking extreme care not to damage the electronic/hydraulic
quick couplers when pulling out, until the couplers are 3ft above the rotary table.
6) Connect up the utility umbilical. Ensure that hydraulic contamination is minimised
during hook-up.
WARNING: Do not bend the umbilical beyond its minimum specified bend radius.
7) Ensure the umbilical clamps are a tight fit. Ensure that the installed clamp dimensions
are within the BOP diameter.
8) Umbilical tails must be plaited as necessary to take up any excess length and to
provide protection.
9) Protect hoses as much as possible by tying back to the riser pipes.
10) Fit a hose protector if provided.
11) While handling the sheave and paying out the umbilical, stand the assembly back in
the derrick and secure to protect from unnecessary damage.
12) When stood back, the final pressure and function tests of the lines from the panel to
running tool can be performed in order to save time later.
13) The THOJ/THRT assembly is now ready for use.
11.1.7 Tubing Hanger Verification Tool

The tubing hanger verification tool is used to check the positioning of the hanger within the
wellhead after being set, with regards to orientation and height. This ensures that the subsea
Xmas trees stabs will correctly align with the bores in the hanger thus saving them from
being damaged if misaligned or if the tubing hanger is set too high.
Note: Some subsea tree designs have extension subs that can be shimmed
and/or slide within seal pockets to adjust for any incorrect stack up
heights of the casing hanger or tubing hanger assemblies. Typically this
adjustment is limited to a maximum of 1 to 2ins.
Mechanical probes, sleeves, lead impression blocks are all used in various tool designs with
some being diver assist.
The tools probes or shear sleeves must be set and pinned according the
Manufacturers Operating Manual.
Care should be exercised so as not to accidentally clash with other equipment
and inadvertently move the probes or sleeves thus giving a false
indication/impression.
If diver assists, the diver must be fully versed in the tool operation.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11.1.8 Tubing Hanger Isolation Plugs

The tubing hanger isolation plugs are wireline installed and are described in the specific well
programme.
Profiles should be inspected for any damage.
11.1.9 Subsea Tree And Workover Equipment

This section describes in outline the pre-test activities to be performed on:
Subsea Xmas Tree (XT)
Lower Riser Package (LRP)
Tree Running Tool (TRT) or Emergency Disconnect Package (EDP)
Tree Cap
Tree Cap Running Tool (TCRT).
Preparation of this equipment, up to the end of the main and utility umbilicals, is addressed
in the following sections.
After each of the above items is loaded onto the rig, a Site Received Test should have been
performed. Thereafter, the equipment will be stacked, function and pressure tested on deck
to verify equipment performance prior to running.
Assuming that all the necessary equipment is available, SRTs are complete and ECR Punch
Lists are acceptable, pre-deployment testing should commence as defined below.
Note: The manufacturers Operation and Maintenance manual should be

followed for detailed specific procedures.
Pre-test activities should be performed on deck and conducted according to a plan provided
in the well programme.
1) Place the XT on the XT test base and the tree cap on the LRP test base ensuring that
the connectors are fully unlocked prior to interface and correctly locked following
interface. Connector indicator pins should be observed to be correctly positioned.
2) Flush the control lines to the specified cleanliness standard.
XT
XT XT = XT
BASE BASE
TCRT
TCRT CAP
CAP + LRP BASE = LRP BASE
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
3) Test the XT/XT base interface, i.e. AX/VX gasket, production, annulus and flowline
bores.
4) Integrate the XT and tree cap ensuring that the connectors are fully unlocked prior to
interface and correctly locked following interface. Connector indicator pins should be
observed to be correctly positioned.
5) Test production, annulus bores and peripheral area.
TCRT
TCRT CAP
XT + CAP = XT
XT BASE XT BASE
6) Flush all XT and cap control lines.

7) Pressure test lines.
8) Assemble the Subsea Control Module (SCM) to the tree assembly ensuring that the
connectors are fully unlocked prior to interface and correctly locked following interface.
Connector indicator pins should be observed to be correctly positioned.
TCRT TCRT
CAP CAP SCM
SCM
XT + = XT
XT BASE XT BASE
7) Function and test via the Portable Electronic Simulator Unit (PESU):
8) DHPTT and sensor readings
9) Platform PCS commands and shutdown sequences
10) Hydro-test both sides of actuated valves.
11) If the LRP and TRT control fluids are acceptably clean, stack p as shown and test the
interface ensuring that the connectors are fully unlocked prior to interface and correctly
locked following interface. Connector indicator pins should be observed to be correctly
positioned.
LRP + LRP + TRT = TRT

BASE LRP
LRP
BASE
12) Flush all lines. Hook up to Workover Control System (WOCS) and perform:
Pressure test of bores and AX/VX cavities
Pressure test of control lines at TRT/LRP interface
Hydro-test both sides of LRP valves.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
13) Integrate the LRP on the XT assembly ensuring that the connectors are fully unlocked
prior to interface and correctly locked following interface. Connector indicator pins
should be observed to be correctly positioned.
TCRT TRT
CAP SCM LRP SCM
- TCRT + TRT =
XT CAP LRP XT
XT BASE XT BASE
14) Pressure and/or function test through the WOCS:

LRP AX/VX line, production and annulus bores.
All XT/LRP control lines.
Ensure that any accumulators fitted to the LRP are charged and charging
following functioning of the valves supplied by the accumulator. The accumulator
vent function (to the sea or to an atmospheric cylinder to improve valve response
times) should be checked on surface.
15) Drift production and annulus bores through entire stack-up.

16) Re-check SCM functions by operating against the LRP.
This completes the XT/SCM/LRP/TRT preparation.
Flushing XT and Tree Cap

1) Prepare the XT for interfacing with the tree test base in accordance with the
Manufacturers Operating Manual.
2) Completely fill the production and annulus flowline hub bores with water.
3) Lift the tree using the handling tool and lock the XT onto the XT test base using
hotlines ensuring that the connectors are fully unlocked prior to interface and correctly
locked following interface. Connector indicator pins should be observed to be correctly
positioned.
4) Flush and sample the lines as necessary. Clean the tree control lines to the specified
cleanliness to enable the tree and cap to be interfaced.
Note: This step may be omitted if the tree is known to be clean through
previous flushing. Hydraulic cleanliness must be verified by sampling 3
lines at random within each assembly. All three samples must all meet
hydraulic cleanliness criteria.
The combined XT and cap will be flushed together later. This activity
should be conducted with the assistance of a tree schematic which will
show all the lines on the tree.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5) Hotline open the ASV and AMV and drift the tree production bore valves. Close the
valves after drifting. Valve indicator pins where fitted should be observed for correct
action and travel.
6) Pressure test the XT/test stump interfaces through the test skid lines.
7) If required, hook up the DHPTT simulator to the electrical lines emerging from the
base of the tubing hanger simulator and check.
8) Fill the tree and test stump with water to aid later testing when the cap is installed on
the tree by using hotlines to open all necessary valves. Valve indicator pins where
fitted should be observed for correct action and travel.
9) Bleed air from test stump connections as necessary.
10) Prepare the tree cap on the maintenance stand for interface with the LRP/Tree cap
test and flushing skid.
Note: Tree cap flushing may be omitted if the cap is known to be clean from
previous flushing. Hydraulic cleanliness must be verified by sampling
any 3 lines at random. All three samples must meet with hydraulic
cleanliness criteria.
11) Place the cap on the cap test and flush stand and pressure test the production and
annulus bores ensuring that the connectors are fully unlocked prior to interface and
correctly locked following interface. Connector indicator pins should be observed to be
correctly positioned.
12) Prepare the cap for TCRT interface according to the Manufacturers Operating Manual.
13) Prepare the TCRT according to the Manufacturers Manual.
14) Install the test sub into the top of the TCRT and torque up tight on the drill floor.
15) Install a 15ft pup joint above the sub.
16) Use hotlines or the TCRT umbilical to function and pressure test the tool.
Note: There is no hydraulic cleanliness requirement for this equipment.
17) Leave the pressure locked in the tool running string.
XT Cap Installation on Tree

1) Pick up the TCRT using the lifting sub and interface with the XT according to the
Manufacturers Operating Manual ensuring that the connectors are fully unlocked prior
to interface and correctly locked following interface. Check the cap position indicator
and adjust as necessary.
2) Pressure test the TCRT/Tree Cap/XT interface. Be sure to vent adjacent volumes
during the test. After the test, vent pressure from the TCRT running string.
3) Leave the XT Base/XT/Tree Cap/TCRT as a stack up for further testing. Do not
remove the TCRT.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Flushing and Testing the XT and Tree Cap Hydraulic Lines

1) Use clean hotlines on the tree to flush all lines on the assembled XT and tree cap to
the specified cleanliness.
2) Flush the methanol line by opening the necessary valves using a hotline. Valve
indicator pins where fitted should be observed for correct action and travel.
3) Pressure test all control lines to the working pressures stated in the operating manual
using a test pump and chart recorder. Visually check for leaks.
Note: Extreme care must be exercised to avoid inadvertently over-pressuring

return lines. This can occur if the return relief isolation valves are closed
or the return line is blocked when functioning valves. Over
pressurisation can be avoided by ensuring that the return line relief
isolation valve on the trees are open during testing activities.
Integrate Tree/Tree Cap with Surface Control Module (SCM) and Test Stump
1) Ensure the SCM has been fully inspected and tested upon the SCM test and flushing
skid according to the relevant procedures.
2) Pick up the SCM, check all the connections, and without the use of the SCM running
tool, land on the XT mobile mounting base (MMB) ensuring that the connectors are
fully unlocked prior to interface and correctly locked following interface. Connector
indicator pins should be observed to be correctly positioned. This is a very critical
activity and extreme care must be taken to avoid damage.
3) Lock the SCM to the MMB by setting weight on the locking bar.
Prepare the LRP and TRT

1) Assemble the TRT drill pipe adapter to the TRT.
2) Ensure that a lifting sub has been torqued into a TRT drill pipe adapter on the drill
floor.
3) Pick up the TRT and land on the stand. Check the hydraulic cleanliness of any 3 TRT
control lines and, if better or equal to specification, no further flushing will be necessary
before integration with the LRP. If not, wash down couplers with solvent and check all
TRT seals in preparation for interface with the LRP/Tree cap test and flushing skid.
4) Assuming that no flushing of the TRT in isolation is necessary. Check and replace
production and annulus lower stab seals, if necessary. Replace the TRT AX/VX
gasket with a new gasket. This is the final opportunity to install a new gasket in
the TRT.
5) Remove the TRT from the stand and set on the deck.
6) Install the LRP on the stand. Check both LRP connector stab seals and replace as
necessary. Check the AX/VX gasket and replace, if necessary.
Note: The seals and gaskets will be rechecked later before stacking the
LRP/TRT onto the tree.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
7) Pick up the LRP using slings or the tree handling tool and land over the LRP/Tree cap
test skid. Use hotlines to lock the LRP to the skid ensuring that the connectors are
fully unlocked prior to interface and correctly locked following interface. Connector
indicator pins should be observed to be correctly positioned.
8) Perform a brief pressure gauge test of the LRP/Test skid hub interface to obtain
confidence in the interface sealing.
9) Flush the control lines through the skid until the required cleanliness is achieved.
10) When hydraulic line cleanliness is satisfactory, remove the tree handling tool.
11) Ensure that the WOCS is fully flushed and tested, then connect the main umbilical to
the TRT.
WARNING: Do not bend the umbilical beyond its minimum bend radius.
12) Pick up the TRT and carefully set over the LRP ensuring that the connectors are fully
unlocked prior to interface and correctly locked following interface. Connector indicator
pins should be observed to be correctly positioned.
13) Test the LRP and TRT connector control lines.
14) Flush the combined LRP/TRT as a unit.
15) Test and chart record the TRT AX/VX test.
16) Test the LRP AX/VX gasket.
17) Test all the functions per the Operating Manual.
18) Open all the LRP valves and fill the LRP with water. Valve indicator pins where fitted
should be observed for correct action and travel.
19) Pressure test and chart record either side of the LRP valves. Vent all pressure after
the tests and check that all LRP valves are closed. Valve indicator pins where fitted
20) Pressure test the SCSSV1 line.
21) At the LRP/tree cap test stump, perform a hydro-test.
The LRP/TRT/WOCS system is now tested as a unit and is ready to be integrated with the
tree (Refer to Section 8 for details on WOCS).
11.1.10 Install the LRP/TRT onto the XT

1) Remove the tree cap from the tree then lift up the TCRT to remove the cap.
2) Land the Tree Cap/TCRT on the deck. There is no need to separate these items.
3) Prepare the tree as per the Manufacturers Operations Manual.
4) Lift the LRP/TRT stack from the LRP/Tree cap test skid using the TRT drill pipe
adapter and place it onto the test/flushing stand.
5) Prepare the underside of the LRP for final assembly on the tree.
6) Pick up the LRP/TRT stack from the test flushing stand and carefully land on the tree
in the correct orientation, checking that the ROV faces correspond. Ensure that the
connectors are fully unlocked prior to interface and correctly locked following interface.
Connector indicator pins should be observed to be correctly positioned.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Test XT/LRP/TRT Stack
Note: Throughout all tests check that return flows generally match and that
there is no visible return line leakage. Because of line expansion and
effects from adjacent lines in the umbilical, inconsistent supply and
return flows can occasionally be experienced.
1) Verify LCP status.

2) Open the LRP valves.
3) Pressure test the LRP AX/VX cavity.
4) Open the LRP XOV.
5) Fill the tree above the swab valves with water.
6) Hydro-test the production and annulus bores.
7) Pressure test the tree AX/VX line.
8) Pressure test below the seals and controlled landing blind stabs in the base of the tree.
9) At the LCP, operate the following functions in the order shown:
Valve Function
IUMV OPEN
IWV OPEN
AMV OPEN
AWV OPEN
XOV OPEN
When pressure has stabilised, zero the LCP and return flow meters and monitor. Also
check visually for leaks. Close valves after the test. Valve indicator pins where fitted
10) Pressure test the SCSSV1 line from above and below.
11) Check line continuity, then close the tree AX/VX test line isolation valve.
12) Pressure test the tree connector AX/VX line.
13) Pressure test below the tree AX/VX isolation valve. After the test, open the tree AX/VX
test isolation valve to prove HPP to test base continuity.
Drift Tree/LRP/TRT Stack

1) Check that all LCP functions are vented at the LCP with the exception of:
Function Status
TRT connector LOCK
LRP connector LOCK
ESD supply at correct pressure
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
2) Remove the TRT drill pipe adapter.

3) Open the following vertical bore valves. Valve indicator pins where fitted should be
observed for correct action and travel:
LRP PV
LRP AV
ISV
ASV
IUMV
AMV
4) Check that the manual PLMV is open.

5) Measure the depth from the top of the TRT to the test base production and annulus
pockets and mark drift lines accordingly. Vent lines on the tree test stump to drain the
bores of test water. If necessary, clear the bores of excess grease using a rubber disc
on drain rods.
6) Drift the Tree/LRP/TRT stack from top to bottom with the drifts specified in the manual.
Close the valves after drifting is complete.
7) Replace the TRT drill pipe adapter on the top of the TRT.
Final Tree/LRP/TRT Preparation

1) Refit the TRT drill pipe adapter to the top of the tree assembly.
2) Flush the SCSSV1 and AX/VX test lines from the LCP to the tree test stump.
3) At the LCP, unlock the flowline and wellhead connectors.
4) Verify LCP status for other functions.
5) Verify visually that the wellhead and flowline connectors are unlocked.
6) Pick up the full Tree/LRP/TRT stack with the main umbilical attached, taking extreme
care not to exceed the minimum umbilical bend radius or over-stress the
umbilical attachment point on the TRT.
7) Land the assembly in the correct orientation on the handling/support skid.
8) Replace all gaskets and seals in the underside of the wellhead and flowline
connectors.
9) Set the tree manual valves as per the Operating Manual.
10) Perform a final pre-submergence check according to the Operating Manual.
11) When all checks are complete, pick up the Tree/LRP/TRT/main umbilical stack, and
land out on the handling/support hub or skid beams.
12) When landed on a handling/support hub, lock the tree to the mandrel.
13) Remove the TRT drill pipe adapter in preparation for later fitting of the stress joint.
Summary of Tree System Pre-deployment Testing

A summary of the pre-deployment testing should be confirmed by checking off the
checks/tests in a table.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11.1.11 Production Riser

1) Carefully remove the sections of riser from the shipping baskets and lay out on the
pipe rack.
2) Check that all joints, stress joint and surface joint are present.
3) Remove the protectors and check the connectors and connection seals for damage
and replace, if necessary.
4) Ensure the connections are suitably covered in grease for weather protection. Replace
the protectors.
5) Ensure sufficient riser handling tools are available and check connectors and
connection seals. Ensure riser handling tools have current certification.
11.1.12 Surface Xmas Tree

The surface Xmas tree or terminal head should be removed from the shipping frame and all
valves tested from above and below to working pressure.
Ensure that the lift frame (if applicable) has been shipped and is undamaged. If long bails
are utilised, ensure they are located, identified and have current certification. These items
may be stored out of the way until immediately before they are required. Check that the
lifting frame will not clash with the derrick structure. If coiled tubing services are required
later, it is recommended that a lift frame be utilised rather than long bails.
Where wireline adapters are fitted to the crown flange ensure that the necessary seals are in
good order and any required crossovers are like wise identified.
11.2 DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES

The following procedures are guidelines only and therefore engineers must ensure that
equipment specific procedures from the manufacturers Operating Manuals are used for
equipment deployment.
11.2.1 Running The Completion And Tubing Hanger

1) Clear the rig floor of all non-essential tools and equipment.
2) Assemble well control crossovers to the safety or Kelly cock valves and clearly mark
for easy identification. Set aside in an easily accessible place on the drill floor.
3) Move the TH handling string dual handling equipment to the rig floor.
4) Rig up the torque/turn analysis with powered tubing tongs equipped with integral back
up tongs and stand back in the derrick.
5) Position the electrical cable/control line protectors in a drum on the rig floor and use
only from the drum as required. Tubing protectors must be removed placed in a
basket immediately when removed from running joints.
6) Rig up the dual landing string elevators.
7) Pick up the THRT/THOJ/handling sub assembly and install on to a dummy or used
hanger, making up the THRT umbilical if not already made up.
8) Lock the THRT to the hanger, lock in the pressure at the umbilical reel and disconnect
the umbilical jumper.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
9) Attaching the umbilical to the strings, run in the hole on drillpipe/tubing stands.
10) Run in the hole and on the compensator, gently tag the hanger in the wellhead
recording the exact depth that the weight drops off and marking the pipe at the rotary
table.
11) Repeat the procedure ensuring the depth remains the same.
12) Pull up until the tool is 10ft above the orientation key/slot (for whichever type of system
is being used. Hydraulically activate the orientation key and slowly lower the handling
string observing for orientation of the string. If the string does not turn, apply a chain
tong and check that it is correctly engaged in the slot. Check the depth is the same as
found in step 10 above. Repeat the procedure if it is felt there may be any uncertainty.
13) If necessary to check the ram sealing ability on the THOJ, close the rams, install the
safety valves on the landing strings and test down the kill line to the appropriate
pressure, usually 1,500psi. Painting the THOJ white will give confirmation that the tool
has been correctly positioned within the stack.
14) Bleed off the test pressure, open the rams and pull the landing string, strap the pipe if
necessary.
15) Observe the paint on the THOJ and for signs on the dummy hanger that it was
properly positioned.
16) Close the blind rams and disconnect the dummy hanger. Pick up the allocated TH and
pack off into the rotary table and attach the THRT/THOJ to the hanger.
17) Check that the TH seals have not been damaged and install the protection cap. Stand
the complete assembly back in the derrick.
18) Rig down the dual elevators and rig up the single completion handling equipment.
19) Ensure the completion sub-assemblies have been laid out in correct running order and
appropriately numbered.
20) Refer to completion installation procedures in section 8.
21) Run the string to the hanger installation point and, according to the completion design
and procedures in the well programme, conduct the spacing out operations or install
the hanger/THRT assembly. Terminate and connect up the control line and electrical
cable.
22) Pressure test the SCSSSV control line on the control panel. Check electrical continuity.
23) Conduct the final tubing pressure test and any other necessary tests according to the
Operating Manual.
24) Run the completion string to depth on the hanger landing strings, locking pressure in
all the correct functions.
25) When 10ft above the hang off point, activate the orientation mechanism and lower the
hanger until soft landing into the wellhead.
26) Check the depth marks on the landing string confirming proper depth location. Check
with chain tongs that the orientation slot is engaged. Repeat the procedure only if
absolutely necessary as damage to the control line or cable may be caused by cycling
in and out of the hole.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
27) Ensuring all the completion string weight has been hung off, proceed with the hanger
setting and testing procedures as per the manufacturers Operating Procedures
Manual which will test:
Production string
Annulus string
Above the hanger
Below the hanger
All control or injection lines
DHPTT cable.
28) Rig up wireline and plug the well for BOP removal according to the well programme.
29) Unlatch the running tool from the hanger and retrieve the landing string to surface.
30) If applicable, run the TH orientation or verification tool.
11.2.2 Pull The Drilling BOPs

Displace the riser to seawater and pull the stack as per the Drilling Procedures Manual
(STA-P-1-M-6140).
11.3 WORKOVER AND PRODUCTION CONTROLS SYSTEM PRE-DEPLOYMENT TESTING

11.3.1 Workover Controls Equipment
Workover Hydraulic Power Pack (HPP)
Local Control Panel (LCP)
Remote Control Panel (RCP)
Remote ESD Panel (RESDP)
Surface Tree ESD Panel (STESDP)
Main Workover Umbilical Reel (MUR)
Utility Workover Umbilical Reel (UUR)
TCR Umbilical Reel (TUR)
Hydraulic Interconnection Jumpers
Electrical Interconnection Jumpers
ESD Radio Link Remote Telemetry Unit (RTU)
ESD Radio Link Battery Unit
ESD Radio Link Antennae A and B.
The arrangements of these are shown in figure 11-2.

The WOCS usually operates on three modes to accommodate running or retrieving:
a) Tubing Hanger System.
b) Subsea Xmas tree and workover riser.
c) Tree Cap.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11.3.2 Production Controls Equipment

Subsea Control Module (SCM)
Subsea Control Module Running Tool (SCMRT)
Subsea Control Module Flushing and Testing Unit (SCMFTU)
Portable Electronic Simulator Unit (PESU).
After each of the items has been received onboard, a Site Received Test should first be
performed. It is then to be tested to confirm operation before use.
The pre-deployment test procedures for both systems are detailed in the following sections.
Antenna
'A'
ESD
Eni S.p.A.
Radio Antenna
Link 'B'
E&P Division
SXT ESD
S P E O
Panel
Battery
Elecrtical Supply Safe Area
HPP LCP
RCP
Air Supply
Remote ESD
Panel
Hydraulic Hydraulic
Power Power
Control
SXT
Lines
STAP-P-1-M-7120
Control Control
Lines Lines
IDENTIFICATION CODE
figure 11-2 - Typical WOCS Layout

Main Utility TCRT
Umbilical Umbilical Umbilical
Reel Reel Reel
0 1
PAG
Air Air Air

TRT
139
SCM
THOJ TCRT
LRP RT
OF
REVISION
XT XT THRT
269
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11.3.3 WOCS Pre-Deployment Testing

All tests will be in accordance to the manufacturers Operating and Maintenance Manual and
should meet the guidelines below.
System Test Procedure

Check and prepare the hydraulic supply panel as follows:
1) Ensure that all Site Received Inspections have been carried out and that ECR punch
lists have been actioned.
2) Locate and secure all equipment in the locations shown in the Well Programme.
Ensure they are properly earthed.
3) Check the status of all valves, adjustable controls and switches.
4) Attach dedicated air and electrical supplies to the HPP. These should be appropriately
marked or locked to ensure they are not accidentally disconnected.
5) Connect air supplies to the MUR, UUR, and TUR.
6) Ensure the HPP has sufficient reserves of control fluid, and that accumulators are fully
charged.
7) Hook up to the HPP with the jumpers to the MUR and UUR.
8) Connect the electrical jumpers.
9) Establish the radio link with the Tiffany platform and function test.
10) Hook up the RCP, RESDP, STESDP and RTU.
11) Check the operation of the LCP functions.
12) Check the operation of the RCP functions.
13) Check the operation of the RESDP functions.
14) Check the operation of the STESDP functions.
15) Check the operation of the MUR functions.
16) Check the operation of the UUR functions.
17) Check the operation of the LCP functions.
18) Flush and test all control lines within jumpers and umbilicals, but not TCRT umbilical
lines.
19) Check the operation of all reel air motors.
WOCS ESD Tests

This procedure tests the workover ESD function using the LCP, RCP and RESDP panels
and should be conducted after the full stack up integrity tests.
Note: During the following tasks the subsea ESD accumulator should re-charge
after each ESD test; but allow 5min between tests to provide sufficient
time for re-charging.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Perform WOCS ESD sequences as follows:

1) Ensure that the ESD accumulator on the LRP is fully charged and attach a suitable
range pressure gauge to the SCSSV1 line on the tree test stump. Check that the LCP
and tree is correctly set according to the Manufacturers Instruction Manual.
2) Depress the workover ESD push-button at the LCP.
a) Verify that the following valves close:
LRP PV
LRP XOV
LRP AV.
Record that, the operating time until the last valve closes according to the time
specified in the manual and within tolerance.
b) Verify that the next set of valves close:
PWV
AWV
XOV
PSV
ASV
Methanol Injection Valve
Scale inhibitor Injection Valve.
c) Verify that the next set of valves close:
PUMV
AMV
e) Verify that the SCSSV1 line depressurises at the correct time after the workover
ESD button was pressed on the LCP.
f) Unlock the workover ESD push-button at the LCP.
g) Operate the workover ESD, reset push-button on the LCP after the ESD
sequence is completed.
h) Verify that the workover ESD lamps at the LCP, RCP, and RESDP switch off.
3) Enable the RCP at the LCP and re-open all the actuated valves as per step 1 above at
the RCP. Verify at the LCP gauges, SCSSV1 test base gauge and by visual
inspection. Also check that the ESD supply is fully charged.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4) Depress the workover ESD push-button at the RCP.

a) Valve closure should be identical to that monitored in step 2 overleaf.
b) Unlock the workover ESD push-button at the RCP.
c) Operate the workover ESD reset push-button on the LCP, after the ESD
d) Verify that the workover ESD lamps at the LCP, RCP and RESDP are switched
off.
5) Disable the RCP at the LCP. Re-open all the actuated valves as per step 1 overleaf at
the LCP. Verify at the LCP gauges, SCSSV1 test base gauge and by visual
inspection. Also check that the ESD supply is fully charged.
6) Depress the workover ESD push-button at the remote ESD panel.
a) Valve closure should be identical to that monitored in step 2 overleaf.
b) Unlock the workover ESD push-button at the remote ESD panel.
c) Operate the workover ESD reset push-button on the LCP, after the ESD
d) Verify that the workover ESD lamps at the LCP, RCP, and RESDP are switched
off.
11.3.4 Production Controls Pre-Deployment Testing

This test sequence must be done during the pre-deployment testing on the subsea tree in
section 11.1.9.
Function Test the Tree through the PESU

Hook-Up
1) Using the dedicated electrical cable provided, set up the PESU and hook up to the tree
test stump electrical connection plate.
2) Power up the system and perform electrical checks.
3) Connect up LP, HP and return hydraulic lines to the tree test stump bulkhead plate
taking supplies from either the HPP or the outboard end of either the main or utility
umbilical jumpers.
4) Power up the tree hydraulically.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Check Sensors
1) Configure the PESU as a surface unit with the suppliers protocol. Send a BREAK
STATE REQUEST COMMAND to SEM A. Verify that all valves and indicators are
shown as OK.
2) Send an ANALOGUE DATA REQUEST COMMAND to SEM A. Verify that all
transmitters are indicated as (tick).
3) Verify that readings for Annulus Pressure and Production Pressure are correct.
Ensure that the bores are vented at the block elbows by opening the wing valves,
hence ensuring pressure is not locked in.
Injection Pressure
(Ambient pressure) = __________ barg
PESU reading = __________ mA
350
Converted PESU reading = x (PESU reading diff. from 4.00)
16
(Acceptance criterion is +/- 2.2 bar) = ___________ barg
Annulus Pressure
(Ambient pressure) = __________ barg
PESU reading = __________ mA

350
16
(Acceptance criterion is +/- 2.2 bar) = ___________ barg
4) Verify that reading for production temperature is correct by comparing it against a

calibrated mercury thermometer.
Mercury thermometer reading _________oC

(Calibrated thermometer to be accurate to +/-0.5 oC)
PESU reading = _________ mA
350
16
(Acceptance criterion is +/- 1.1 degrees C) = _________ oC
5) Switch on the DHPTT Simulator and set it to PANEX: 32 mA.

6) Send a number of DHPTT DATA REQUEST COMMANDS to SEM A until a DHPTT
DATA MESSAGE is received.
7) Select Range Option 1 on the DHPTT Simulator, wait 20 seconds for stabilisation and
send a DHPTT DATA REQUEST COMMAND to SEM A. Check that valid data is
received (i.e. the same frequencies as shown in the DHPTT simulator). Repeat for
Range Option 2.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Functional Tests using SEM A

Complete the following tests on the PUMV, then repeat them for the SCSSV1, PWV, AMV,
AWV, XOV, SIV and MIV.
Record the results of these tests in Table 11-a.
Note: The operation of the SCSSV1 will be simulated by

monitoring/manipulating a needle valve/gauge on the SCSSV1 at the tree
test base.
Take the opportunity to check the tree valve position indicators during these tests.
1) Check the displayed readings of LP supply and return volumes by sending an
ANALOG DATA REQUEST COMMAND. If the readings are not zero, transmit
commands to RESET the readings. Record that the readings have been reset in the
table.
2) Transmit a VALVE COMMAND to open the Production Tree valve specified in the
table.
3) Send a FUNCTION/STATUS REQUEST COMMAND to SEM A and check that the tree
gate valve is indicated in the OPEN position.
4) Obtain the displayed readings of LP supply and return volumes by sending an
ANALOG DATA REQUEST COMMAND and record readings in the table.
5) Check on the XT that the valve actuator has moved to the energised position. In the
case of the simulated SCSSV1 valve, check on the gauge on the hook-up line coming
from the tree test stump that the line has been energised.
6) Transmit RESET FLOW COUNTER COMMANDS to reset the LP supply and return
volumes.
7) Transmit a VALVE COMMAND to close the production tree valve.
8) Send a FUNCTION/STATUS REQUEST COMMAND to SEM A and check that the tree
gate valve is now indicated in the CLOSED position.
9) Obtain the displayed readings of LP supply and return volumes by sending an
ANALOG DATA REQUEST COMMAND and record readings in Table 11-a.
10) Check on the XT that the valve actuator has moved to the de-energised position. In the
case of the simulated SCSSV1 valve, check the needle valve/gauge on the tree test
base.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
TREE No: . . . . . . . . . SEM A FUNCTION TESTS
IUMV SCSSV1 IWV AMV AWV XOV

Reset LP Supply and
Return Flowmeters
Send Open Command to
SEM (Record Operating
Time)
LP Supply Flowmeter
Reading
Return Flowmeter
Reading
Check Screen for
Actuator on
Check Tree for Actuator
on
Check for visible signs of
leakage
Reset LP Supply and
Return Flowmeters
Send Close Command to
Time)
LP Supply Flowmeter
Reading
Check Screen for
Actuator Off
Check Tree for Actuator
Off
NAME SIGNATURE DATE
SERVICE COMPANY:
Eni-E & P.:
Table 11-a- Function Test of Production Valves (SEM A)

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11.3.5 Function Test using SEM B

Record the results of these tests in Table 11-b.
1) Set the PESU to operate SEM B. Transmit a VALVE COMMAND to open the PUMV
valve.
2) Send a FUNCTION/STATUS REQUEST COMMAND to SEM B and check that the
PUMV valve is indicated in the OPEN position.
3) Check on the tree that the PUMV valve actuator has moved to the energised position.
4) Transmit a VALVE COMMAND to open the SCSSV1 valve.
SCSSV1 valve is indicated in the OPEN position.
6) Check the gauge on the tree test base that the SCSSV1 line has been energised.
7) Transmit a VALVE COMMAND to open the PWV valve.
PWV valve is now indicated in the OPEN position.
9) Check on the tree that the PWV valve actuator has moved to the energised position.
10) Transmit a VALVE COMMAND to close the open PWV valve.
PWV valve is now indicated in the CLOSED position.
12) Check on the tree that the PWV valve actuator has moved to the de-energised
position.
13) Transmit a VALVE COMMAND to close the open PUMV valve.
PUMV valve is now indicated in the CLOSED position.
15) Check on the Tree that the PUMV valve actuator has moved to the de-energised
position.
16) Transmit a VALVE COMMAND to close the open SCSSV1 valve.
SCSSV1 valve is now indicated in the CLOSED position.
18) Check the gauge on the tree test base that the line has been de-energised.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
TREE No: . . . . . . . . . SEM B FUNCTION TESTS

Reset LP Supply and
Return Flowmeters
Time)
LP Supply Flowmeter
Reading
Return Flowmeter
Reading
Check Screen for
Actuator on
Check Tree for
Actuator on
Check for visible signs
of leakage
Reset LP Supply and
Return Flowmeters
Send Close Command
to SEM (Record
Operating Time)
LP Supply Flowmeter
Reading
Check Screen for
Actuator Off
Check Tree for
Actuator Off
NAME SIGNATURE DATE
SERVICE COMPANY:
Eni-E & P:
Table 11-b - Function Test of Production Valves (SEM B)

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Simulation of Level 1 Shutdown

1) Transmit VALVE COMMANDS to open all production and chemical injection valves.
2) Send a FUNCTION/STATUS REQUEST COMMAND to SEM A and check that all
valves are indicated in the open position.
3) Check that all valves on the tree are energised.
4) Simulate a Level 1 Shutdown by transmitting VALVE COMMANDS as follows:
CLOSE PWV
After 20sec CLOSE PUMV.
5) Confirm that the valves on the tree follow the same sequence. Send an FSR to verify.
Simulation of Level 2 Shutdown

3) Check that all valves on the Xmas tree are energised.
4) Simulate a Level 2 Shutdown by transmitting VALVE COMMAND as follows:
CLOSE PWV
After 5sec CLOSE AWV
After 5sec CLOSE AMV
After 5sec CLOSE CV
After 5sec CLOSE PUMV
After 5sec CLOSE SIV
After 5sec CLOSE MIV.
Simulation of Level 3 and Level 4 Shutdowns

3) Check that all valves on the XT are energised.
4) Simulate Level 3 and Level 4 Shutdowns by transmitting VALVE COMMANDS as
follows:
CLOSE PWV
After 5sec CLOSE AWV
After 5sec CLOSE AMV
After 5sec CLOSE CV
After 5sec CLOSE PUMV
After 5sec CLOSE SIV
After 5sec CLOSE MIV
After 5sec CLOSE SCSSV1.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11.3.6 Pressure Test Tree Valves

This section describes the procedure for pressure testing each side of every valve on the
tree. This activity should be performed according to the Manufacturers Operating Manual,
but with the tree connected to the tree test base and the tree cap and SCM installed. In all
cases, valve control will be affected from the PESU, and tests must be chart recorded.
The XT/Tree cap controls interfaces will have been previously tested; however, the
SCM/MMB interface should also be checked during these tests for leakage. This is
achieved by monitoring the flow of hydraulic fluid at the PESU.
Test the valves according to the sequence shown in Table 11-a and check off each
test performed on chart in
1) Table 11-d.
2) The SCSSV1 and tree AX test line manual isolation valves will be tested later when the
LRP/TRT are stacked on the tree.
3) When tests are complete, vent down the LP and HP supplies and power down the
SCM. Leave all functions vented.
Recheck SCM Operation

Re-test SCM functions against the blanked snaptite couplers at the top of the tree as follows:
1) Check that the PESU and hydraulic supplies are hooked up per section 11.3.4.
2) Check tree sensors also according to section 11.3.4.
Function Check
Production Pressure
Annulus Pressure
Production Temperature
DHPTT
3) Verify SCM valve functions using SEM A. As the LRP is installed to the top of the tree,
the tree valves will not function when operated through the SCM and PESU, however,
valve supply lines will be pressurised up to the tree receiver plate and the SCM will
give a 'pressurised' status for that line.
Check valve functions in the following order:
IUMV
SCSSV1
IWV
AMV
AWV
XOV.
Record the results in Table 11-e.

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Test No. 1 ISV & ASV From Above

Open valves: AMV, IUMV, ILMV
Monitor at: (Lines according to the Operating Manual)
Pressurise From: (Lines according to the Operating Manual)
(NOTE: Actual tree has left hand Injection bore)
Test No. 2 IUMV From Above, ISV & XOV From Below
Open valves: IWV, ILMV
Pressurise from: (Lines according to the Operating Manual)
Hold and continue with Test 2A
Test No. 2a ILMV From Above
Open valves: As Test No. 2, then open IUMV, close ILMV
Pressurise from: (Line according to the Operating Manual)
Test No. 3 IWV, AWV and XOV From Above
Open valves: AWV, IUMV, ILMV
Test No. 4 IUMV and AMV From Below
Open valves: AWV, XOV, ILMV
Test No. 5 IWV, ASV and AWV From Below
Open valves: IUMV, ILMV, AMV
Test No. 6 ILMV From Below

Open valves: IUMV, IWV
Test No. 7 AMV From Above
Open valves: AWV
Table 11-c - Valve Test Sequence

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Valve Above/ Test Pressure PESU LP Completed

Below Ref. Sensor Flow
Readings (ML leakage)
A 2A
ILMV B 6
A 2
IUMV B 4
A 3
IWV B 5
A 1
ISV B 2
A 7
AMV B 4
A 3
AWV B 5
A 1
ASV B 5
PROD 2
XOV ANN 3
Table 11-d - Valve Test Check List
4) Proceed as follows for the PUMV:

a) Check the displayed readings of the LP supply and return volumes by sending an
ANALOG DATA REQUEST COMMAND. If the readings are not zero, transmit
commands to RESET the readings. Record that the readings have been reset in
the table.
b) Transmit a VALVE COMMAND to open the Production Tree valve specified in
the table.
c) Send a FUNCTION/STATUS REQUEST COMMAND to SEM A and check that
the tree gate valve is indicated in the OPEN position.
Obtain the displayed readings of LP supply and return volumes by sending an
ANALOG DATA REQUEST COMMAND and record the readings in the
d) Table 11-e.
Note: The readings will not be representative as the tree cap is not fitted.
e) Transmit RESET FLOW COUNTER COMMANDS to reset the LP supply and

return volumes.
f) Transmit a VALVE COMMAND to close the Production Tree valve.
g) Send a FUNCTION/STATUS REQUEST COMMAND to SEM A and check that
the tree gate valve is now indicated in the CLOSED position.
h) Obtain the displayed readings of LP Supply and Return Volumes by sending an
ANALOG DATA REQUEST COMMAND and record readings in Table 11-e.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5) Repeat for the remaining valves.

6) Repeat step 4 above using SEM B, similarly tabulating results in Table.
7) At the end of the tests, power down the SCM, both electrically and hydraulically.
TREE No: . . . . . . . . . SEM A
Reset LP Supply and

Return Flowmeters

Time)
LP Supply Flowmeter
Reading
Return Flowmeter
Reading
Check Screen for

Actuator on

of leakage
Reset LP Supply and

Return Flowmeters

SEM
(Record Operating Time)
LP Supply Flowmeter
Reading
Return Flowmeter
Reading
Check Screen for

Actuator Off
Table 11-e - Functional Test of SCM (SEM A)

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
TREE No: . . . . . . . . . SEM B

Reset LP Supply and
Return Flowmeters

Time)
LP Supply Flowmeter
Reading
Return Flowmeter
Reading
Check Screen for

Actuator on

of leakage
Reset LP Supply and

Return Flowmeters

SEM
(Record Operating Time)
LP Supply Flowmeter
Reading
Return Flowmeter
Reading
Check Screen for

Actuator Off
Table 11-f - Functional Test of SCM (SEM B)
8) Repeat for the remaining valves.

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11.4 RUNNING THE SUBSEA XMAS TREE

Ensure all pre-deployment testing in accordance to the guidelines in 11.1.9 and the specific
Operations Manuals has been fully completed.
1) If the hanger orientation or verification tool is a post BOP removal type, run the tool
and check the hanger. This tool is also sometimes used to jet out above the hanger
prior to running the tree.
2) Ensure the rig is positioned over the safe deployment area (at least 50 ft away from
any wellhead).
3) Move the tree/LRP/TRT assembly directly under the rotary table on the moonpool
trolley, ensuring the proper orientation of the assembly to the guidewires and, hence,
the permanent guidebase.
4) Lower the riser adapter and stress joint through the rotary table and make up to the
TRT.
5) Connect up the main umbilical and sheaves hanging them from a pre-selected fixing
point.
6) Activate the tree connector unlock and release it from the stump. Lock pressure in
other connectors as necessary per the Operations Manual. Pick up the complete
assembly and install the guidewires. Remove the stump and moonpool trolley.
7) Lower the riser through the rotary and land off on the riser spider. Pressure test the
riser adapter by applying pressure through the riser bores via the test sub against the
LRP valves.
8) Remove the test sub and open the tree bore and LRP valves. Lock them open at the
umbilical reel then disconnect the jumper umbilical.
9) Proceed and run the tree on riser sections clamping the umbilical to the riser below the
rig floor over the safe deployment area.
10) Land the upper tension joint on the spider which will position the tree +/-30ft above the
wellhead. Install the surface tree and lift frame, long bails or strops.
11) Pull off enough umbilical for landing off the tree and reconnect the jumper hose.
12) On the compensator, lower the riser until the tree is approx. 10ft above the wellhead.
Pressure test the surface tree and riser against the LRP valves.
13) Open all the tree bore valves and LRP valves, move the rig over the well and gently
lower and soft land the tree on the wellhead.
14) Lock the tree connector to the wellhead and observe the indicator by ROV.
15) Conduct an overpull to confirm the connector is properly engaged. Transfer the riser
weight to the tensioners and maintain a top tension as per the figures from the
Operations Manual.
16) Pressure test all seals and function test as per the Operations Manual.
17) Function all tree hydraulic valves to check for proper operation confirmed by the ROV.
11.4.1 Unplugging The Well

1) Rig up wireline and pressure test.
2) Run and pull the wireline plugs.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11.4.2 Perforating And Well clean-Up

The normal shut-in and flow will be performed through the surface tree while the gate valve
on the lower master is designed to cut wireline and coiled tubing in the case of an
emergency.
To create an underbalance and conduct the well clean up, refer to the completion section 12.
1) Initiate perforating operations.
2) Bring the well onstream through the surface well test package and clean the well up
testing the DHPTT.
3) Close in the well at surface.
4) Install wireline plugs for temporary suspension and commissioning activities on the tree
and flowlines.
11.5 PULLING THE LRP

1) After installing the wireline plugs, bleed off pressure in the production bore and inflow
test the plugs. Close the tree swab and upper master valve. Close the lower master by
ROV.
2) Check the valves are closed by ROV camera.
3) Displace the riser to seawater and close the LRP XOV.
4) Set down weight (Refer to the Operating Manual) and unlock the LRP connector.
5) Pick up the LRP from the tree and rig down the surface tree and surface riser joint.
6) Pull the riser.
7) When the LRP reaches surface with the stress joint through the rotary table, move the
LRP stump below the LRP on the BOP transfer trolley.
8) Lower the LRP onto the stump and lock using a hotline if necessary.
9) Disconnect the stress joint and pull to the drill floor.
10) Move the LRP/tree running tool to the storage/work area.
11.5.1 Disconnect The LRP And Tree Running Tool

1) Disconnect all control jumpers and umbilicals.
2) Attach the TRT lift cap to the TRT mandrel.
3) Unlock the TRT from the LRP and pick up the TRT from the LRP.
4) Set the TRT on its storage frame.
5) Attach the cap to the LRP.
6) Disconnect all control jumpers and umbilicals.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
11.6 DEPLOYMENT OF THE TREE CAP

1) Rig up the THOJ/tree cap umbilical reeler to the WOCS and connect to the tree cap
running tool.
2) The TCRT will be connected to the tree cap ready for deployment.
3) Move the TCRT/cap to below the rotary table on the BOP transport trolley.
4) Run drillpipe through the rotary table and connect to the IF sub on the TCRT.
5) Install the guidelines and pick up the TCRT/tree cap and remove the trolley.
6) Run the cap to depth on drillpipe and on the compensator land the tree cap onto the
tree.
7) Conduct all integrity tests to ensure the cap is properly installed including a pull test.
8) Unlatch the TCRT from the tree cap and retrieve to surface.
9) Rig down the TCRT onto the BOP trolley and move to the storage area.
10) Rig down the control system.
11.7 DEPLOYMENT AFTER COMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES

Repeat procedures above in reverse for the removal of the tree cap, reconnection of the
riser system for wireline plug removal and bringing the well into production.
figure 11-3 - Cooper Subsea Xmas Tree on WS II Wellhead

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
12. WELL UNLOADING
Following the successful completing of a well, it will normally have been left with the
completion fluid left in both the tubing and annulus. To enable the well to produce under
natural flow conditions (i.e. non artificial lift) the overbalance pressure exerted by the
completion fluid must be removed, sometimes referred to as unloading. The well may be
brought onstream direct into the production facility but is often tested with a well test
package to be cleaned up prior to placing it on production (this is normal practice for subsea
completions where the production of the well straight into the subsea flowline system without
cleaning up may plug and perhaps damage the facilities).
If losses have occurred during the drilling and completion phases, the hydrostatic pressure in
the tubing needs to be reduced to such an extent that the replenishing losses flowing back
into the wellbore does not kill the well again. It is normal practice to circulate an
underbalanced fluid into the tubing using a circulating device or coiled tubing service, which
will provide sufficient underbalance to enable the well to flow under the conditions stated.
The fluid used is usually selected to provide as large drawdown as possible at low cost.
Under some circumstances, an underbalance can be achieved by simply bullheading a
lighter fluid into the tubing relying on produced gas to maintain the underbalance during
flowback. This is a cost effective method if bullheading is acceptable for a particular
formation.
The fluids normally used may be water, base oil, diesel or nitrogen. Nitrogen can be
circulated by deploying the coiled tubing and continuously gas lifting the well until natural
flow is established. It may also be installed like the other fluids by pumping it into the tubing
taking returns through a circulating device and out of the annulus. The depth to which the
underbalance fluid is circulated depends upon the drawdown which can be achieved.
Continuous gas lifting a well is preferred if there has been large losses otherwise the
circulation process may have to be repeated more than once causing higher costs, this
needs to be evaluated.
The procedures for circulation are given in this section. The procedures for nitrogen lifting
are given in section 14 and coiled tubing procedures in section 13.
12.1 UNLOADING BY CIRCULATION

It is assumed that any suspension plugs in the well above the circulation device have been
removed and that the completion fluid occupies the tubing. It may be prudent to leave or
install a plug or standing valve in the packer tailpipe to prevent losses during this procedure.
If it is planned to place the maximum amount of fluid in the well to obtain the highest
drawdown, ensure that it is not over-displaced into the annulus.
1) Rig up wireline in accordance to the procedures in the Company General Wireline
Procedures Manual (STAP-P-1-M-7110).
2) Rig up the circulating pump to the Xmas tree kill wing and pressure test to 1,000psi
above the maximum anticipated wellhead pressure or to WP.
3) Rig up a return line from the annulus to a returns tank of sufficient capacity. Pressure
test these lines against the side outlet valves with a pump.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4) Pressure test the wireline lubricator to a minimum of 1,000psi above the maximum
anticipated wellhead pressure or to WP.
5) Install the circulating device opening or shifting tool. If using a SPM, install the SPM
dummy valve pulling tool.
6) Run in the hole and open the circulating device. There should be no differential
pressure across the device as there is completion fluid on both sides.
7) Confirm the circulation path is open by pumping up on the tubing and observing
pressure on the annulus.
8) Pull out of the hole. With some particular SSDs, it is sometimes possible to run two
tools in one run to open and close the sleeve in one trip (positioning it below the SSD
during circulation).
9) If a SPM is being used, run and install a circulating valve in the pocket and pull out of
the hole.
10) With the return system from the annulus open, begin to pump the underbalance into
the tubing monitoring the volume pumped and the volume of returns from the annulus.
11) Continue pumping until the calculated amount of fluid has been pumped. Check that
the surface U tube pressure is correct for the volume of underbalance fluid pumped
according to calculation and hold this pressure on the pump.
12) Run in the hole and close the circulating device. In the case of a SPM, reinstall the
dummy valve. Confirm closure by pressuring up on the annulus and observing no
pressure on the tubing or any significant volume is pumped.
14) Rig up, run in the hole and pull the packer tailpipe plug or standing valve, if used.
15) Rig down wireline and the pump lines.
16) Ensure the production flowline is lined up to flow to the production facilities and that the
production operators are informed that the well will produce back through their
facilities.
17) Open the production wing valve.
18) Gradually open the production choke to flow the well.
19) Monitor the wellhead pressure, slowly opening the choke as it is assured that the well
is successfully unloading.
20) Continue until the well has stable flowing conditions at a reasonably high rate
(reservoir engineering will provide the flow parameters).
12.2 UNLOADING BY BULLHEADING

If bullheading and if reservoir conditions allow, the following procedure could be used.
1) Rig up the pump to the Xmas tree kill wing and pressure test to 1,000psi above the
maximum anticipated wellhead pressure or to WP.
2) Open the kill wing and with the pump lined up to the supply of underbalance fluid,
(liquid or nitrogen) begin displacing the tubing. Never pump at a pressure to exceed
bottomhole fracture pressure. Monitor that the pressure trend is consistent.
3) When the calculated volume has been pumped, shut down the pump and record the
static surface pressure confirming the correct amount of fluid has been pumped.
4) Close the kill wing valve.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
5) Ensure the production flowline is lined up to flow to the production facilities and that the
production operators are informed that the well will produce back through their
facilities.
6) Open the production wing valve.
7) Gradually open the production choke to flow the well.
8) Monitor the wellhead pressure, slowly opening the choke as it is assured that the well
is successfully unloading.
9) Continue until the well has stable flowing conditions at a reasonably high rate
(reservoir engineering will provide the flow parameters).
12.3 UNLOADING BY COILED TUBING

Refer to section 13.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
13. COILED TUBING OPERATIONS
13.1 PREPARATION
Coiled tubing (C/T) operations will not be allowed to commence without an approved work
programme.
The Completions and Workover Superintendent will confirm that the well to be worked on is
available and accessible. Should the rig be required, then he will confirm its availability and
the manning requirements.
A pre-job meeting should be held well in advance of the actual operation. The purpose of
this meeting is to:
Discuss the programme of operations.
Establish channels of communication and define responsibilities.
Discuss any special requirements or circumstances that may arise, e.g.
procedures in the case of emergency, adverse weather conditions, ID of string
components versus tool OD, escape of hazardous treatment fluids, etc.
Additional topics will be discussed as required and may include working in
confined spaces, working with pressurised equipment, handling of heavy
equipment, etc.
Make sure a completion diagram of the well is available. This should include the location of
casing, tubing shoe, packers, perforations, etc., as well as KOP and maximum angle of
deviation. A brief written outline of previous relevant well operations should be given to the
coiled tubing supervisor.
The Completions and Workover Superintendent will ensure that all relevant equipment and
materials for the job are on site in a timely manner.
13.2 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Safety during C/T operations, in common with most operations in a potentially dangerous
environment, is largely dependent on sound operating procedures and effective
communication. The following points are, essentially, common sense and should be
observed during all phases of the operation:
Keep well clear of the tubing at all times.
Tubing can part due to excess pressure and tubing wear. Beware of the physical
damage due to thrashing pipe, as well as spraying treatment fluids.
If the tubing becomes stuck and excessive pressure and pull are to be applied,
clear the area as required. Make an announcement over the PA system to
inform personnel.
Do not stand near treating lines, pumps, tanks, reel, injector, or under the tubing.
There should be no overhead lifts across or near the tubing.
Safety harnesses will be used when operating above ground level. This includes
working on top of the reel and injector as well as in the derrick.
When treating the well with hazardous chemicals the relevant safety wear must
be worn by all personnel in the work area (Refer to section 15.5.2.1).
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Before rigging up coiled tubing, a safety meeting will be held with all relevant
personnel. The topics to be covered will include, but are not be limited to:
a) Working with pressurised equipment
b) Handling of heavy equipment
c) Use of hazardous chemicals
d) Safe working areas
e) Emergency procedures
f) Protective clothing
g) etc.
Communication with the operator in the C/T control cabin, the drill floor/skid deck
and the control room will be maintained throughout the operation.
All personnel should be aware of the Emergency Procedures for C/T operations.
13.2.1 Tubing
The coiled tubing should be treated like a pressure vessel. While operating or pressure
testing it will contain several cubic meters of gas, fluid, or energised fluid. Unlike a pressure
vessel however, it undergoes considerable stress during running and also suffers from both
internal and external corrosion. Therefore, ensure that the reel carries a full and up-to-date
operational history, which should include the following information:
The cycle history of the whole reel length (one cycle being a run in followed by
the run out).
The treatment history, i.e. what fluids have passed through the reel.
The well conditions. What fluids and gases were in the well being treated, e.g.
H2S, Acid.
The condition of welds or joins in the reel, i.e. are they original, are X-rays
available of the welds, etc.
The records showing when the last non-destructive test of the full reel length was
performed.
13.2.2 Risers and BOPs

As the riser and BOPs are, in effect, a pressure vessel situated above the Xmas tree,
subjected to the wellhead shut in pressure and test pressures, it is essential that the seals
are regularly checked and that they are pressure tested every time the BOPs are broken out
for tool recovery etc.
1) When pulling coiled tubing tools into the riser, it should be at the slowest possible
speed to be selected.
2) The riser must be depressurised and any gas/fluids bled off via the choke to the test
separator. The toolstring must be pulled up against the BOPs, prior to breaking out
the BOP connection.
3) After the riser has been depressurised, the riser, or BOP bleed off needle valve must
be opened to verify that all pressure and fluids have been vented, prior to breaking the
BOP connection to remove the tool string.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4) After de-pressuring the Xmas tree and riser but before the BOP is broken out, the
swab valve must be closed. This is to prevent any possible hazardous condition
arising due to the inadvertent opening of a wing valve, or flow from a leaking master
valve.
13.2.3 H2S Considerations

When working on wells which are known H2S producers, or those in which H2S is
anticipated, ensure that hydrogen sulphide detectors and portable breathing apparatus sets
are available and on site (see Well Control Policy Manual STAP-P-1-M-6150).
Safety aspects of well operations in the presence of H2S must be addressed in the pre-job
safety meeting. This applies to all wells where the presence of H2S is known or anticipated.
When H2S bearing wells are to be entered for C/T workover purposes, the Xmas tree is to
be flushed with water/glycol to remove all traces of H2S prior to rigging up on the well. All
personnel involved in these operations will wear automatic H2S detectors and be equipped
with self contained breathing apparatus.
13.3 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
Note: All permits will be issued in accordance with the Permit to Work System.
1) No operations can begin without the relevant work permits.

2) Obtaining and distribution of the permits is the responsibility if the Contractors
Representative.
3) All permits will be revalidated at the end of each shift.
Note: Permits may not be valid for 12 hours on crew change days.
4) Obtain the relevant Permits to Work in accordance to the PTW system.

5) The Contractor Representative will ensure that all relevant work permits have been
signed and distributed, and inform the Well Operations Supervisor that this has been
done.
6) The Area Authorities/Safety Officer may, if required, make an inspection to ensure that
there is no other work going on which may affect the operation.
7) The Well Operations Supervisor will confirm the well status and accept the well
handover certificate from the Production Supervisor.
8) Certain operations may require lifting of heavy equipment over live wells. Wherever
possible this will be avoided. If circumstances make the lift unavoidable, then the
Production Supervisor will be informed. He will decide if any live well needs to be shut
in and if scaffolding of other protective structure needs to be erected.
9) Only equipment with valid test certificates will be used for rigging up and during the
operation.
10) All well control equipment must have current certification of conformity issued by the
certifying authority.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
13.4 RIG UP PROCEDURES

13.4.1 Equipment Preparation and Siting
1) Ensure that the equipment has been visually checked for defects prior to starting rig-
up.
2) If time allows, a permit should be obtained and the equipment run and tested, prior to
the commencement of the operation, to check equipment function and confirm the
operation of the shut down systems on the power pack.
3) The Well Operations Supervisor should ensure that:
The work area is suitably guarded (e.g. safety barriers, safety signs, etc.).
Any scaffolding is secure, safe and properly certified.
The crane operator and roustabouts are aware of the equipment weights and
hazards (e.g. liquid nitrogen or acid, etc.).
All lifts should have tag lines attached.
13.4.2 Coiled Tubing Rig-Up
Note: The C/T unit will be function tested on the deck prior to it being made up
in the well.
Note: It is Company policy to run a remote hydraulic control shear seal BOP at
the bottom of the riser immediately above the tree.
Refer to figure 13-1 General rig up arrangement.

1) Confirm that the tree has been de-pressurised and the controls have been isolated
from the main control system.
2) Take control of the well from Production Department.
3) Remove the swab cap and inspect the thread and seal areas.
4) Run the riser (with the shear seal BOP at the bottom) onto the tree and pressure test
with water to 500 psi above the maximum anticipated surface pressure or to the
maximum test pressure of 5,000 psi, whichever is lower. Do not exceed the
maximum allowable tree rating.
5) Position the tubing reel and power pack so that the coiled tubing has an unrestricted
path to the injector head.
6) Move the BOP assembly onto the rig floor or skid deck, make up to riser and pressure
test. Function test the BOP with both panels, fill up the riser and BOP with glycol/water,
close the blind rams and pressure test the riser, return lines and blind rams to 500psi
above the maximum anticipated surface pressure, or to the maximum test pressure of
5,000psi, whichever is lower.
7) Clamp the coiled tubing at the reel using a certified clamp but not molegrips or other
similar tools.
8) The injector head may be rigged up and the tubing stabbed through the injector head
on the catwalk or drill floor depending on space available.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
9) When picking up the injector head, use tugger lines to keep the assembly vertical.
Tugger lines must not be attached to the injector body, as this will interfere with the
weight indicator readings.
10) Fill the reel with water. The reel should be flushed with water and pigged with a no-go
prior to running packers and other sensitive tools to gauge reel volume, ensure that
there are no restrictions to the ID of the coil and to purge any debris form the tubing.
Make-up and fit the end connector and test sub. Test reel to full test pressure and
perform pull test before stabbing on to BOP.
11) Attach the C/T BHA, and stab the injector onto the BOP.
12) The assembly will be pressure tested with the BHA across the BOP.
13.4.3 Pressure Testing

Pressure testing of the coiled tubing assembly, which includes the BOPs, tubing, treating
lines and the pump, should be carried out in a logical sequence to eliminate all possible
leaks.
1) The Blind Rams and Riser will have already been tested while rigging up the BOPs,
therefore it is certain the BOP to riser seal, riser to tree seal, swab valve, BOP kill wing
valve and blind rams have pressure integrity.
2) If using an in-line tubing connector, the Stripper/Packer and Toolstring will be tested
with the tools across the BOP and the straight bar in the energised stripper. With the
whole system full of water, pressure is applied from the pump in stages of 500psi up to
a maximum of 5,000psi. The pump and treating lines up to the reel will have been
tested already. Do not exceed the maximum allowable tree rating.
3) If using an outline tubing connector, the Stripper/Packer and Toolstring will be tested
with the tools below the BOP. With the whole system full of water, pressure is applied
through the tubing in stages of 500psi up to a maximum of 5,000psi, to prevent
collapse of the tubing.
4) The Pipe Rams are now tested by closing the pipe rams and bleeding the pressure
down to zero via the circulating port on the BOP. Once the test is complete, close the
circulating port and equalise the pressure across the pipe rams.
5) The Check Valves in the toolstring are now checked using the pressure already in the
system. With the straight bar still across the still energised stripper, bleed down the
pressure at the reel. The check valves should seal, and pressure will remain in the
riser and BOPs while the reel pressure is zero. When bleeding down reel pressure,
ensure external pressure does not exceed the collapse pressure rating of the reel.
6) Alternatively, bleed down the whole system at the BOPs and with the reel valve open,
using the cement or pressure test pump, pressure test check valves via a pump-in tee
below the BOPs while stripper is energised.
7) The BOPs should be bled down after the testing is completed.
Goose Neck
Eni S.p.A.
E&P Division
S P E O
Injector Head
Hydraulic Hose
Stripper/Stuffing
Box
Quad BOP's
STAP-P-1-M-7120
Lubricator/Riser
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Control Cab Coiled Tubing Reel Power Skid

0 1
figure 13-1 - General C/T Rig Up Arrangement

Wellhead Combination BOP's
PAG
Wellhead
165
OF
REVISION
269
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
13.4.4 Treating Lines

On all C/T operations, treating lines should be rigged-up using certified Weco
union Fig 1502 integral type.
Any bent lines or damaged unions will be marked, registered as unfit for use and
returned to base.
Ensure that the lines are tied with safety cables and attached at regular intervals
to secure fixing points.
Ensure that check valves are used on wellheads, reels and each pump.
Ensure that a certified relief valve is installed in the surface line circuitry. The
relief valve setting is to be confirmed between the Company and Contractor
Representative prior to equipment load out.
All valves should be tested from the well side including the last valve on the reel.
13.4.5 Injector Frame

An injector frame is used to steady and position an injector when operated rigless. It may
also be used when operating through the rig although this is not recommended as it serves
no purpose and requires additional rig-up time.
On floaters a special lifting frame or extra long bails should be attached to the block to the
surface tree to maintain tension through the compensation system. The injector is then
installed inside the lift frame or bails. This enhances the safety of personnel and enables
easy rig up of the injector head on a heaving rig.
The injector frame is not designed to withstand the weight of the injector and the weight of
the coiled tubing in the hole. This combined weight, which can be in the region of 20 tonnes,
is carried by the wellhead. The purpose of the frame is only to ensure lateral stability.
Most frames have hydraulic height adjustment and should include hydraulic compensation
systems to allow for any vertical movement of the wellhead in relation to the deck.
The frame should be pegged to the injector and tied back at the four top corners using
certified chains and come-alongs, to secure fastening points on the deck.
The injector should remain connected to the crane or overhead gantry crane during the
operation to add stability to the structure and to facilitate rapid removal of the injector during
rig down. Due to possible contraction of the riser due to well cooling, no tension
should be applied to crane sling during operations.
13.4.6 Rigging Down

To rig down:
1) Pull out of the hole until the tubing end connector tags the stripper. Use no more than
4,000lbs overpull.
2) Close off the well isolation valve.
3) Bleed off pressure in the coiled tubing and surface lines through the closed line drain in
case of any hydrocarbon discharge.
4) Rig down the coiled tubing and associated equipment.
5) Ensure all equipment is stowed safely for transport.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
13.5 RUNNING PROCEDURES

The following procedures are guidelines, the actual toolstring configuration, running speeds
and operating procedures will vary depending on the work being performed.
1) The basic toolstring configuration for conventional circulation operations is, from the
bottom up:
Circulating nozzle
Two check or flapper valves
Straight bar
Tubing connector.
2) Refer to the toolstring configuration in the well programme for specific operations.
3) The weight indicator must be tested before running coiled tubing in to a well.
4) Ensure the mechanical and electronic depth counters are set to zero at the appropriate
zero datum reference.
5) Standard running speed should be 50ft/min, running or pulling through unobstructed
tubing, slowing to 15ft/min within 50ft either side of obstructions.
6) Running speeds will be reduced when running through the riser, Xmas tree, SCSSV
and any other downhole restrictions.
7) Ensure that the tubing internal pressure is maintained at all times by pumping. On
specifically sanctioned operations, a differential of 1,000psi will be allowed across the
tubing.
8) At any indication of the tubing hanging up, pull up well above hang up depth and liaise
with the Company representative before taking further steps.
9) Particular care must be exercised when pulling the assembly out through the SCSSV
and the Xmas tree and into the lubricator.
10) The C/T contractor will provide plots of pipe weight, pipe loading and buckling stress
against depth for the particular job to be performed. Any significant deviations from
these plots during the operation must be investigated.
11) Pulling weight tests/checks should be performed every 1,000ft regularly during running
in.
13.6 OPERATING PROCEDURES

13.6.1 Gas Lifting
Gas lifting may be required to kick-off a well, which contains a kill fluid, in low pressure
producers when production has been temporarily halted. It is also used to remove a dead
column of fluid from closed tubing. Each specific condition requires an exact programme,
however the basic procedure still applies.
When kicking off a well containing a kill fluid follow the basic procedure in this section. Allow
sufficient nitrogen to remove any kill fluid that may have entered the formation during the kill
operation. As a rule, do not use excessive pump rates because this will lead to high annulus
o
friction and nitrogen may be lost to the formation. In wells exceeding 40 deviation nitrogen
slippage is likely to occur. You should allow sufficient nitrogen to compensate for this
slippage.
When restoring production in low pressure wells that have been temporarily shut in, use low
nitrogen rates and only run to a maximum of 50% of well depth. These wells only require
encouragement until water cut has been reduced and temperature has risen.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
When removing a fixed dead column of fluid from a well, as when creating a nitrogen
cushion prior to DST or TCP, follow the main procedure, except that the well will not flow and
dry gas should be produced at surface.
The procedures in this section are guidelines only, specific operational programmes will be
issued by the Company.
Safety
A safety meeting will be held with all relevant personnel prior to any job. The meeting will
address the hazards inherent with handling liquid nitrogen (Refer to section 14.2). The
meeting will also address the actions to be taken in the event of an emergency.
Procedures
1) Rig up and test the coiled tubing (Refer to section 13.4)
2) The nitrogen tanks, converter and pumping unit should be positioned close to the
tubing reel in order to minimise the length of pressurised lines.
3) Reduce the test separator pressure according to the coiled tubing contractors
procedures, and line up the well to the test separator.
4) Allow any gas cap on the well to vent off through the test separator.
5) Confirm that the tree and SCSSV controls have been isolated from the main control
system.
6) Equalise pressure across the swab valve then open.
7) Run in the well carefully, stopping to establish nitrogen injection at a low rate,
increasing the rate slowly as the coiled tubing is further run in.
If the well begins to slug nitrogen, reduce the injection rate
Shut down the nitrogen unit at the first indication of any rapid build up in wellhead
pressure.
8) Once the tubing has reached the predetermined depth, stop running in and continue
pumping nitrogen until nearly all the nitrogen is pumped, or the well is flowing strongly.
Note: Pull the tubing out of the well before the nitrogen supply is completely
exhausted. This is to ensure that the pressure differential across the
tubing wall does not exceed 1,000psi.
9) Rig down and hand the well over to the Production Department.
10) The following data will be recorded throughout the nitrogen lift operation:
Wellhead flowing pressure
Nitrogen injection pressure
Nitrogen injection rate
Wellhead flowing temperature
Separator level
Separator pressure
Separator temperature.
11) Fluid samples will be taken from the flow line sample point by the Well Operations
Supervisor.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
13.6.2 Well Treatment

Well treatments can be performed using various acid and solvent formulations to improve
production or injection rates. Coiled tubing is often used to perform well treatments,
because it allows for the direct application of the treatment to the zone or area requiring
treatment.
The main types of treatment are as follows:
Removal of scale from well tubulars and SCSSV
Matrix acidisation of the formation
Well bore clean-up using solvents and or acid.
Scale removal can be achieved by circulating acid across the area requiring treatment.
Note: Much of the acid may remain unspent and that this may have an effect on
surface flowlines and production equipment. Specific formulations may
be recommended by the contractor to remove sulphate scale, and scale
containing hydrocarbons.
Matrix acidisation of the formation can take the form of a small acid wash injected from the
coiled tubing directly to the zone requiring treatment, or for larger treatments, with the coiled
tubing being used to circulate the acid to fill the tubing prior to direct high rate injection from
surface. If leaving the coiled tubing in the well ensure that it is sufficiently inhibited and that
the internal pressure of the C/T remains equal to or above the external pressure.
Well bore clean-ups are performed to remove scale, debris and waxes from the perforation
tunnels. They are not intended to penetrate the formation, which could lead to additional
damage. The treatment is applied by jetting the treatment fluid into the perforations while
slowly cycling the nozzle across the perforations. The treatment is performed with the well
balanced or slightly underbalanced to prevent treatment fluid penetration.
Safety
Prior to rigging up the acid equipment a safety meeting will be held with all relevant
personnel (Refer to section 15.5.2). The meeting will address the hazards inherent with
handling acids, particularly under pressure. The meeting will also address the actions to be
taken in the event of an emergency.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Procedure
The following details the basic procedures to be followed when performing acid treatments
through coiled tubing:
1) Rig up and test coiled tubing (Refer to section 13.4).
2) Suggested BHA is, from the bottom up:
Jetting nozzle
2 dart type check valves
6ft straight bar
Tubing connector.
3) Confirm that the tree and SCSSV controls have been isolated from the main control
system.
4) Pig the reel to determine accurate reel volume.
5) Equalise pressure across the swab valve then open.
6) Run in the well carefully, circulating at minimum rate. Perform regular pull tests/checks
at 1,000 ft intervals.
7) Once the area to be treated has been reached, pump treated injection quality seawater
in order to establish the circulating pressure.
8) If an acid wash or solvent treatment is to be performed then:
Circulate the coiled tubing to treatment fluid
Jet the area to be treated while reciprocating the coiled tubing slowly
Circulate the tubing to injection quality seawater
Pull out of the hole.
9) If matrix acidising is to be performed the treatment formulation and volume will be

advised in a separate programme. However the basic procedure is:
Circulate the treatment fluid into the well at the maximum rate.
Pull the tubing assembly above the acid and inject at a high rate via the tubing
and the tubing annulus simultaneously. (Alternatively the coiled tubing can be
pulled out of the well before injecting the acid.)
Pull out of the hole and if required flow the well with nitrogen.
Inhibition
It is essential that a sufficient quantity of inhibitor is used in the acid system. If a mutual
solvent is being used, the inhibitor content must be doubled due to the detrimental effect that
the solvent has on inhibitor efficiency.
A slug (5-10bbl), with 5% inhibitor in injection quality seawater, should be circulated ahead of
the acid treatment. This will give protection to both the inside and outside of the tubing.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
13.6.3 Sand Cleanout

General
1) It may be necessary to clean out sand fill from a well to provide a sufficient sump for
production logging, additional perforating and to exposed covered perforations. Sand
clean out is best carried out using C/T. The clean out is carried out by running the
1
tubing and pumping viscous fluid (gel) to lift the sand from the sump; 1 /4 is the
minimum size CT OD which should be used to carry out clean up jobs.
2) The clean-out operation may be carried out with the well flowing to assist the return of
sand to the surface. This is especially useful when the well is highly deviated, has a
large bore production string or when the well is unable to support a column of gelled
seawater without incurring losses.
3) It is essential to keep circulating when there is a sand column in the production tubing.
This is especially important when the well is not flowing, otherwise the C/T will become
surrounded in sand and stuck.
Safety
Prior to rigging up the coiled tubing and circulating equipment a safety meeting will be held
with all relevant personnel. The meeting will address the hazards of handling chemicals and
use of pressurised equipment. The meeting will also address the actions to be taken in the
event of an emergency.
Procedure
1) Ensure that the well is lined up to take returns to the test separator.
Note: The separator should be sand washed prior to the operation.
2) A sample point will be installed in the return line.

3) Rig up and test the coiled tubing (Refer to section 13.4).
4) Suggested BHA is, from the bottom up:
Jetting Nozzle
2 dart type check valves
6ft straight bar
Tubing connector.
5) The required gel system should be prepared in a mixing tank and transferred to a
holding tank containing agitators once it is fully hydrated.
6) Confirm that the Xmas Tree and SCSSV controls have been isolated from the main
control system.
7) Equalise pressure across the swab valve then open it.
8) Begin running in carefully with the well producing at a reduced rate. Keep the tubing
string filled full of treated sea water by circulating at the minimum rate. Carry out
regular pull tests/checks at 1,000ft intervals.
9) Once the string is below the SCSSV, increase the production rate to its normal level.
10) Break circulation when well above the last recorded hold up depth and establish a
minimum circulation rate while pumping gel.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Note: Monitor the pump pressure, wellhead pressure and coiled tubing string
weight continuously throughout the operation. If there are any
indications of problems, pull back above the last hold up depth
immediately and evaluate the situation.
11) Run in slowly to the top of the fill, stopping to note the hanging weight. Slow down
when the weight begins to drop off the tubing and flag pipe at surface as a reference.
The tubing must be kept in tension at all times.
12) After penetrating 20ft, pick-up to the tubing shoe then run back in to repeat the
process in stages of 20ft, pumping continuously.
13) Having reached the required depth, continue to pump gel while reciprocating the tubing
back to the tubing shoe twice. Carefully monitor fluctuations in pick-up weights. If an
increase is seen, wash back until weight corresponds with the initial running weight.
14) Pull up above the perforations and displace the tubing to treated seawater.
15) Pull out with the well flowing to ensure that all sand moving up as the tubing is
removed.
16) Rig down and hand control of the well back to Production.
17) Sand wash the test separator and record the volume of sand removed.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
14. NITROGEN PROCEDURES
The use of nitrogen is potentially hazardous and many precautions need to be taken to
obtain a successful safe operation.
14.1 PREPARATION
1) No nitrogen operations will be allowed to commence without an approved work
programme.
2) The Completions and Workover Superintendent will confirm that the well to be treated
is available and accessible. Should the rig be required then he will confirm its
availability and the manning requirements.
3) A pre-job meeting should be held well in advance of the actual operation. The purpose
of this meeting is to:
Establish channels of communication, and define responsibilities.
To discuss any special requirements or circumstances that may arise, e.g.
procedures in the case of emergency, adverse weather conditions, safety data
sheets, escape of gaseous or liquid nitrogen or energised fluids, etc.
Additional topics will be discussed as required, and may include working in
confined spaces, working with energised fluid, extreme low temperatures,
handling of heavy equipment etc.
4) A brief written outline of previous relevant well treatments should be given to the
stimulation supervisor, or nitrogen operator.

Safety during a nitrogen operation, in common with most operations in a potentially
dangerous environment, is largely dependent on sound operating procedures and effective
communication. The following points are essentially common sense and should be observed
during all phases of the operation.
Do not stand near treating lines, cryogenic hoses, nitrogen converters/pumps,
liquid nitrogen tanks, or any other treating equipment during operations.
There should be no overhead lifts across or near the liquid nitrogen tanks,
treating lines or nitrogen converters/pumps.
working on top of the liquid nitrogen tanks, as well as in the derrick.
When treating the well with hazardous chemicals in conjunction with nitrogen
refer to the Stimulation Section regarding the wearing of additional safety wear.
Before rigging up treating equipment a safety meeting will be held with all
relevant personnel. The topics to be covered will include, but not be limited to,
working with pressurised equipment, gas pressure and energised fluids, handling
of heavy equipment, handling of liquid nitrogen and gaseous nitrogen, use of
hazardous chemicals, safe working areas, emergency procedures, protective
clothing, etc.
Only authorised personnel wearing adequate protective clothing will be allowed in
the vicinity of the equipment while a nitrogen operation is being performed.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Good communications between the nitrogen operator, rig floor, wellhead area
and coiled tubing or stimulation operator where applicable must be maintained
throughout the operation.
All personnel should be aware of the Emergency Procedures for C/T operations.
All work areas will be chained or roped off, and warning signs placed at access
routes. The exact requirements will be specified on the work permits.
Fire hoses will be available in the areas where liquid nitrogen is to be used. The
hoses will be fully charged, so that they can be used immediately should a spill
occur.
The nitrogen tanks and nitrogen converter/pump will be positioned as close to
the well as possible to minimise the length of pressurised lines.
Gaseous nitrogen will escape from nitrogen tanks continuously as the tank is
warmed. Do not stand in the immediate vicinity of escaping nitrogen and do not
attempt to plug or block the escaping gas.
Nitrogen is not toxic (it represents about 80% of the air we breathe), but if
released in a confined area it will displace some of the oxygen present leading to
an oxygen poor atmosphere and possibly asphyxiation of people present. (The
effect is like putting a plastic bag over ones head.) Do not enter or work in a
confined area where nitrogen is escaping.
Liquid nitrogen is very cold being a cryogenic fluid. It will freeze flesh on contact
almost instantly, especially if the surface is water wet. The freezing effect is
anaesthetic and may not be immediately noticed. The flesh or eye once frozen is
effectively destroyed. The affected area will be treated as a serious burn.
Lines carrying liquid nitrogen are also very cold and should only be handled with
dry insulated gloves.
On contact with steel, liquid nitrogen causes embrittlement and shrinkage of the
surface leading to fracture generation. Thus if nitrogen is spill on a steel deck, it
will quite rapidly freeze and crack the deck, allowing the liquid to spill to the next
level. Apply a fine spray of water to the spill immediately. As in a liquid fire, do
not apply a fierce jet to the liquid as this will disperse it to other areas. The fine
spray will lay down an insulating layer of ice on the deck and help evaporate the
liquid nitrogen.
14.3 NITROGEN HANDLING

14.3.1 Safety Equipment
When handling or working in the vicinity of a nitrogen operation, suitable safety
equipment must be made available and used. The type of safety equipment
required will depend on whether the person expects to operate the equipment or
simply remain in the vicinity.
As standard procedure when in the vicinity of nitrogen operations, chemical
goggles should be worn in preference to safety spectacles. Nitrogen operators
must be equipped with dry thermal gloves for handling cryogenic hoses and
valves.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
14.3.2 Safety Data Sheets

When operating with nitrogen or any kind of chemical, ensure that the safety
data sheets are available both at the safety meeting and in the work area.
During the safety meeting the Safety Officer should be shown each of the safety
data sheets. The safety officer should analyse the sheet and point out the
hazards and handling instructions for nitrogen and any other chemical being
utilised.
The control and disposal of spills of liquid nitrogen and escapes or leakages of
liquid or gaseous nitrogen should be explained.
In the event of injury from nitrogen burn or asphyxiation the safety data sheets
will be available to enable the Medic and Safety Officer to determine the best
action.
14.3.3 Pressurised Lines

During nitrogen operations pressure will be used to inject the nitrogen as gas into
the well and for the pressurised transfer of liquid nitrogen between tanks and
from tank to pump.
The pressure will either be gas pressure or energised fluid pressure. It is
important to note that when operating with energised fluid pressure, it is essential
to keep the operational personnel in safe areas when ever possible. The effect of
energised fluid pressure release is explosive.
14.4 RIG-UP PROCEDURES

14.4.1 Equipment Preparation and Siting
The contractor will have a rig up procedure that has been approved by the
Company in advance.
The equipment will be situated such that the length of pressurised lines, and
liquid nitrogen hoses, are minimised.
All high pressure lines will be pressure tested with water according to the values
stated in the nitrogen programme.
Where possible the nitrogen operator will have an unobstructed view of the rig
floor, or wellhead area, and the coiled tubing operator where relevant.
Personnel involved in the operation will carry radios at all times.
14.4.2 Equipment Rig-up

When rigging up equipment, ensure that all pressure operating items carry valid
test certificates. Inspect all items for wear or damage and do not use any
defective items.
Ensure equipment location has sufficient clear escape routes.
Liquid nitrogen lines should be supported off steel decks with wood or rubber
matting to prevent deck freezing.
Drip trays of stainless steel construction should be placed under all hose unions.
Liquid nitrogen tanks may not be stacked, either while being stored or during
operation.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
14.4.3 Pressure Testing

Pressure testing should be performed with all lines and spaces to be tested full
of water.
Testing with nitrogen should be avoided.
Pressure testing will take place to 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure.
Note: The pressure testing will be witnessed by the Well Operations Supervisor.
Pressure tests will be monitored for 15 mins on a chart recorder. The chart will
be labelled and stored for reference.
The PRV is to be isolated during pressure test.
14.4.4 Treating Lines

Inspect all treating lines thoroughly. Mark and set aside defective treating
equipment.
Ensure treating line runs are kept as short and direct as possible without causing
unnecessary obstruction.
When treating at high rates and as a general practice, ensure sufficient flexibility
in the treating line by incorporating chicksan bridges in the line. Cavitation and
high pump rates can stress lines and back off unions by vibration unless the line
is flexible.
Lines should be tied together using a steel cable and clamps. Each individual
line, swing or other treating pipe should be clamped to the cable.
The lines should also be tied off where possible to fixed objects such as pad
eyes.
Ensure that each fluid or nitrogen pump is fitted with a check valve. A check
valve should also be fitted to the treating point, i.e. coiled tubing reel, well head,
kill line.
Check valves should be fitted with bleed-off needle valves.
14.4.5 Rigging Down

Rigging down will only take place once the Workover Superintendent or company
representative has given permission.
The existing Hot Work permit may be used if still valid otherwise a new Cold
Work permit may be obtained.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
14.5 NITROGEN TREATMENT PROCEDURES

When preparing a nitrogen programme, note should be taken of the required quantity of
nitrogen calculated to complete the operation. To this should be added considerable excess
for ordering, to ensure that sufficient nitrogen is available to complete the job. Evaporation
of stored nitrogen, due to shipping and job delays, multiple pressure test cool-downs, job
restarts and other unexpected losses, suggest an excess allowance of at least 50% over the
calculated volume.
The following operational factors should be considered:
The maximum flow rate required and the number of nitrogen converter/pumps
required.
Contingency for unit breakdowns.
Space on the pipe deck to store the nitrogen beside the nitrogen converters and
pumps.
Quantity of nitrogen required to prevent restocking being craned in during the
operation.
Safety transfer of nitrogen between tanks during the operation.
A nitrogen pumping schedule will be prepared in advance by the service company. If during
the nitrogen operation there are any significant variations from this schedule the job will be
shut down and the cause investigated. If necessary, the operation will be adjusted and
restarted.
14.5.1 Pressures
Nitrogen pump pressures should be determined before the start of a job. This is
of particular importance with gas lifting. If the job is not correctly designed the
combined coiled tubing friction pressure and negative hydrostatic effect can lead
to high surface pump pressure which may exceed the maximum allowable coiled
tubing pressure.
The maximum working pressure of wellheads and production equipment should
also be considered when designing nitrogen operations. High pressure gas
pockets may return to surface.
14.5.2 Pump Rates

Pump rates will be clearly stated in the individual stimulation programme.
Generally the analogue gauges on nitrogen pumps and tanks are not very
accurate and allowance should be made for this.
14.5.3 Coiled Tubing Gas Lift

A detailed programme is available in the Coiled Tubing Section 13.6.1
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
14.5.4 Nitrogen Cushion - Tubing Conveyed Perforation

Nitrogen is used to allow control and adjustment of the drawdown pressure during tubing
conveyed perforation operations. The general term used here is differential perforating.
The standard procedure follows:
Once the tubing has been pressure tested for integrity using water, a circulating
sleeve is opened above the packer and nitrogen is injected down the tubing.
Nitrogen displaces the water out of the circulating port until the desired fluid
height is achieved. The port is closed and nitrogen is pumped until the correct
pressure is achieved on top of the water cushion.
Normally 500-1,000 psi drawdown is required to ensure that, when the guns are
fired, the perforation debris is ejected from the perforation tunnels and fluid is
prevented from entering the perforation.
Alternatively if circulation is not possible, coiled tubing may be used to circulate
out the fluid used to pressure test the tubing. Coiled tubing should be run to
about 500 ft below the desired top of water cushion to ensure that sufficient
water is expelled. An amount of fluid will fall back after nitrogen lifting has
ceased.
The precise calculations for the amount of nitrogen required will be provided by
the service company by customised computer design packages.
14.5.5 Nitrified Treatment

Nitrified treatments are performed when the well being treated is unable to
support a full column of treatment fluid. The nitrogen is injected into the
treatment fluid thus reducing the density of the fluid and, hence, allowing the fluid
to return from the formation.
Treatment fluids commonly nitrified include acid, surfactant acids and surfactant
or solvent treatments.
A rate of 400 to 1,000 scf/bbl of nitrogen per barrel of treatment fluid is normally
advised.
When designing nitrified treatments, note should be taken of the additional
surface pressure expected due to the reduced hydrostatic head of the nitrified
fluid and the additional friction due to the two phase flow. The specific pump
rates, and expected pressures, should be calculated using the service companys
stimulation programme.
Energised fluid should be treated with caution.
Nitrogen and treatment fluids are commingled at the surface and injected
through the tubing.
The treatment is fully, or partially, displaced using nitrogen to ensure sufficient
drawdown on the formation to allow the nitrified fluid to return.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
14.6 NITROGEN TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Nitrogen is used for three main reasons:
Nitrogen is an inert gas which does not readily react with other substances, for
example flammable well fluids.
Nitrogen does not dissolve readily in water as does CO2 thus improving
efficiency.
Nitrogen is relatively cheap and readily available in Liquid form. The added
advantage of liquid nitrogen, rather than gaseous nitrogen, is that it can be
pumped efficiently as a liquid then vaporised using heat from a heat source such
as an engine with hydraulic heat. Several large pumps would be required to
produce the rates and pressures available from one nitrogen converter/pump.
When turning from cryogenic liquid to gas at room temperature the nitrogen will
expand almost 700 times. It is clear, therefore, that trapped liquid could be highly
explosive. All liquid nitrogen handling equipment is fitted with relief valves to
prevent the trapping of liquid.
14.7 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES (DURING NITROGEN OPERATIONS)

All personnel must be familiar with the facility alarm system and know the course of action to
be followed in the event of the alarm being sounded. These procedures are intended for
platform operations
14.7.1 Production Shutdown

1) Stop pumping nitrogen immediately.
2) Close the SCSSV (Refer to section 13 for procedures when coiled tubing is being
used).
3) Close the wing valve.
4) Bleed down the surface nitrogen pressure, secure tanks and depressurise.
5) Return all work permits to the control room.
6) Inform the control room that the well has been secured.
7) If the SCSSV is left open, the control panel will be checked frequently.
8) Work will only resume once the stand down has been announced, and work permits
have been re-issued.
14.7.2 General Platform Alarm

1) Stop pumping and, time permitting, depressurise the surface lines and tanks.
2) Close the SCSSV (Refer to section 13 for procedures when coiled tubing is being
used).
3) Close the wing valve.
4) All non-essential personnel must report to their muster stations.
5) The Well Operations Supervisor will inform the control room of the well status and the
names of the personnel remaining at the nitrogen unit (which will be a maximum of
two).
6) The Well Operations Supervisor and the nitrogen operator will remain at the well site to
ensure that the well and equipment remains in a safe condition during the alert. They
will be able to act should the situation deteriorate.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
14.7.3 Prepare to Abandon Platform

Time permitting the following actions should be followed:
1) Stop pumping and shut down the nitrogen pump unit immediately, depressurise lines
and tanks only if time permits.
2) Close the SCSSV.
3) Secure the well by closing the wing and master valves.
4) All personnel will report to their muster stations and follow tannoy instructions.
Note: Safety of personnel is paramount, and the above actions should only be
followed if it is considered safe to do so. Therefore, if there is ANY doubt,
ALL personnel will report to their muster stations IMMEDIATELY.
14.7.4 Liquid Nitrogen Spill

1) Prior to handling nitrogen all personnel must be familiar with the Safety Data Sheets,
and the actions to be taken in the event of a spill.
2) In the event of a major liquid nitrogen spill or equipment failure the operation will be
shut down and the control room informed immediately.
3) The point of leakage will be identified and isolated immediately, without endangering
life.
4) Spilt liquid nitrogen should be sprayed with a fine spray of water. Do not flush to
drains. Try to contain the spill using fine water sprays to vaporise the spill and insulate
the deck.
5) In the event that the tank has a small but uncontrollable rupture, personnel should be
cleared from the area and the tank should be lifted by crane over the sea. Any spills
being immediately sprayed with water.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15. FORMATION DAMAGE AND INTERVENTION PROCEDURES
15.1 INTRODUCTION
All wells are susceptible to formation damage to some degree, from relatively minor loss of
productivity to complete plugging of specific zones. The purpose of this chapter is to help the
technicians involved in the well operations to take the correct decisions when chemicals
selection is required while developing the intervention on the wells.
15.2 MAIN CAUSES OF FORMATION DAMAGE

Damage Associated with Foreign Fluid Filtrate. This foreign fluid may be a drilling mud, a
clean completion or workover fluid, a stimulation or well-treating fluid, or even the reservoir
fluid itself if the original characteristics are altered.
Plugging Associated with Solids. Plugging by solids occurs on the formation face, in the
perforation, or in the formation. Solids may be weighting materials, clays, viscosity builders,
fluid loss-control materials, lost-circulation materials, drilled solids, cement particles,
perforating charge debris, rust and mill scale, pipe dope, un-dissolved salt, gravel pack or
frac sand fines, precipitated scales, paraffin or asphaltene.
Solids Precipitation. Solids may also be precipitated within the formation. For example, scale
often precipitates due to mixing of incompatible waters; asphaltene or paraffin may be
precipitated due to changing equilibrium conditions.
15.2.1 Damage Associated with Foreign Fluid Filtrate

The filtrate may be water containing several types and concentrations of positive and
negative ions and surfactants. It may be a hydrocarbon carrying various surfactants. The
liquid is forced into porous zones by differential pressure, displacing or commingling with a
portion of the virgin reservoir fluids. This may create flow restriction due to relative
permeability or viscosity effects or even the formation blockage.
Mechanisms that may reduce the absolute formation permeability could be:
1) Particle migration effects which include:
hydration or dehydration of clays,
dispersion or flocculation of highly or slightly swelling clays,
dissolution of cementing materials allowing fines.
2) Water may tend to wet the rock increasing water saturation and reducing relative
permeability to oil or gas. Filtrate invasion is normally termed water blockage. The
extent of oil productivity reduction depends on the degree of water saturation and the
radius of the affected area.
3) Liquid filtrate may determine a viscous emulsion with the virgin reservoir oil; stable
emulsions appear to be associated with partially oil-wet systems. Viscosity effects also
include formation plugging by a high-viscosity treating fluid which, for some reason,
does not "break" and does not return to the well bore under the available differential
pressure.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
In a radial flow system, any reduction in permeability around the well bore results in serious
reduction of productivity or injectivity. In a linear flow situation, some plugging of the face of
the fracture can be tolerated due to the large area represented by the faces of the fracture.
However, plugging of the fracture itself results in serious reduction in productivity or
injectivity.
15.2.1.1 FORMATION PARTICLES MIGRATION

Nearly all oil-producing sandstones contain some clays as a coating on individual sand
grains and/or discrete particles mixed with the sand. Carbonate rocks may also contain
clays.
Clays most frequently found in hydrocarbon zones are montmorillonite (bentonite), illite,
mixed-layer clays (primarily illite-montmorillonite), kaolinite, and chlorite. All clay types are
capable of migrating when in contact with a foreign fluid which alters the ionic environment.
It should be remembered that high flow rate alone (even with no change in environmental
conditions) is sufficient to cause particle migration. Thus, anytime a clay is present, it can be
assumed that permeability damage may occur. The degree of damage will depend on the
type and concentration of clays, their relative position in the rock, the severity of the ionic
environmental change and to an extent, the rate of fluid flow.
Effect of Water.
Montmorillonite is the only clay that swells by absorbing ordered water layers between
crystals. Mixed-layer clay, which contains montmorillonite, will also swell, but a slight swelling
may be expected by the illite portion of this clay. Kaolinite, chlorite, and illite may be classed
as slightly swelling clays.
Swelling of clays in contact with water is due to the hydration of the cation attached to the
clay and hydrogen bonding. The degree of swelling depends on the cation adsorbed on the
clay and the amount of salts dissolved in the water contacting the clay.
Clay dispersion is affected by pH. Scanning electron microscope studies have confirmed the
effect of pH on clay particle disturbance. Clay particles in core pore spaces were significantly
disturbed and thus made mobile in contact with 8 pH fluid. This effect was more noticeable
when contacted with 10 pH fluid. Virtually no disturbance was noted when similar core
samples were contacted with a 4 pH fluid.
In virgin formation, the degree of swelling of a clay particle is in equilibrium with the type and
concentration of salts in the connate water. Thus, clean formation water used in workover
operations should not disturb this balance.
The clay can be cemented in place using Zirconium Oxychloride which creates a poly-
nucleated cation that bond strongly the clay particles together. This system is stable with HCl
but is removed by HF.
It is usually impossible to restore the original permeability, when clay particles in sandstones
are rearranged or disturbed. Thus, formation damage due to clays must be prevented rather
than cured.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.2.1.2 REDUCED RELATIVE PERMEABILITY.

Increased water saturation near the well bore results from filtrate invasion or fingering or
coning of formation water. Filtrate invasion is normally termed water blockage.
The extent of oil productivity reduction depends on the degree of water saturation and the
radius of the affected area.
15.2.1.3 INCREASED FLUID VISCOSITY.

Plugging of the formation may occur due to the presence of emulsions in the pores of the
formation itself.
In a radial flow situation, the extent of productivity reduction depends on viscosity of the
emulsion and the radius of the affected area. Water-in-oil emulsions generally exhibit
viscosities many times higher than the viscosities of oil-in-water emulsions.
Emulsions are stabilised by surface active materials and by small solid particles such as
formation fines, drilling or completion fluid clays, or solid hydrocarbon particles.
The presence and the character of ''fines" significantly contributes to emulsion stability.
These fines may occur because of the character of the formation, or may be released as a
result of a stimulation treatment or contact with a foreign fluid. Generally, fine-particle
wettability is an important factor in emulsion stability and in determining the continuous
phase of the emulsion. Strongly water-wet fines tend to reduce emulsion stability.
The formation wettability is a significant factor in emulsion stability. Emulsions exhibit much
greater stability and viscosity in strongly oil-wet formations.
Emulsion blocks exhibit a "check valve" effect which can be detected by comparing injectivity
and productivity tests.
15.2.2 Scale Deposition
15.2.2.1 INTRODUCTION.
Scale is deposited in formation matrix and fractures, well bore, down hole pumps, tubing,
casing, flow lines. The direct cause of scaling is frequently pressure drop, temperature
change, mixing of two incompatible waters, or exceeding the solubility product. Scale
sometimes limits or blocks oil and gas production.
Wells exibit appreciable reduced productivity or injectivity and often require a large number
of costly remedial jobs.
The most common oil field scale deposits are calcium carbonate (CaC03), gypsum (CaS04
2H20), barium sulphate (BaSO4) and sodium chloride (NaCI). A less common deposit is
strontium sulphate (SrS04).
Scale deposited slowly may be very hard and dense, and may be difficult to remove with acid
or other chemicals.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.2.2.2 CAUSES OF SCALE DEPOSITION.

Primary factors affecting scale precipitation, deposition, and crystal growth are:
Supersaturation.
Commingling of two unlike waters having incompatible compounds in solution.
Change of temperature and pressure on solution.
Evaporation (affects concentration).
Agitation.
Contact time.
pH.
Tendency to Scale (CaC03)

In oil wells, calcium carbonate precipitation is usually caused by pressure drop releasing CO2
-
from bicarbonate ions (HCO3 ). When CO2 is released from solution, the pH increases, the
solubility of dissolved carbonates decreases, and the more soluble bicarbonates are
converted to less soluble carbonates.
Water Soluble Scale.
Chemical Name Chemical Formula Mineral name
Sodium Chloride NaCI Halite
Acid Soluble Scale.
Chemical name Chemical Formula Mineral name
Calcium Carbonate CaC03 Calcite

Iron Carbonate FeCO3 Siderite
Iron Sulphide FeS Trolite
Iron Oxide Fe203 Hematite
Iron Oxide Fe304 Magnetite
Magnesium Hydroxide Mg(OH)2 Brucite
Acid Insoluble Scale.
Chemical name Chemical Formula Mineral name
Calcium Sulphate CaS04 Anhydrite

Calcium Sulphate CaSO4 2H20 Gypsum
Barium Sulphate BaSO4 Barite
Strontium Sulphate SrS04 Celestite
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Scale precipitation also varies with calcium ion concentration (common ion effectsuch as
from CaCI2), alkalinity of water (concentration of bicarbonate ion), temperature, total salt
concentration contact time, and degree of agitation:
Scaling will increase with increased temperature.

Scaling increases with an increase in pH.
Scaling increases and becomes harder with in creased contact time.
Scaling increases with increase in turbulence.
Mixing of two incompatible waters will cause precipitation of CaC03 scale.
Tendency to ScaleGypsum (CaS04 2H20) or Anhydrite (CaS04).

The most common form of calcium sulphate scale deposited down hole is hydrous calcium
sulphate or gypsum (CaS04 2H20).
A reduction in pressure decreases solubility and causes scaling.
Mixing of two waters, one containing calcium ions and the other containing
sulphate ions, often causes gyp scaling, particularly in water flooding.
Agitation increases scaling tendency.
Evaporation of water due to evolution of free gas near or in the well bore may
cause supersaturation and gyp scaling.
A change in temperature will change the solubility of calcium sulphate or gyp and
the tendency to precipitate.
Tendency to Scale (BaSO4 and SrS04)

For a given NaCl concentration, BaSO4 scaling increases with decreases in temperature as
a result of decreasing BaSO4 solubility.
Both BaSO4 and SrSO4 scales are usually caused by commingling of two unlike waters, one
containing soluble salts of barium or strontium and the other containing sulphate ions.
Pressure drop may decrease the solubility of BaSO4 in a given solution and cause scaling.
Tendency to Scale (NaCI)

Precipitation of sodium chloride is normally caused by supersaturating usually due to
evaporation or decreases in temperature.
Tendency to Scale (Iron Scales)
Iron scales are frequently the result of corrosion products such as various iron oxides and
iron sulphide.
Sulphate-reducing bacteria can be a source of hydrogen sulphide, which then reacts with
iron in solution or with steel surfaces to form iron sulphide. If oxygen is introduced to a
system, it can react with iron to form a precipitate and with steel surfaces to form an oxide
coating.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.2.2.3 PREDICTION AND IDENTIFICATION OF SCALE.

Techniques discussed under "Tendency to Scale" are very helpful in predicting various types
of scale. The Stiff and Davis method has been used for many years to show scaling
tendencies. However, the age and method of collecting samples may have a bearing on the
water analysis values obtained. For example, an aged sample of water may show different
values than a fresh sample for pH, bicarbonate content, and CO2. The best procedure is to
measure water properties immediately after sampling.
Analysis of produced brine is an aid in predicting scaling in surface facilities, but may not
provide a reliable basis to estimate down hole scaling in producing wells. Down hole
deposition of scale, frequently due to release of CO2 from bicarbonate ions in water as
pressure declines tends to cause an error in predicting scaling tendencies from produced
brine.
If bottom hole pressure is near original, bottom hole samples brought to the laboratory under
subsurface pressure and temperature conditions may provide reliable information on both
down hole and surface scaling tendencies under original reservoir conditions.
X-ray diffraction is the most used method for scale identification. Each crystalline chemical
compound in the scale diffracts X-rays in a characteristic manner.
Chemical analysis may also be used for scale identification, Samples of scale are
decomposed and then dissolved in chemical solution. Chemical elements are then analysed
by standard techniques of titration or precipitation.
15.2.3 Asphaltene Plugging

Temperature and pressure reductions accompanying flow of crude oil and containing
appreciable quantities of asphaltic material may result in deposition of these materials in the
formation.
Deposition may reduce formation permeability by blocking pore spaces, or by causing the
formation to become oil wet.
15.3 DIAGNOSIS OF FORMATION DAMAGE.

It is usually possible to determine that formation damage or "skin effect" exists in a particular
well. This can be done through well tests such as injectivity or productivity tests.
Analysis of pressure build-up or fall-off tests will indicate the relative magnitude
of the damage or skin effect.
Production logging surveys may show zones not contributing to the total flow
stream.
Careful examination of completion, testing and workover reports is helpful to identify the type
of formation damage.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.4 FORMATION DAMAGE REDUCTION

15.4.1 Use Of Surfactants For Well Treatments
Surfactants, or surface-active agents, are chemicals that can favourably or unfavourably
affect the flow of fluids near the well bore. The use of surfactants should be considered for
all well completion, well killing, workover, and well stimulation.
Surfactants have the ability to lower the surface tension of a liquid that is in contact with a
gas by adsorbing at the interface between the liquid and gas. Surfactants can also reduce
interfacial tension between two immiscible liquids by adsorbing at the interfaces between the
liquids.
Because the primary action of most surfactants is due to electrostatic forces, a surfactant is
classified by the ionic nature of the molecule's Water-Soluble group.
Anionic surfactants are organic molecules where the Water-Soluble group is negatively
charged. (phosphonates).
Cationic surfactants are organic molecules where the water-soluble group is positively
charged.
Non-ionic Surfactants are organic molecules that do not ionise and, therefore, remain
uncharged.
Amphoteric Surfactants are organic molecules where the water-soluble group can be either
positively charged, negatively charged, or uncharged.
Rock Wettability.
Wettability is a descriptive term used to indicate whether a rock or metal surface has the
capacity to be preferentially coated with a film of oil or a film of water.
Surfactants may adsorb at the interface between the liquid and rock or metal surface and
may change the electrical charge on the rock or metal, thereby altering the wettability.
Although the surface of a solid can have varying degrees of wettability under normal
reservoir conditions, the following conditions usually exist:
Sand and clay are water-wet and have a negative surface charge.
Limestone and dolomite are water-wet and have a positive surface charge in the
pH range of 0 to 8.
Mechanics of Emulsions
Emulsions can occur between two immiscible liquids and may be stable depending on
effects that occur at the interface. Energy is required to create the emulsion, and stabilisers
must collect at the interface between the liquids to keep the emulsion from breaking.
The most significant stabilisers of emulsions are:
1) Fine particles of clay or other materials.
2) Asphaltene.
3) Surfactants.
Surfactants have the ability to break an emulsion by acting on the stabilising materials in
such a way as to remove them from the interfacial film surrounding an emulsion droplet.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.4.1.1 FORMATION DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBLE TO SURFACTANT TREATMENT.

Types of damage which may be prevented, alleviated or aggravated by surfactants are:
1) Oil-wetting of formation rock.
2) Water blocks.
3) Viscous emulsion blocks.
4) Particle blocks.
Oil-wetting of formation rock

Oil wetting of a normally water-wet formation can reduce permeability to oil by 15 to 85%
with an average reduction of about 40%.
When the formation near the well bore becomes oil-wet, oil is preferentially attracted to the
surface of reservoir rock. This appreciably increases the thickness of the film coating the
reservoir rock and reduces the size of flow paths from the reservoir as well as decreasing
the relative permeability to oil.
Gas wells are also adversely affected by oil-wetting the formation. Oil-wetting a reservoir
rock can result in severe water or emulsion blocking.
Sources of oil-wetting in oil and gas wells are:
Surfactants in some drilling mud filtrates and workover and well stimulation fluids
may oil-wet the formation.
Corrosion inhibitors and bactericides are usually cationic surfactants, which will
oil-wet sandstone and clay.
Oil-base mud containing blown asphalt will oil-wet: sandstone, clays, or
carbonates. Oil emulsion mud, usually contain considerable cationic surfactants
and may oil-wet sandstones and clays.
A strong water-wetting surfactant may convert some oil-wetted surfaces to water-
wet surfaces. This will enlarge flow paths to oil and restore oil permeability to that
of the undamaged water-wet matrix around the well bore. However, cationic
surfactants are extremely difficult to remove from sandstone and clay. The best
approach is to avoid contact of formation sands and clay with cationic
surfactants.
Water Blocks.
When large quantities of water are lost to a partially oil-wet formation, the return of original
oil or gas productivity may be slow, especially in partially pressure-depleted reservoirs. This
problem is caused by a temporary reduction in relative permeability near the well bore to oil
or gas. It is usually self-correcting but may persist for months or years.
Water blocking can usually be prevented by adding to all injected well fluids about 0.1 to
0.2% by volume of surfactant selected to lower surface and interfacial tension. The
surfactant should also water-wet the formation and prevent emulsions.
Cleanup of a water-blocked well can be accelerated by injecting into the formation a solution
of 1% to 3% by volume of a selected surfactant in clean water or oil. The surfactant should
lower surface and interfacial tension and leave the formation in a water-wet condition.
Removing damage requires many times the volume of surfactant required to prevent
damage.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Viscous Emulsion Blocks

Viscous emulsions of oil and water in the formation near the well bore can drastically reduce
the productivity of oil or gas wells. In carbonates, emulsions are usually associated with
fracture acidizing.
It has been proven that if an emulsion block exists, the calculated average well permeability,
as determined by injectivity tests, will be higher than the average permeability determined
from production tests. This provides a reliable way to predict emulsion blocks and is
frequently called the ''check valve" effect.
Emulsions in the formation can be broken by injecting demulsifying surfactants into the
formation, provided intimate contact is made between the surfactant and each emulsion
droplet. To break the emulsion, the surfactant must be absorbed on the surface of the
emulsion droplets and lower interfacial tension.
Breaking an emulsion in the formation usually requires the injection of 2% to 3% by volume
of demulsifying surfactant in clean water or clean oil. The treatment volumes should be at
least equal to or greater than the volume of the damaging fluid previously lost to the
formation. The amount of surfactant required to remove an emulsion block will usually be 20
to 30 times the volume of surfactant required to prevent the block.
Particles Block.
As a rule, it is desirable to maintain formation clays in the original condition in the reservoir.
Dispersing, flocculating, breaking loose, or moving clays probably causes more damage to
wells than the swelling clays.
Change of particle size affects formation damage. Oil wetting of clays with cationic
surfactants greatly increases the size of clay particles and increase the severity of clay-
blockage. Hydrated sodium clays may be reduced in size by an HCl treatment. When a
hydrated sodium clay reacts with acid, the hydrogen ions (H+) will replace the sodium ions
(Na+) by ion exchange. An anionic surfactant should usually be used when acidizing
sandstone to prevent clay flocculation.
High surface tension of liquids near the well bore will reduce the flow of oil and gas into a
well and increase well cleanup time. A selected surfactant may be added to lower surface
tension and accelerate well clean up.
A correct surfactant, which is designed for specific well conditions, can lower surface and
interfacial tension, favourable change wettability, break or prevent emulsions, prevent
remove water blocks. The proper use of surfactants during well completion workover or
well stimulation can prevent or remove many types of damage and result in increased
productivity or injectivity.
15.4.1.2 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO SURFACTANT-RELATED DAMAGE.

Emphasis in the use of surfactants should be aimed at preventing damage. As previously
noted, acidizing can cause emulsions, water blocks, and high surface tension problems in
carbonates. Sandstones are even more prone to damage during acidizing caused by water
and emulsion blocking, high surface tension, oil-wetting, and clay dispersion or flocculation.
A surfactant should be employed on all acidizing jobs and should be selected through tests
in compliance with API specifications.
Because sandstone wells are more susceptible to damage, all fluids and chemicals that are
injected or circulated into sandstone wells during well servicing, workover, well completion,
and stimulation should be tested for compatibility with formation fluids.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
If laboratory tests show potential damage caused by fluid circulation or injection into a well,
surfactants should be selected through laboratory tests to prevent damage.
If a surfactant is needed, tests must be run to determine the best surfactant for the job.
Selection of an Emulsion Breaking Surfactant.

If an emulsion block is indicated on a workover or well completion, emulsion breaking tests
should be made using selected surfactants and samples of produced emulsion. If samples of
the emulsion are not available, the alternative is to reconstruct, in the laboratory, a similar
emulsion using the formation fines, fluids, and chemicals that caused the down hole
emulsion.
It is usually advisable to run several emulsion breaking tests using different surfactants to
select the most effective emulsion breaker.
Systems that will not form stable emulsions usually will not require surfactants in the treating
solutions. Conversely, if reconstructed systems involved in previous well treatments show
stable emulsions, well damage may be due to emulsion blocking of the formation.
Requirements For Well Treating Surfactants.

Surfactant used to prevent or remove damage should:
Reduce surface and interfacial tension.
Prevent the formation of emulsions and break emulsions previously formed.
Water-wet the reservoir rock, considering salinity and pH of water involved.
Should not swell, shrink, or disturb formation clays.
Maintain surface activity at reservoir conditions.
Have solubility in the carrier or treating fluid at reservoir temperature. Some
satisfactory surfactants are dispersed in their carrying fluid.
Many commercial surfactants appear to lose much of their surface activity above
50,000 ppm salt. To overcome this difficulty, it is sometimes desirable to pump a
preflush of solvent or relatively low salinity water, such as 1% KCI, ahead of the
surfactant treatment. The use of a solvent preflush may also reduce water production,
immediately following treatment. However, a solvent preflush should not be used in dry gas
wells.
15.4.1.3 WELL STIMULATION WITH SURFACTANTS.

The primary purpose of surfactants in well completion, workover, and well stimulation should
be able to prevent damage. The real problem in emulsion removal from sandstone
formations with surfactants is the near impossibility of getting the surfactant into intimate
contact with emulsion droplets in sandstone.
Water blocking is relatively easy to treat. The objective is to increase relative permeability to
oil and decrease interfacial tension.
Emulsion blocks can be treated; however, surfactant stimulation treatments tend to finger, or
channel, through a viscous emulsion if most of the emulsion is not broken during surfactant
stimulation. The emulsion usually migrates back to the area immediately around the well
bore and restores the blocking condition.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
If the damage problem is oil-wetting, this may be alleviated by injecting a strong water-
wetting surfactant into the formation.
Prior to the surfactant treatment, it may be necessary to clean the tubing, well bore,
and perforations of rust, scale, paraffin, asphaltene, sand, silt, and other debris.
Fluid Placement.
The surfactant treatment should be planned to insure injection into all permeable zones that
are open to the well bore. In long zones, isolation techniques should be employed to insure
that the treated interval does not exceed approximately 50 feet.
After squeezing surfactant into the formation, below frac pressure, the well should be shut in
for about 24 hours to insure proper surfactant operation response.
15.4.2 Prevention of Plugging Associated with Solids

An important consideration in reducing formation damage due to particle plugging in the
formation is to eliminate all possible sources of particles extraneous to the formation. Well-
killing fluids are an obvious source of extraneous particles. Usually, cation content is
adjusted to prevent disturbance of formation clays, but, with little fluid loss control, a large
amount of fine particles are carried into the formation. Although this cannot be prevented
entirely, the following precautions may reduce formation damage:
1) Surface fluid tanks and workover tubular must be clean. Apply pipe dope sparingly to
the pin with a small brush.
2) Filter all fluids through a 2-micron filter at the surface.
3) Add oxygen scavenger to flow system to prevent down hole formation of iron oxide
particles. A sequestering agent should be used to prevent formation of iron hydroxide.
4) Reduce hydrostatic pressure of well bore fluid to a near balanced or even under
balanced condition relative to formation pressure.
15.4.3 Scale Removal and Prevention

Scale is classified by methods of removal. Chemically inert scales are not soluble in
chemicals. Chemically reactive scales may be classified as (a) water soluble, (b) acid
soluble, and (c) soluble in chemicals other than water or acid.
15.4.3.1 MECHANICAL METHODS.

Mechanical methods such as string shot, sonic tools, drilling, or reaming have been used to
remove both soluble and insoluble scales from tubing, casing, or open hole.
15.4.3.2 WATER-SOLUBLE SCALE.

The most common water-soluble scale is sodium chloride which can be readily dissolved
with relatively fresh water.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.4.3.3 ACID-SOLUBLE SCALE

The most prevalent of all scale compounds, calcium carbonate (CaCO3), is acid-soluble.
Hydrochloric acid (HCl) or Acetic acid can be used to remove calcium carbonate.
Acid-soluble scales also include iron carbonate (FeCO3), iron sulphide (FeS), and iron
oxides (Fe203).
HCl plus a sequestering agent is normally used to remove iron scale.
A 10% solution of Acetic acid may be used to remove iron scales without an additional
sequestering agent; however, Acetic acid is much slower acting than HCl.
Scales are frequently coated with hydrocarbons, thus making it difficult for acid to contact
and dissolve the scales. Surfactants can be added to all types of acid solutions to develop a
better acid-to-scale contact.
15.4.3.4 ACID-INSOLUBLE SCALES

The only acid-insoluble scale which is chemically reactive is calcium sulphate or gypsum.
Calcium sulphate, though not reactive in acid, can be treated with chemical solutions which
can convert calcium sulphate to an acid soluble compound, such as CaCO3 or Ca(OH)2.
Scale-removal procedure if waxes, iron carbonate and gyp are present can be:
Degrease with a solvent such as kerosene, or xylene, plus a surfactant.

Remove iron scales with a sequestered acid. convert gyp scales to CaC03 or
Ca(OH)2.
Remove converted CaCO3 scale with HCI or Acetic acid. Dissolve Ca(OH)2 with
water or weak acid.
Compounds such as EDTA (Ethylenediamine-tetracetic acid) and DTPA
(diethylenetriamine-pentaacetic acid) can dissolve gyp without the necessity of
conversion to CaCO3 or Ca(OH)2.
15.4.3.5 CHEMICALLY INERT SCALES

The most common chemically inert scales are barium sulphate (BaSO4) and strontium
sulphate (SrSO4). These scales can be removed by mechanical methods, or bypassing by
reperforating. The best approach is to prevent their deposition.
15.4.3.6 SCALE PREVENTION.

Inhibition of Scale Precipitation by Inorganic Polyphosphates.
Inhibition of Scale with Polyorganic Acid.
Inhibition of Scale with Organic Phosphates and Phosphonates.
Inhibiting Scale with Polymers
CaC03 Scale Prevention by Pressure Maintenance
If calcium carbonate scale can be predicted as a result of drop in reservoir
pressure, pressure maintenance should be considered as a means of reducing
scaling.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.4.4 Acid Stimulation

Stimulation is used for two main reasons: remove damage due to drilling and workover
fluids, and improve productivity by increasing the effective permeability around the well bore.
Acid may also be used for removing scale deposits in the perforations and completion
equipment.
The damage may result from:
Filtrate invasion forming stable emulsions with oil, or causing high water
saturations leading to water blocking.
Naturally occurring clays being adversely affected by mud filtrate or brine
causing swelling, or migration to take place.
Mud solids plugging the pore space, or if the reservoir is naturally fractured
whole mud lost to the formation.
Perforating damage when perforating overbalanced.
Scale formation across the perforations.
The type of damage will have to be assessed prior to the job. Once this has been done the
procedure can be finalised. Where possible the stimulation company will be provided with
details of formation fluids, completion fluids, production history and, if possible, a core or
scale sample.
15.4.4.1 FACTORS AFFECTING ACID REACTION

Pressure
As pressure increases to 500psi reaction rate is reduced, above 750psi pressure has little
effect on reaction rate.
Temperature
The speed of any chemical reaction is directly affected by temperature. For instance acid
will react three times faster at 300oF than at 150oF.
Increasing temperature will cause a reduction in viscosity, which will have a role in reaction
kinetics.
Increase in temperature will also lead to more severe corrosion of the well bore tubulars.
Acid Concentration
The greater the strength of hydrochloric acid the longer it will take to react to completion.
However the initial reaction rates are faster. The increase ion by-products resulting from the
stronger acids acts as a retarder to the acid as its strength reduces. For example:
25% HCl reacts faster than 10% HCl in a limestone. But when the strength of
the 25% acid is reduced to 10% its reaction rate is less than that of a 10% acid
concentration.
For temperature from 75F to 250F, 30% HCl will take approximately three
times longer to react than 15% HCl.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Velocity
In general increasing velocity will reduce the time it takes for acid to react. This may be
offset by the increase in penetration rate.
Surface Area
The greater the surface area exposed to acid the faster the acid will react, so limiting the
depth of penetration of the acid. However in anisotropic formations (e.g. limestone) the acid
may tend to 'wormhole', and so penetrate to a greater depth than might be thought.
Formation Composition
The chemical and physical composition of the formation will have an effect on the reaction
rate, the greater the volume of calcium carbonate the faster the reaction.
The main types of acid used in sandstone acidising are hydrochloric acid (HCl), and
hydrofluoric acid (HF). Organic acids, such as acetic acid and formic acid, can also be used
in conjunction with HF and HCl.
HCl will not dissolve sand or clays. It will dissolve any carbonates present in the formation
(e.g. from LCM material, or scale build up). It will also partially dehydrate any water swollen
clays that may be present. When hydrated bentonite is in contact with HCl an ion exchange
occurs. This results in the sodium bentonite being altered to hydrogen bentonite. This can
result in up to 80% loss of water, and shrinkage of the clay particles.
HF does have the ability to dissolve silica (sand) or silicates such as clay, shale, silt and
feldspar. As bentonite is a silicate it can be dissolved by HF acid. Formations with damage
due to clay migration, or bentonite from drilling mud can be treated with HF.
HF is usually pumped as an HCl-HF acid mixture, with the HF being liberated by the reaction
of HCl on ammonium bifluoride. Excess HCl is used as it tends to increase the solubility of
some of the secondary reaction products, and also has a significant effect on the rate of the
reaction.
15.4.4.2 MATRIX AND FRACTURE ACIDIZING

The two basic types of acidizing are characterised through injection rates and pressures:
Injection rates below fracture pressure are termed matrix acidizing.
Injection rates above fracture pressure are termed fracture acidizing.
Matrix acidizing is applied primarily to remove skin damage caused by drilling, completion,
workover or well-killing fluids, and by precipitation of deposits from produced water. Due to
the extremely large surface area contacted by acid in a matrix treatment.
Removal of severe plugging in sandstone, limestone, or dolomite can result in a very large
increase in well productivity. If there is no skin damage, a matrix treatment in limestone or
dolomite could stimulate natural production no more than one and one half times.
One of the problems in matrix acidizing is that fracture pressure is not always known.
Because breakdown or fracture pressure may decrease with a decrease in reservoir
pressure, it is frequently necessary to run "breakdown" tests to determine fracture pressure
of a specific zone or reservoir.
Fracture acidizing is an alternative to hydraulic fracturing and propping in carbonate
reservoirs.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Un-dissolved fines can significantly reduce fracture flow capacity if not removed with spent
acid. Suspending agents, usually surfactants or polymers, will materially aid in the removal of
these fines.
Fracture acidizing has not, normally application in sandstone wells. "Breakdown" of a
sandstone well with acid at fracture pressures may break down natural vertical permeability
barriers to adjacent unwanted zones.
"Breaking-down" with acid may also tend to open channels between the cement and the
formation, even though formation fracturing pressure is never reached.
15.4.4.3 ACIDS USED IN WELL STIMULATION.

The basic types of acid used are: Hydrochloric, Hydrochloric-Hydrofluoric, Acetic, Formic,
and Sulfamic. Also, various combinations of these acids are employed in specific
applications.
Hydrochloric acid (HCI) used in the field is normally 15% by weight HCl; however, acid
concentration may vary between 5% and about 35%. The freezing point of 15% acid is -
27F, less than -70F for 20 to 29% acid, and -36F for 35% acid. HCl will dissolve
limestone, dolomite, and other carbonates.
A thousand gallons of 15% HCl will dissolve 1.840 lb. or 10.5 cu.ft. of zero porosity limestone
(CaCO3). This reaction will produce 2,050 lb of calcium chloride (CaCl2), 812 lb of carbon
dioxide (CO2) or .600 cu.ft. of CO2 gas at standard conditions of temperature and pressure,
and 333 lb of water.
Acetic acid (HAc) is a weakly-ionised, slow-reacting organic acid. The cost of dissolving a
given weight of limestone is greater with acetic acid than with HCI.
Acetic acid is relatively easy to inhibit against corrosion and can usually be left in contact
with tubing or casing for days without danger of serious corrosion. Because of this
characteristic, acetic acid is frequently used as a perforating fluid in limestone wells.
Other advantages of acetic acid in comparison to HCI are:
Acetic acid is naturally sequestered against iron precipitation.
It does not cause embrittlement or stress cracking of high strength steels.
It will not corrode aluminium.
It will not attack Chrome plating up to 200F. Therefore, acetic acid should be
considered when acidizing a well with an alloy pump in the hole.
Formic acid (HCOOH) is a weakly-ionised, slow reacting organic acid. It has somewhat
similar properties to acetic acid. However, formic acid is more difficult to inhibit against
corrosion at higher temperatures and does not have the widespread acceptance and use of
acetic acid.
Hydrofluoric acid (HF) used in oil, gas, or service wells is normally 3% HF acid plus 12%
HCI. It is employed exclusively in sandstone matrix acidizing to dissolve formation clays or
clays which have migrated into the formation.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Sulfamic acid (HSO3NH2), a granular-powdered material, reacts about as fast as HCl. The
primary advantage of sulfamic acid is that it can be hauled to the location as a dry powder
and then mixed with water. Unless sulfamic acid is modified, it will not dissolve iron oxides or
other iron scales. Because of its molecular weight, the amount of calcium carbonate
dissolved by one pound of sulfamic acid is only about one-third that dissolved by an equal
weight of HCI. Acidizing with sulfamic acid is usually much more expensive than with HCI.
Sulfamic acid is not recommended for temperatures above 180F because it hydrolyses to
form sulphuric acid (H2SO4). When H2SO4 reacts with limestone or CaCO3 scale, Calcium
sulphate (CaSO4) can be precipitated.
A summary of commonly used acids and their reactions is presented in Figure 15-1.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Figure 15-1- Properties of Commonly Used Acids

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.4.4.4 ACID ADDITIVES.

(Refer to the Drilling Fluids Operations Manual STAP-P-1-M-6160).
Acidizing can cause a number of well problems. Acid may:
Release fines.
Create precipitants.
Form emulsions.
Create sludge.
Corrode steel.
Additives are available to correct these and a number of other problems.

Surfactants should be used on all acid jobs to reduce surface and interfacial tension, to
prevent emulsions, to water-wet the formation, and to safeguard against other associated
problems.
Swabbing and clean-up time after acidizing oil, gas, and service wells can be reduced by
lowering surface tension.
Friction Reducers
These are added to reduce the frictional pressure drop while displacing acid into the well.
They are particularly important when coiled tubing is being used, as the frictional pressure
drop can be considerable. They are added in concentrations varying from 1 to 4lb/1,000
gals in order to achieve a reduction in friction pressure of 65-80%. Normally they are natural
or synthetic polymers, such as guar, cellulose, etc.
Diverting Agents
To ensure that the total interval of interest is to be properly stimulated it will be necessary to
limit the amount of acid penetrating any zones of high permeability and/or low pressure.
This is done by adding a diverting agent to the treatment.
Diverting agents available are both mechanical and chemical in nature.
Mechanical means, such as ball sealers of high specific gravity are pumped at sufficient
velocity to plug off the perforations. Then, they drop off and fall into the sump when
pumping stops.
Chemical diverting agents bind together to form an impermeable skin across the
perforations, or within the formation. They must be soluble in hydrocarbons or water to allow
clean-up on back flushing.
Surfactants
Surfactants lower the surface tension of the acid solutions. They assist acid penetration into
microscopic pores in tight formations, or in removing scale or cement particles from sand
faces. They aid acid penetration of oil films present in the pores, or formation surfaces so
improving contact. They also aid back flushing and return of spent acid during clean up by
decreasing the resistance of the formation to acid flow.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Retarders
Retarders are used to decrease the reaction rate to achieve increased penetration away
from the wellbore. This is done by using chemicals which deposit a film over the rock after
initial acid contact or through increased viscosity by using natural or artificial gums to thicken
the acid.
Demulsifiers
Demulsifiers are used to reduce the tendency of the acid to form an emulsion with oil within
the formation. This is particularly important, as the formation of an emulsion may block the
pores completely.
Suspending Agents
Most carbonate formations contain insoluble which can cause blocking in formation pores or
fractures if fines released by acid are allowed to settle and bridge.
Suspending agents are usually polymers or surfactants.
Clean-up after fracture acidizing can be accelerated by using a suspending agent.
Sequestering agents
Act on complex ions of iron and other metallic salts to inhibit precipitation as hydrochloric
acid spends. During acidizing, if ferric hydroxide is not prevented from precipitating, this
insoluble iron compound may be re-deposited near the well-bore and cause permanent
plugging. Citric acid acts as a cheating agent and is particularly useful when higher iron
concentrations are present.
Tubular goods are often coated with iron corrosion products which are soluble in HCI. If iron
is in the oxidised condition, it will precipitate when HCI extinguishes in the formation and
cause plugging of the rock pores. Other sources of iron that could cause plugging in
producing, water-flood, and disposal wells are iron sulphide and iron carbonate (Siderite).
Acid concentrations used in a well treatment are dependent on the amount of iron that may
be dissolved and on the formation temperature. HCI concentration may be increased from
the normal 15% to as high as 25% where higher concentrations of iron oxide scales are in
the well system. A normal acetic acid concentration of 10% is suggested for most
applications.
Lactic acid is also an effective sequestering agent but is not usually recommended where
the temperature is higher than 200F.
All sequestered acid solutions require a corrosion inhibitor to minimise acid reaction on
tubular goods. Adequate protection to 450F can be obtained with the correct inhibitor.
Well conditions should be thoroughly analysed to determine the most effective sequestered
acid solution. Iron precipitation can be prevented for as long as fifteen days.
Anti-Sludge Agents.
Some crude, particularly heavy asphaltic crude, form an insoluble sludge when contacted
with acid. The primary ingredients of a sludge are usually asphaltene; sludge may also
contain resins and paraffin waxes, high-molecular weight hydrocarbons, and formation fines
or clays.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
The addition of certain surfactants can prevent the formation of sludge by keeping colloidal
material dispersed. Sludge is more of a problem with high strength acids.
Corrosion inhibitors
Temporarily slow down the reaction of acid on metal. Corrosion inhibition time varies with
temperature, acid concentration, type of steel, and inhibitor concentration.
Both organic and inorganic corrosion inhibitors have application in acidizing. Some organic
inhibitors are effective up to the 300F range. Extenders have been developed to increase
the effective range to 400F. Inorganic arsenic inhibitor can be used up to at least 450F.
However, the use of arsenic in oil well treatments has been banned in many areas because
even small percentages of arsenic acts as a poison to refinery catalysts.
Alcohol
Normally methyl or isopropyl alcohol in concentrations of 5% to 30% by volume of acid, may
be mixed with acid to lower surface tension. The use of alcohol in acid may accelerate the
rate of well clean-up, particularly in dry gas wells.
Fluid loss Control Agents.

May be required to reduce acid leak-off in fracture acidizing. The preferred method of
selecting fluid loss control agents is to run fluid loss tests on cores from the formation to be
acidized.
Temporary Bridging Agents

These materials may be used as temporary bridging agents:
Benzoic acid is slowly soluble in water or oil and is available as finely divided
particles and as flakes.
Rock salt and Benzoic acid are sometimes used on a 50-50 basis.
Ball Sealers are effective.
15.4.4.5 CARBONATE ACIDIZING.

The objective of acidizing limestone and dolomite wells is to remove damage near the well
bore or to create linear flow channels by fracturing. Acid may also be used in sandstone
wells to dissolve carbonates in the form of cementing materials and scale. The time required
for a specified volume and concentration of HCI acid to be spent in a selected formation
under given conditions is defined as Acid Reaction Time.
A major problem in fracture acidizing of carbonate formations is that acids tend to react too
fast and to spend near the well bore.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Factors Controlling Acid Reaction Rate

Factors controlling the reaction rate of acid are:
1) Area of contact per unit volume of acid.
2) Formation temperature and pressure.
3) Acid concentration.
4) Acid type.
5) Physical and chemical properties of formation rock.
6) Flow velocity of acid.
Reaction time of a given acid is indirectly proportional to the surface area of

limestone or dolomite in contact with a given volume of acid. It is very difficult to
obtain significant acid penetration before spending during matrix treatments.
With a temperature increases, acid spends faster on carbonates, is often
necessary increase pumping rate during acid fracturing to place acid effectively
before it is spent.
An increase in pressure up to 500 psi will increase spending time for HCI. Above
this pressure, only a very small increase in spending time can be expected with
in creases in pressure.
As concentration of HCI increases, acid spending time increases because the
higher strength acid dissolves a greater volume of carbonate rock. This reaction
releases greater volumes of CaCl2 and CO2 which further retards HCI.
Physical and chemical composition of the formation rock is a major factor in
determining spending time. Generally, the reaction rate of limestone is more than
twice that dolomite.
Retardation of Acid
To achieve deeper penetration in fracture acidizing, it is often desirable to retard
acid reaction rate. This can be done by emulsifying, gelling, or chemically
retarding the acid. Also, HCI can be retarded by adding CaCl2, CO2,. Another
approach is to use naturally retarded acetic or formic acid.
Emulsification is the most used technique in fracture acidizing to retard reaction
rate of HCl in limestone and dolomite within the temperature range of 80F to
300F. Emulsified acid usually produces the longest spending time of any
retarded acid. It may also serve as a diverting agent between stages of
conventional acid.
Gelled acid provides minor retardation in the temperature range from 80F to
200F Gels usually have high viscosity and low friction loss and provide some
fluid loss reduction. Their primary application is as a diverting agent.
Chemically-Retarded Acid-Retardation of HCI is obtained by the addition of a
unique surfactant to the acid which causes oil-wet and water-wet spots. Oil,
injected ahead of/or with the acid, adheres to the oil-wet spots and reduces acid
reaction on the oil-wet areas of the fracture faces.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Acidizing Techniques for Carbonate Formation

Carbonate acidizing may be divided into three types:
Acidizing to remove or bypass formation damage including acid-soluble scales.
Matrix acidizing,
Fracture acidizing.
In actual practice, acidizing is usually divided into two categories based on pressure. Acid
jobs performed below fracture pressure are called matrix acidizing and are usually aimed at
damage removal. Fracture acidizing are usually performed to open new linear flow channels
to the well bore.
Matrix Acidizing Carbonate Formations

The primary purpose of matrix acidizing is to remove or bypass damage due to scale, mud,
clay, or hydrocarbon deposits, and to restore natural formation permeability. Matrix
treatments are usually performed by soaking, jetting or agitation, or circulation below fracture
pressure.
Fifteen percent HCI is normally used, with modifications as required. Acetic acid or acetic-
HCI mixtures are being employed to a greater extent for specific types of applications. Acetic
acid should be considered for temperatures above 250F because of effectiveness of
inhibitors at high temperature.
Additives Required in Most Matrix Acidizing Jobs

A surfactant should be selected to prevent emulsions of spent acid and to lower
interfacial and surface tension.
A corrosion inhibitor should be selected on the basis of treating temperature and
grade of steel tubing and casing.
Fluid loss control agents.
Diverting agents, or temporary bridging agents may be required to promote
uniform injection into long sections.
Sequestering agents may be employed to prevent the precipitation of FE(OH)2,
which is insoluble in spent acid.
Suspending agents are beneficial when considerable insoluble fines are released
by acidizing.
Fracture Acidizing Carbonate Formations

Fracturing of limestone or dolomite wells is designed to open linear flow path from the well
bore to some point within the reservoir. In acid fracturing, the objective is to develop
permanent flow channels. The alternate to fracture acidizing is to prop open the fracture
faces with sand or glass beads.
The choice between fracture acidizing and conventional hydraulic fracturing is often a
difficult decision. If both systems appear equally feasible to obtain desired fracture flow
capacity, then the decision may be based on comparative costs.
The major problems in obtaining fracture flow capacity in fracture acidizing are usually
inadequate flow paths and plugging of fracture channel with un-dissolved fines.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
The effectiveness of a fracture is a function of both its conductivity and penetration.

Created fracture area is proportional to fluid volume and inversely proportional to fluid loss
coefficient. Viscous fluids tend to provide wider fractures. Longer fractures are created by
higher pumping rates.
In some formations, regular or high strength acid fracturing may not provide sustained
production increases if large quantities of fines are released in the fracturing by the acid
treatment, thus blocking the fracture.
15.4.4.6 FRACTURE ETCHING IN HOMOGENEOUS CARBONATES.

Many relatively homogeneous limestone or dolomite formations etch uniformly so that
inadequate flow capacity is obtained following fracture acidizing. Productivity of fracture-
acidized wells may decline rapidly due to the fracture closure in cases where inadequate
channels are formed in the fracture faces, or fractures may close over a period of time due
to crushing of support pillars as the reservoir pressure declines.
To combat the fracture closure problem a high viscosity gel or emulsion, viscous preflush is
pumped ahead of the etching acid.
The viscous pad also reduces acid leak-off thus resulting in greater fracture length and
width.
One of the initial viscous pads used as a preflush has an apparent viscosity up to 20,000 cp.
However, viscosity may be tailored to break back to near I cp after the acid job is complete.
Various viscous gels are currently being used as a preflush in fracture acidizing.
Chemically Retarded Acid for Selective Etching.
The development of a partial oil-wetting and partial water-wetting surfactant acidizing system
allows the etching of permanent pillars to hold open the fractures and provide increased
fracture flow capacity.
Acetic-HCI Mixture for Matrix and Fracture Acidizing

Various acid combinations are employed as indicated by dynamic tests on cores. However, a
frequent combination is 15% HCl and 10% glacial acetic acid.
Advantages of Acetic-HCI mixture are:
1) For some limestone and dolomite, higher fracture flow capacity is obtained.
2) Acetic acid sequesters iron and prevents formation of ferric hydroxide, an insoluble
precipitate.
3) It reduces slugging and emulsification with spent acid.
4) It provides a higher acid strength with a lower grade of corrosion than an equivalent
strength of HCI.
5) Acetic acid with HCI maintains a low pH, thus minimising swelling of clays.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Foamed Acidizing
Foam is becoming widely used for acid fracturing low permeability liquid-sensitive carbonate
formations, especially gas wells. Foams employed are a dispersion of gas, normally
nitrogen, in acid with a small amount of surfactant foaming agent. Most jobs have been
made with HCI; however, HCI and organic acid combinations have been employed.
Apparent advantages of foamed acid over conventional acid fracturing are:
The low fluid loss inherent in foamed acidizing makes more acid available for
etching longer fractures.
There is less formation damage and wells clean up quicker.
The relatively high apparent viscosity of foamed acid results in wider fractures
and increases acid spending time because of lower area/volume ratio during
acidizing. Higher viscosity improves pumpability.
The built-in gas assist of 65 to 85% nitrogen in the spent acid provides rapid
cleanup, particularly in low pressure reservoirs.
Use of High Strength HCI Acid
High strength HCI is any concentration of HCI from about 20% to 35%.
The advantages of using high strength acid are:
Dolomite and some very dense limestone require high strength acid for
dissolution. Twenty-eight percent to 33% HCI is usually employed for these types
of formation.
In fracture acidizing, higher strength acid provides longer spending time,
resulting in longer etched fractures.
More CO2 is released per gallon of acid and less CO2 is dissolved in spent high
strength acid, thus providing more CO2 gas to assist in fracture clean-out after
the acid spends.
The disadvantages of high strength acid are:
Corrosion control is difficult and expensive at temperatures above 150F. High

strength steels and high stressed steels are more subject to cracking from em-
brittlement.
Laboratory tests indicate problems with precipitation of significant amounts of
insoluble tachyhydrite (CaMg2CI6 12H20) when treating dolomite with HCI
concentrations in excess of 20%. Field results indicate severe damage in some
wells treated with high strength acid.
In relatively dirty carbonate formations where appreciable fines are released by
acid treatment, high strength acid will release more fines per volume of acid. This
increases the probability of serious plugging of the formation matrix or etched
fracture.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Sludge and emulsion plugging is considerably more severe with high strength
acid. Many damage problems with both high and low strength acid fracturing are
overcome by over-flushing with a volume of water equal to the volume of acid
used in the treatment.
Summary of Use of High Strength Acid

Select the strength of acid required for each job. There is no particular
significance in the use of 28% HCI as compared with the use of higher or lower
strength acid.
Consider the use of high strength acid for acidizing limestone or dolomite along
with other available acids from the standpoint of cost, performance, corrosion
inhibition, and formation damage.
Special care should be exercised in selecting surfactants to prevent the
formation of emulsions and sludge.
A proper suspending agent has to be select.
15.4.4.7 SANDSTONE ACIDIZING

The primary reason to acidize sandstone wells is to increase permeability by dissolving clays
near the well bore. Clays may be naturally occurring formation clays or those introduced
from drilling, completion, or workover fluids.
Hydrofluoric acid (HF) can dissolve calcium carbonate, sand, clay, shale, and feldspars.
However, the only reason to use HF acid is to remove clay damage. Treating an undamaged
well with HF acid will provide a maximum increase in productivity of about 30%. If the depth
of clay damage is only a few inches, HF acid stimulation of a sandstone well can give
production increases equal to or greater than the damage ratio.
The basic hydrofluoric acid treatment for sand wells is usually 3% HF acid + 12% HCI.
Planning HF Acid Stimulation

The objective of most HF acidizing treatments is to eliminate damage around the well bore
due to:
Clay invasion of pores from drilling mud and well circulating or workover fluids
containing a small quantity of clay.
Emulsion blocking around the well bore may also be removed along with clay
blocking.
A matrix type treatment with injection below fracture pressure should be used.
In planning an HF acid treatment to remove clay damage, the primary factors to be
considered are the depth of damage and the weight percent of clay naturally occurring in the
formation plus the weight of clay that has been forced into the formation pores near the well
bore from drilling or workover fluids.
It may be assumed that reaction of live HF acid on clay is essentially instantaneous.
To achieve stimulation, the treatment should be designed to meet these requirements:
Dissolve clays and mud solids near the well bore.
Prevent the precipitation of insoluble in the formation.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Prevent the spent acid from emulsifying.

Leave the sand and remaining fines in a water-wet condition.
Additives for Sandstone Acidizing

Surfactants should be employed throughout the treatment to prevent emulsions,
to lower surface and interfacial tension, and to water-wet sand and clay.
Corrosion inhibitors should be selected for compatibility with surfactants
employed.
Mutual solvents, materials at least partially soluble in both water and oil, have a
special role in sandstone acidizing. The mutual solvent initially employed in
sandstone acidizing was ethylene glycol monobutylether (EGMBE) and is sold
under various trade names such as: Musol by Halliburton; U-66 by Dowell.
Halliburton now offers a new mutual solvent, a modified glycol ether, Musol A,
which is both a mutual solvent and a good water-wetting surfactant.
Diverting Agents, most of the diverting agents used in acidizing limestone are
applicable. However. rock salt (NaCl) cannot be used with HF acid.
Clay Stabilisation
As noted previously, an HF acid treatment is normally preceded by a volume of HCI to
dissolve carbonates. However, the action of HCI in the formation can dislodge clays and
other fines. If all of these released fines are not dissolved by HF acid, they may migrate
toward the well bore when the well is put back to production. Bridging at flow restrictions in
the pores of the sand can occur and cause production declines in a relatively short time. The
addition of certain cationic organic polymers to the acid and after-flush can minimise fines
migration and subsequent pore plugging.
Well Preparation Prior to Acidizing Sandstone Formations

Clean out debris from well bore.
Remove any paraffin or asphalt in tubing or well bore.
Remove any acid-soluble and acid-insoluble scales from tubing, well bore, and
perforations.
Re-perforate, if necessary, to insure entry of acid into desired intervals.
The Role of Mutual Solvents in Acidizing Sandstone

Gidleyl in 1970 reported many successful sandstone acidizing jobs using a mutual solvent,
ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, (EGMBE). However, the exact function of mutual solvents
in sandstone acidizing remained unclear.
The addition of 10% by volume of various mutual solvents to the solution of HCl indicated
that mutual solvents preferentially adsorb on silica, thereby allowing the surfactant to be
available for lowering surface tension.
All of the tests performed in the laboratory indicated that preferential adsorption of mutual
solvents on the sand and clay prevented the cationic emulsion breaker and cationic
corrosion inhibitor from being adsorbed on the clay. The cationic surfactants were then
available to maintain low surface tension, prevent emulsions, and provide corrosion
inhibition.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Mutual solvents can effectively prevent the adsorption of emulsion breakers and cationic
corrosion inhibitors on sand and clay.
Mutual solvents should be used with either HCI or HF-HCl treatments when cationic
emulsion breakers are used.
Mutual solvents should be used on acidizing of sandstone along with suitable surfactants,
unless the specific surfactant does not appreciably adsorb on sandstone or clay.
Mutual solvents can solubilize surfactants in acid thus increasing the effectiveness of
surfactants.
If mutual solvents are used in HCl or HF-HCI sandstone acidizing, the mutual solvent should
always be in the preflush along with a suitable surfactant.
Preflush for Sandstone Acidizing of Oil Wells

A preflush of HCI should normally be employed ahead of HF acid to insure that carbonates
are removed from the well bore and from the formation rock adjacent to the well bore.
Because most sandstones contain some carbonates as cementing material or as discrete
particles, it appears advisable to use an HCI preflush on essentially all jobs, with the percent
and volume of HCI depending on quantity of carbonates to be dissolved.
5% to 15% HCI plus surfactant (usually anionic-non-ionic), corrosion inhibitor, and 5% to
10% mutual solvent (optional) is normally used as Preflush
HF-HCI Acid Treatment for Oil Wells

Chemicals used: 3% HF + 12% HCl, surfactant, corrosion inhibitor, and 5 to 10% mutual
solvent (optional). Prepare acid with fresh water only.
Higher strength than 3% should usually be avoided to minimise formation collapse.
Effect of HF Acid on Sandstone Formation

HF acid dissolves feldspar, naturally occurring formation clays, and clays deposited from
drilling and completion fluids. It also reacts slowly on formation sand.
HF acid reacts rapidly on carbonates to produce an insoluble precipitate, calcium fluoride.
Etch Complete dissolution of cementing materials, normally silica, carbonates, or clays,
between sand grains will result in disintegration of the formation matrix.
Afterflush for Oil Well Treatments

Inject about 25 gal afterflush per foot of sand. Afterflush may be 5% to 10% HCl, 2%
Ammonium Chloride solution, clean filtered kerosene, diesel oil, or crude oil.
All fluid should contain about 0.1% water-wetting non-emulsifying surfactant.
The purpose of the afterflush is to act as a buffer between the HF acid and the pump down
fluid. Sufficient afterflush should be used to thoroughly displace the HF acid into the
formation.
HF acid spends very rapidly. Within one hour after afterflush is injected, swabbing,
pumping, or gas lifting of the spent acid should be initiated. This will reduce the
possibility of formation damage due to emulsion and insoluble precipitates.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.4.4.8 STIMULATION OF GAS WELLS, GAS INJECTION WELLS AND WATER INJECTION
WELLS
Treatment should follow the oil well stimulation procedure with these
modifications:
HCl should normally be used in the preflush or afterflush. Oil should not be
employed in the preflush or afterflush.
Gas wells should be swabbed or flowed within one hour after HF acid treatment.
It is not always necessary to swab water and gas injection wells following an HF
acid job. Within one hour after treatment, regular injection into water or gas
injection wells may be resumed.
15.4.4.9 IN-SITU HF GENERATING SYSTEM

In-situ acid generating system was developed to allow cleanup of deep damage due to clays
in sandstone formations. It involves pumping into the formation an aqueous solution of
ammonium fluoride and an organic ester such as methyl formate. With time the ester
hydrolyses to produce an organic acid such as formic acid. The organic acid reacts with
NH4F to form HF acid, which rapidly dissolves clay or siliceous fines present in the pores.
The system is applicable from 130F to 200F.
Wells should be shut in for a long period of time following treatment, with required shut-in
time decreasing with increased temperature.
Wells are brought back into production very slowly by gradually increasing choke size over a
period of several weeks.
15.4.4.10 FLUOBORIC ACID

Was developed as a retarded acid system for use on sandstone formations. It is designed to
reduce deep damage attributable to migration of clays and fines. The fluoboric acid not only
dissolves clays, but also immobilises clays and fines that are contacted but not dissolved.
Although the hydrolysis proceeds rapidly, the equilibrium allows only about 5% of the
available HF to exist at any one time. The slower reaction rate allows the fluoboric acid to
penetrate a greater distance into the formation before spending. After the available HF has
spent, the remaining hydroxyl fluoboric acid (HBF30H) slowly reacts with the clays "fusing"
(or bonding) them and other fines to one another and to the sand grains. As a result, fines
are stabilised against dispersion by incompatible fluids and mechanical dislodgement. The
"fusion'' reaction is not well-defined, but is attributed to the slow secondary reaction between
hydroxyl fluoboric acid and the clays.
Wells treated with clay acid showed little, if any, decline even after six to eight months; wells
after mud acid treatment had declined severely in less than six months.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.4.4.11 POTENTIAL SAFETY HAZARD IN ACIDIZING

Hydrogen sulphide, a poison gas, may be produced from the reaction of acid on sulphide
scale. Hydrogen sulphide smells like rotten eggs at low concentrations. High concentrations
can paralyse the olfactory nerves and prevent detection by smell of dangerous gas
concentrations. High concentrations can also paralyse other nerves in the respiratory
system.
Arsenic inhibitors should generally be avoided because of their toxicity and the
environmental protection problems.
Acetic anhydride, used in formulating acetic acid, produces vapours which are very irritating,
and direct contact will cause severe burns.
Dust from ammonium bifluoride used in making HF acid is very irritating. Contact with the
dust or active HF acid should be avoided.
Most additives used in acid are toxic to varying degrees. Chemicals contacting the skin
should be removed immediately by washing with soap and water.
15.5 STIMULATION PROCEDURES

15.5.1 INTRODUCTION
1) Stimulation Treatments will not be allowed to commence without an approved work
programme.
2) The Completions and Workover Superintendent will confirm that the well to be treated
is available and accessible. Should the rig be required then he will confirm its
availability and the manning requirements.
3) A pre-job meeting should be held well in advance of the actual operation. The purpose
of this meeting is to:
To discuss any special requirements or circumstances that may arise e.g.
procedures in the case of emergency, adverse weather conditions, chemical
safety data sheets, escape of hazardous treatment fluids, etc.
equipment, etc.
5) A brief written outline of previous relevant well treatments should be given to the
stimulation supervisor.
15.5.2 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Safety during stimulation treatments, in common with most operations in a potentially
dangerous environment, is largely dependent on sound operating procedures and effective
communication. The following points are essentially common sense and should be observed
during all phases of the operation.
Do not stand near treating lines, pumps, tanks, or any other treating equipment
during operations.
There should be no overhead lifts across or near the storage or mixing tanks.
working on top of the mixing tanks, as in the derrick.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
When treating the well with hazardous chemicals the relevant safety wear must
be worn by all personnel in the work area.
Before rigging up treating equipment a safety meeting will be held with all
relevant personnel. The topics to be covered will include, but not be limited to,
working with pressurised equipment, handling of heavy equipment, use of
hazardous chemicals, safe working areas, emergency procedures, protective
clothing, etc.
Only authorised personnel wearing adequate protective clothing will be allowed in
the vicinity of the equipment while an acid treatment is being performed.
Good communications between the pump operator, tank operator, rig floor,
wellhead area and coiled tubing or nitrogen operator where applicable must be
maintained throughout the treatment.
All personnel should be aware of the Emergency Procedures for coiled tubing
operations.
All work areas will be chained, or roped off, and warning signs placed at access
routes. The exact requirements will be specified on the work permits.
Fire hoses will be available in the areas where acid is to be used. The hoses will
be fully charged, so that they can be used immediately should a spill occur.
Acid showers and eye baths will be available should any personnel come into
contact with acid.
Sacks of soda ash or calcium carbonate will be available for absorbing small
spills of acid.
The acid tanks and pumping unit will be positioned as close to the well as
possible to minimise the length of pressurised lines.
15.5.2.1 CHEMICAL HANDLING

Safety Equipment
When handling or working in the vicinity of hazardous chemicals, suitable safety
equipment must be made available and used. The type of safety equipment
required will depend on the type of chemical or chemicals being handled.
As standard procedure when handling any fluid or powder that may have toxic,
harmful or irritant properties ensure that a chemical suite, chemical handling
gloves and chemical goggles or visor are worn. In addition when handling
powders ensure that a dust mask is worn.
When handling chemicals which produce fumes, ensure that the work area is
well ventilated and not enclosed. Operators should not be subjected to fume
levels which require the use of fume masks or respirators, however wear a fume
mask if necessary. It should be noted that not all fuming chemicals produce
noticeable odours, therefore refer to the chemical safety data sheet for
information regarding fumes.
When safety wear is contaminated with chemicals, the safety wear should be
changed at once to avoid contact with the contaminant later.
A shower should be located within easy reach of the operational area.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Safety Data Sheets

When operating with chemicals of any kind, ensure that the safety data sheet for
each chemical is available both at the safety meeting and in the work area.
During the safety meeting, the Safety Officer should be shown each of the safety
data sheets. The Safety Officer should analyse the sheet and point out the
hazards and handling instructions for each chemical. Details such as LD50s and
flash points do not need to be conveyed to the operators. It is the responsibility
of the Safety Officer to indicate to the operators items such as the flammability,
amount of fumes, general level of hazard, compatibility with other chemicals and
method of handling.
The control and disposal of spills and leakages of all the chemicals used should
be explained.
In the event of chemical injury the safety data sheets will be available to enable
the Medic and Safety Officer to determine the best action.
15.5.2.2 PRESSURE
During Stimulation operations pressure will be used to inject the fluid into the
wellbore and for the transfer of fluids between tanks and pumps.
The pressure will either be fluid pressure or energised fluid pressure. It is
important to note that when operating with energised fluid pressure, it is essential
to keep the operational personnel in safe areas when ever possible. The effect
of energised fluid pressure release is explosive.
It is essential that all pressure handling equipment carry up to date certification
for use in the pressure range specified. A pressure test and wall thickness
certificate is only proof that the equipment was acceptable on that date. Full
visual inspections should be carried out on all pressure handling equipment
during rig up. Any defects at all should result in the item being marked defective
and laid aside.
Follow the rig up and pressure test procedures rigorously for all items operating
under pressure. Any leakages should be dealt with by replacing the defective
item, followed by a re-test.
Ensure that all operational personnel in the work area are made fully aware of
the pressure hazard and are told to keep clear of the area when not actually
performing duties.
15.5.3 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
Note: All permits will be issued in accordance with the Installation Permit to
Work System.
No work can be performed without an authorised work programme, and the

relevant work permits.
The Completions and Workover Superintendent will confirm that the well to be
worked on is available, and accessible. Should the rig be required then he will
confirm its availability, and the manning requirements.
The Completions and Workover Superintendent will ensure that all relevant
equipment and materials are on site in a timely manner.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
The Area Authorities, together with the Safety Officer will make an inspection to
ensure that there is no other work going on which may affect the operation.
Only equipment with valid test certificates will be use for rigging up and during
the operation.
All work will be conducted according to the Permit to Work System.
All permits will be revalidated at the end of each shift.
The stimulation company will be provided with well details, and the nature of the
operations.
The stimulation company will provide details of the equipment and chemicals
required. This will include dimensions and weights of individual items, together
with data sheets for all chemicals that are to be used.
The stimulation company will also provide details of their quality assurance and
safety procedures. These procedures will be approved by the Company.
15.5.4 RIG-UP PROCEDURES
15.5.4.1 EQUIPMENT PREPARATION AND SITING

The stimulation company will have a rig up procedure that has been approved by
the Company in advance. The stimulation equipment may be rigged up on the
pipe deck or skid deck.
The equipment will be situated such that the length of pressurised lines, and
lines carrying acid, are minimised.
All manifolds and valves will be within easy reach of the stimulation crew
members.
All lines will be pressure tested with water according to the values stated in the
stimulation programme.
Where possible the pump unit operator will have an unobstructed view of the rig
floor, or wellhead area, and of his tank operators.
Personnel involved in the operation will carry radios at all times.
15.5.4.2 EQUIPMENT RIG-UP

When rigging up equipment ensure that all pressure operating items carry valid
test certificates.
Inspect all items for wear or damage and do not use any defective items.
Ensure equipment is rigged-up with sufficient clear escape routes.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.5.4.3 PRESSURE TESTING

Pressure testing should be performed with all lines and spaces to be tested full
of water.
Testing with nitrogen should be avoided.
Pressure testing will take place to 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure.
Note: The pressure testing will be witnessed by the Well Operations Supervisor.
Pressure tests will be monitored for 15 mins on a chart recorder. The chart will
be labelled and stored for reference.
The PRV is to be isolated during pressure test.
15.5.4.4 TREATING LINES

Inspect all treating lines thoroughly. Mark and set aside defective treating
equipment.
Ensure treating line runs are kept as short and direct as possible without causing
unnecessary obstruction.
When treating at high rates and as a general practice, ensure sufficient flexibility
in the treating line by incorporating chicksan bridges in the line. Cavitation and
high pump rates can stress lines and back off unions by vibration unless the line
is flexible.
Lines should be tied together using a steel cable and clamps. Each individual
line, swing or other treating pipe should be clamped to the cable.
The lines should also be tied off where possible to fixed objects such as pad
eyes.
Ensure that each fluid or nitrogen pump is fitted with a check valve. A check
valve should also be fitted to the treating point, i.e. coiled tubing reel, well head,
kill line.
Check valves should be fitted with bleed-off needle valves.
15.5.4.5 RIGGING DOWN

Rigging down will only take place once the Workover Superintendent or company
representative has given permission.
The existing Hot Work permit may be used if still valid otherwise a new Cold
Work permit may be obtained.
15.5.5 TREATMENT PROCEDURES

The parameters for any job will be dependent on several factors:
Capacity of the surface equipment
Injectivity of the formation
Formation pressure
Formation breakdown pressure.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
A pumping schedule will be prepared in advance by the service company. If during the
stimulation treatment there are any significant variations from this schedule the job will be
shut down and the cause investigated. If necessary the treatment will be circulated out of
the well, and a revised treatment performed.
Pressures
If a matrix acid treatment is to be carried out an injection test will be performed before any
treatment. This test will establish the injectivity of the formation and will give a baseline on
which to provide a preliminary estimate of the treatment effectiveness.
The maximum allowable pump pressure will be determined during the design phase of the
job. Normally the limiting factor will be the formation breakdown pressure. It is normally
undesirable to fracture the formation while performing a matrix acid treatment. Therefore a
maximum allowable surface pressure will be clearly stated in the stimulation programme.
Normally this pressure will include a safety factor.
Pump Rates
Pump rates will be clearly stated in the individual stimulation programme. The rate of
dissolution will depend on the nature of the deposits, and the speed at which the acid is
being pumped. Some treatments will require a soak period, and a slow pump rate may be
required. Other treatments may require rapid pump rates to ensure that any reaction
products are removed quickly.
15.5.5.1 MATRIX ACIDISING

Matrix acidising is commonly used in mud or clay damaged sandstone formations. Mud
damage is due to the bentonite in the mud coating the formation face, or invading the
formation. Normally this type of damage is shallow, i.e. little more than an inch or so deep.
15.5.5.2 FRACTURE ACIDISING

Fracture acidising is not recommended in sandstone reservoir units. Success of fracture
acidising depends on the creation of a conductive fracture. HCl does not react with
sandstone. HF does react with sandstone, but large quantities of acid and excessive contact
times are required before significant quantities of sandstone are dissolved. Therefore it is
unlikely that adequate fracture flow capacity would be obtained economically by reaction of
the acid.
15.5.5.3 ACID WASH

Acid washes are used primarily for cleaning up of scaled tubulars. The best method for acid
washing is to use coiled tubing to spot the acid precisely across the area to be treated. The
acid may then be left to soak for a pre-determined period, and then displaced out of the well.
The soak time will be dependent on the volume of scale to be removed, acid concentration,
and acid volume.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
15.5.5.4 SCALE DISSOLVER

HCl can be used for dissolving carbonate based scales, but proprietary blends of scale
dissolver are required for sulphate based scale. The types of treatment that can be
implemented are:
Spot the dissolver, and allow it to soak before back flushing the well
Run coiled tubing and jet the scale with dissolver.
The particular method used will depend on the nature of the scale in the well. The methods
for the placement of acid are given below. The method to be used will be dependent on
prevailing circumstances. As no two jobs will be the same the procedures given below are
guidelines only. The actual procedures will be dependent on the nature of the work to be
performed.
15.5.5.5 BULLHEAD
Bullheading acid can be potentially wasteful of the amount of acid used for a treatment. It is
possible that some of the acid will react with scale and other products deposited on the
inside of the tubing. These products may then be pushed into the formation resulting in
damage.
Back-flushing of spent acid may be more difficult and time consuming if bullheading is used.
An advantage with bullheading is that high rates can be pumped and rig up is more
straightforward.
15.5.5.6 COILED TUBING

This method is preferred to bullheading as placement of the acid is more precise than if it
was bullheaded into place. Use of coiled tubing also minimises the amount of contamination
in the preflush and so saves time and chemical costs. Should a job go wrong (e.g. formation
plugs up) it is easier to remove unspent acid from the well by straight forward circulation.
Clean up is also more effective with coiled tubing, as the well can be lifted with nitrogen if the
reservoir pressure is low.
A disadvantage with using coiled tubing is that the displacement rate may be restricted.
15.5.5.7 ASPHALTENE AND WAX/DISSOLVERS

Asphaltenes and waxes are high molecular weight compounds that can occur in some crude
oils. The presence of these compounds can either cause an increase in the viscosity of the
crude (reducing vertical lift performance) or can be deposited when the temperature is
reduced. Deposition may occur in the production conduit and/or topside processing
facilities. Such compounds can be dissolved by introducing an aromatic solvent (e.g. TROS
94-19) in the production conduit, either by bullheading or by placement with coiled tubing.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
16. SNUBBING/PULLING UNIT
16.1 SNUBBING UNIT

Snubbing unit is used for pulling out of the well or running into the well the completion string
without well killing and avoiding formation damage due to workover fluid.
All the snubbing unit weight, including the weight of the string, is supported by the well head
Pipes are pulled out of the well or run in the well using a stripper & BOP system to obtain an
external seal around the pipes.
During operations, pipes are plugged-in by a retrievable inside plug and must be filled up
with fluid to prevent collapsing.
In this way, two barriers acting at the same time, are all ways guaranteed: one for the
internal of the tubing (a wire line plug set in the pipe before running in hole) and one for the
external of the tubing (BOP and Stripper).
Only as an example, following is a list of possible operations:
Pulling and running the completion string.
Fishing stuck or lost tools.
Running concentric completions inside existing production strings.
Spotting and pumping acid or cement.
Well abandonment.
Well that cannot be killed because of heavy crossflow between perforations.
Washing out inside stuck or plugged drill pipe and DST string.
Through tubing gravel pack.
Milling and washing below production tail pipe.
Working string to perform well clean up.
Perforation by TCP.
Sand consolidation.
Light drilling, milling operations that may be required while fishing.
Snubbing unit configurations are very flexible and can be adapted to the requirement of
different jobs for example, in a killed well, it is possible to use its hydraulic lifting system for
running in/pulling out of the well the tubing string.
The BOP stack can contain either single couple or double couple (or even more) pipe rams,
depending on well head pressure, well conditions, size of pipe to be run and type of work to
be performed.
Not Feasible operations: are those relevant to ESP completion, completion string with
down hole safety valve, control line operated. The pipe rams could not be operated without
damaging the electrical cable or the control line.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
16.2 PULLING UNIT

Running in/Pulling out of the well the completion string using a pulling unit, killing of the well
with a workover fluid is mandatory.
The peculiarities of a pulling unit are:
to have a hydraulic jack that may be used to rig up a mast on a skid base, not
supported by the well head.
the string may be lifted by a pulley-block, electrically driven on a rack with
standard bails and elevators.
the lifting capacity can be up to 300,000 lbs and it can handle up to 51/2 or 7-32
lb/ft by standard elevator.
a Top Drive system is available.
These peculiarities allow its use similar to a standard workover rig, but with the big
advantage to occupy a smaller area and to offer a faster move in and out from the well to be
workovered.
Only as an example, following is a list of possible operations:
Mill out bridge plugs or cement plugs left in hole for security reasons. Possibility
to run scraper or brushes to clean the casing.
Replace the fluid in hole by the filtrated completion fluid.
Supporting the coiled tubing unit for casing perforation job or acid wash job.
BOP system for controlling a down hole pressure of 11,500 psi at 4,400 m, with
three pipe rams and one bug preventer.
31/2 Drill Pipe can be handled to run bit and scraper.
Mud system with the capability to double the well capacity.
Pumps, lines and injector head able to replace the fluid in hole with filtrate brine.
Filtration package and all the other system could be modular in order to optimise
the area of operations.
16.3 WORKOVER PREPARATION

Snubbing unit operations will not be allowed to commence without an approved work
programme.
The Completions and Workover Superintendent will confirm that the well to be workovered is
available and accessible.
A pre-job meeting should be held in advance of the actual operation. The purpose of this
meeting is to:
Discuss the operations programme.
Discuss any special requirements or circumstances that may arise, e.g.
procedures in the case of emergency, adverse weather conditions, ID of string,
presence of big tools OD, escape of hazardous treatment fluids, etc.
equipment, etc.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
A completion diagram of the well must be available. This should include the casing data,
tubing shoe, packers, perforations, etc., as well as KOP and maximum angle of deviation. A
brief written outline of previous relevant well operations should be given to the snubbing unit
supervisor.
The Completions and Workover Superintendent will ensure that all relevant equipment and
materials for the job are on site in a timely manner.

Safety during snubbing unit operations, in common with most operations in a potentially
dangerous environment, largely depends on sound operating procedures and effective
communication. The following points are, essentially, common sense and should be
observed during all phases of the operation:
1) Channels of communications and responsibilities: good communications among all the
involved personnel must be maintained during the whole operation.
2) Implication of adverse weather conditions, e.g. very low ambient temperature, snows
storm shall address to apply the adequate protection.
3) Protection must be provided for high pressure injection flow lines, including also how to
anchor them in the correct system.
4) The gin poole must be certified adequate to the load to be lifted during the operations.
5) Before rigging up the snubbing unit, a safety meeting will be held with all relevant
personnel. The topics to be covered will include, but are not be limited to:
Working with pressurised equipment
Handling of heavy equipment
Use of hazardous chemicals
Safe working areas
Emergency procedures
Protective clothing
6) All personnel should be aware of the Emergency Procedures for snubbing unit
operations.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
16.5 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
Note: All permits will be issued in accordance with the Permit to Work System.
1) No operations can begin without the relevant work permits.

2) Obtaining and distribution of the permits is the responsibility of the Contractors
Representative.
3) All permits will be revalidated at the end of each shift.
4) Obtain the relevant Permits to Work in accordance to the PTW system.

5) The Contractor Representative will ensure that all relevant work permits have been
signed and distributed, and inform the Well Operations Supervisor that this has been
done.
6) The Area Authorities/Safety Officer may, if required, make an inspection to ensure that
there is no other work going on, which may affect the operation.
7) The Well Operations Supervisor will confirm the well status and accept the well
handover certificate from the Production Supervisor.
8) Certain operations may require lifting of heavy equipment over live wells. Wherever
possible this will be avoided. If circumstances make the lift unavoidable, then the
Production Supervisor will be informed. He will decide if any live well needs to be shut
in and if scaffolding of other protective structure needs to be erected.
9) Only equipment with valid test certificates will be used for rigging up and during the
operation.
10) All well control equipment must have current certification of conformity issued by the
certifying authority.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
16.6 SNUBBING UNIT RIG UP PROCEDURES

The snubbing unit is directly connected to the X-mas tree to perform through tubing
operations.
In case of completion string to be pulled out of hole, the snubbing unit will be connected to
the tubing spool after removing the X-mas tree. Figure 16-1 shows the BOP stack, stripper
and slips installed to perform the lifting operation.
Each basic phase is indicated by the description under each picture.
Fig. 1
Figure 16-1 Snubbing Unit Pulling sequence

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Next Fig. 2 and 3 show the components of the unit istalled for the operation.
Next Fig. 4 shows the complete BOP stack including the extension between upper and lower
working BOP. This will allow room to contain equipment included in the completion/working
string.
Next Fig. 5 shows the BOP stack including the stripper.
Figure 16-2 Snubbing System Connected to Wellhead

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Figure 16-3 Snubbing Unit Lifting System
Figure 16-4 Snubbing Unit BOP Stuck

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Figure 16-5 Tool Joint through BOP

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
16.6.1 Equipment Preparation

1) Ensure that the equipment has been visually checked for defects prior to starting rig-
up.
2) Working Permit should be obtained and the equipment run and tested, prior to the
commencement of the operation, to check equipment function and confirm the
operation of the shut down systems on the power pack.
3) The Well Operations Supervisor should ensure that:
The work area is suitably guarded (e.g. safety barriers, safety signs, etc.).
Any scaffolding is secure, safe and properly certified.
The crane operator and roustabouts are aware of the equipment weights and
hazards (e.g. liquid nitrogen or acid, etc.).
All lifts should have tag lines attached.
16.6.2 Snubbing Unit Rig-Up

Refer to Fig. 1 to 5 for rig up arrangement.
1) Confirm that the X-mas tree has been de-pressurised and that its controls have been
isolated from the main control system.
2) Remove the swab cap and inspect the sealing areas (ring joint).
3) Move the snubbing unit equipment to well site, including snubber base, hydraulic
pistons, gin poole and working platform and install on X-mas tree, Figure 16-3.
1) Move the single BOP, extension and stripper to the well site and install them as per
Figure 16-4 e Figure 16-5.
16.6.3 BOP stack and extension pressure test

As the BOP system is a pressure vessel connected above the X-mas tree or above the
tubing spool flange, and subjected to the wellhead shut in pressure, it is essential that the
following tests will be performed:
1) BOP connected to the X-mas Tree to perform operations inside the completion
string.
With master valve (or swab valve) and blind rams closed, pressure test the BOP
stacks connection to the X-mas tree at the X-mas tree shut in wellhead
pressure. Bleed off pressure and open blind rams.
Run working string equipped with special large shoulder coupling/plug on its
bottom and with niddle valve connection on top (fill up working string with water
or water/glycol during winter season).
Place the coupling/plug below emergency pipe rams and pressurise inside
working string.
Close emergency pipe rams and pressure test through X-mas tree wing valve at
shut in wellhead pressure to test lower working pipe rams. The large shoulder of
coupling/plug will prevent the pressure to push the working string out of the lower
pipe rams.
Close upper working pipe rams and pressure test between the upper and lower
working pipe rams. Bleed off pressure and open upper working pipe rams.
Pressurise between lower working pipe rams and stripper to test stripper at shut
in wellhead pressure.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Bleed off pressure, including inside working string and below lower working pipe
rams. The test is complete.
2) BOP stack connected to the tubing spool flange for completion pulling out
The following shall be considered for the BOP pressure test:
Before disconnecting the X-mas tree and connecting the BOP stack to the tubing
spool flange, install back pressure valve extractor on top X-mas tree, then run
and set a two way check valve in the tubing hanger.
Bleed off well head pressure to test the check valve sealing, then disconnect
extractor form X-mas tree.
Disconnect the X-mas tree seal flange from the tubing spool and install the BOP
stack on tubing spool.
Close BOP blind rams and pressure test the BOP flange connection to the tubing
spool at a pressure equal to shut in wellhead pressure. Bleed off pressure and
open blind rams.
Continue BOP pressure test as per the above steps.
General note for pressure testing:
Use pressure values equal to the shut in wellhead pressure

Test shall last 15 minutes.
0 to100 psi pressure drop indicates valid test.
16.7 OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR A LIVE WELL

Before starting an operation inside the completion string in a live well, the following points
have to be checked:
The unit is rigged up vertically.
The guy wires have equal and enough tension.
All snubbing unit functions are working correctly.
All BOP and valves are working correctly.
BOP accumulator skid remote control works correctly.
Power pack system works correctly.
Tubulars to be run are clean and free of scale either inside and outside.
The stabbing valve is in the work basket in open position.
Enough spares are available for the job, i.e. stripper rubbers, slip dies, BPV and
its spares, BOP seals and rams, pump down plug seals, etc..
A plan for shut down and emergencies has been discussed and understood by
all the involved personnel.
The pressure test of all surface lines and manifolds must be performed before
making the BOP stack pressure test.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
16.7.1 Introducing a working string inside the Xmas Tree

This operation is referred to a working string run in hole (RIH) to perform a special job. The
indications may be considered as general and applicable to any operation made on a live
well. The following main points should be considered:
1) A wire line check valve is installed in the tail pipe of the string (down word circulation
allowed) and pressure tested before RIH.
2) A piston effect (against the tubing external area and plugged by the check valve) will
tend to push out of hole the string while trying to push in by means of the slips, moved
by the hydraulic pistons. It is mandatory to install the correct bite on the slip, i.e.
suitable to the tubing OD. The use of clamp or dog collar below the slip will guarantee
the correct operation.
3) A landing nipple positioned three feet above the one used for the check valve must be
present. It will allow dropping a hydraulic plug in case check valve leaks while RIH.
4) Swab valve must be already in closed position.
5) Insert the pipe through the stripper rubber and insert/secure its seal. Position top of
landing nipple, containing check valve, just below the lower working pipe rams and
close them on tubing.
6) Get upper slips working on tubing and secure by adding a clamp below them. Equalise
pressure between below swab valve and the chamber between swab valve-lower
working pipe rams, then open swab valve. This is one of the most delicate phases of
the operation, i.e. check the slips and stripper are correctly working. Start to snub in
the tubing by hydraulic pistons through stripper and BOP. Fill up the string with water
to compensate the external tubing collapsing pressure, while RIH.
7) Continue RIH, operating as per Figure 16-1, i.e. by pushing down the string until
reaching the balance point. After this point the slips will start to work in the opposite
direction, becoming necessary to hang the string while RIH.
8) If during RIH, too high pressure is judged acting against tubing, flowing the well will
drop the pressure or the use of heavier fluid inside the pipe may be considered.
9) If before starting the operation, too high pressure is judged present at well head, and if
the well conditions allow, heavy fluid may be directly circulated outside the working
string to decrease the well head pressure (WHP).
10) When the working string reaches down hole, if the workover operation requires direct
circulation, this will be performed by pumping through down hole check valve. If
deemed necessary, the check valve may be retrieved by wire line operation.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
16.7.2 Pulling a working string out of Xmas Tree

Pulling the string out of hole of a live well will be made by using the lifting equipment in the
opposite direction of when RIH. However some additional points have to be considered:
1) Have the string displaced to clean fluid (brine or water) by direct circulation before
POOH (to have the string completely hydrocarbon free).
2) Install a down hole wire line check valve, if not already present. Bleed off the residual
internal string pressure.
3) Be sure to know the exact composition of the string, to avoid running the risk of having
the string pushed out of hole by the pressure, when reaching the weight/pressure
(piston effect) equilibrium or when the bottom of the string is approaching the well
head.
16.7.3 Emergency shut down (ESD)

In case of ESD be sure to have a dedicated hydraulic power pack to operate the BOP. Have
also available in the work basket the stabbing valve open and with the same thread of the
tubing.
Only day light operations shall be allowed (12 hour max.). Out of this period the following
precautions are to be taken:
Install stabbing closed valve on filled tubing.
Use clamp on tubing together with slips
Close and lock pipe rams.
16.7.4 Operations in gas wells

Sweet gas
If a dry gas well has to be workovered, special care is required to avoid hydraulic oil leaks or
grease/dope going in contact with gas leak. Any of these mixture developing around the
stripper rubber may become potentially dangerous.
Use injected water to lubricate the stripper to have a good seal around the pipe.
Sour gas
Extreme care is required to prevent any gas leak around the pipe. The following precautions
shall be adopted:
Use double BOP system, to avoid the the risk of H2S for the personnel in case
changement of element was required.
Use H2S service top quality equipment.
Air supply and masks to be available on deck crew.
Only day light hours shall be worked, to ensure good visibility for maintenance
and repair.
Do not work when wind is not present.
Only essential personnel be present.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
16.7.5 H2S Considerations

When working on wells which are known H2S producers, or those in which H2S is
anticipated, ensure that hydrogen sulphide detectors and portable breathing apparatus sets
are available and on site (see Well Control Policy Manual STAP-P-1-M-6150).
Safety aspects of well operations in the presence of H2S must be addressed in the pre-job
safety meeting. This applies to all wells where the presence of H2S is known or anticipated.
When H2S bearing wells have to be entered for snubbing unit workover purposes, the Xmas
tree has to be flushed with water/glycol to remove all traces of H2S prior to rigging up on the
well. All personnel involved in these operations will wear automatic H2S detectors and be
equipped with self contained breathing apparatus.
16.8 PULLING THE COMPLETION STRING OUT OF HOLE

16.8.1 Snubbing Unit Operation
This operation is referred to a completion string with or without Sub Surface Safety Valve,
but in any case without control line (CL). The presence of a CL should be dangerous for the
pipe rams sealing, furthermore the pipe rams shut in should brake the CL itself.
Here we consider two cases (as example) of leaving the hydrocarbon inside the well, in front
of the perforations. The purpose of the workover is to change the completion string.
1) The completion is made by a monobore system. A landing nipple seat has been
forecast below a Polish Bore Receptacle (PBR). The completion string will be POOH
together with the seal assembly inside the PBR.
2) The completion is made by tubing and retrievable packer. The completion fluid in the
annulus is light brine to prevent solid settling on packer. No sliding side door is present
down hole, but two landing nipples (10 m gap between them) have been forecast near
the packer.
Before disconnecting X-mas tree to install BOP stack, the following has to be made:
Case 1
1) Assuming no scale or paraffin are present inside tubing wall, run and set a wire line
plug below PBR. (In case of scale presence, tubing washing by coiled tubing should be
performed before RIH wire line plug).
2) Bleed down 1,000 psi (in two steps) to check for wire plug sealing.
3) RIH tubing puncher to perforate tubing near PBR. Do this maintaining over pressure
tubing to annulus at the moment of perforating. POOH tubing puncher.
4) Reverse circulate while delivering hydrocarbon to the flare. Continue operation until no
hydrocarbons are present inside the tubing.
5) Leave adequate hydrostatic pressure above down hole plug.
6) Install two way check valve in the tubing hanger, now ready for X-mas tree
disconnection and BOP stack installation.
7) At the end of BOP pressure test, the completion string is ready for POOH, after
removing the two way check valve from the tubing hanger and connecting the work
string to the tubing hanger itself.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Case 2
1) Assuming no scale or paraffin is present on tubing wall, run and set a wire line plug in
the lower landing nipple. (In case of scale presence, tubing washing by coiled tubing
should be performed before RIH wire line plug).
2) Bleed down 1,000 psi (in two steps) to check wire plug sealing.
3) RIH tubing puncher to perforate tubing just above plug. Do this maintaining over
pressure tubing to annulus at the moment of perforating. POOH tubing puncher.
4) Reverse circulate (by pumping light brine) while delivering hydrocarbon to the flare.
Continue operation until no hydrocarbon are present inside the tubing.
5) RIH a second wire line plug (check valve, down word circulation allowed) and set it
above the first one. Pressurise annulus to check for plug sealing.
6) Install two way check valve in the tubing hanger, now ready for X-mas tree
disconnection and BOP stack installation.
7) At the end of BOP pressure test, the completion string is ready for POOH, after
removing the two way check valve from the tubing hanger and connecting the work
string to the tubing hanger itself.
8) Make up stabbing valve open to the work string. When packer unsetting, the annulus
fluid will go in contact with perforations and hydrocarbon will tend to go up. Pressure
will be present outside tubing, on stripper. If the down hole plug seals, no flow will be
monitored from the stabbing valve. On the contrary, further operations will be required
before POOH.
9) POOH completion string by stripping through BOP and stripper system.
16.8.2 Pullig Unit Operation

As already reported above, the pulling unit can perform the workover on killed well, like a
standard workover rig.
So case 1 of prag. 16.8.1 can develop as already described, or by killing the well, i.e. the
completion fluid will contact the perforations with risk of formation damage.
With case 2 of the same paragraph, the completion string POOH will require first the killing
of the well.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17. WORKOVER
17.1 INTRODUCTION
A workover is an Operation to be performed on a well that for a certain amount of time will
be shut in to production, causing a production loss to the company. A lot of different aspects
have to be evaluated to select the most convenient compromise in term of cost and
efficiency.
Natural urgency of restoring maximum achievable production in a well which for some
reasons is cutting down production, shall contrast with the economic evaluation of its
schedule planning operations. Generally, speaking, unless for special reasons like
jeopardizing well safety, it is a relatively urgent problem to solve and can be scheduled in a
convenient and possibly optimized string, especially with respect to rig availability and its
best utilization.
17.2 CONDITIONS REQUIRING A WORKOVER

Following there is a list of motivations which would recommend a workover.
17.2.1 Mechanical Problems

Tubing collapsed or leaking.
Production casing broken or damaged.
Tubing obstructed (sand, paraffin, asphaltene scales).
Packer leaking.
Gravel pack damaged.
17.2.2 Reservoir Problems

Sand movement.
Water coning.
Gas coning.
Perforations plugged.
Emulsion and water blocking.
Clay swelling and silt problems.
17.2.3 Well Conversion

This is applicable to production wells.
Artificial lift installation.
Water injection.
Gas injection.
Storage wells.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.3 WORKOVER PLANNING

The minimum steps required for a convenient planning are as follows:
Evaluation of possible Additional Reserves recovery or of incremental sweep
efficiency.
Preparation of Detailed Workover Programme and relevant Budget,
Overall Economics with sensitivity to alternative solutions.
A complete and exhaustive well analysis will be performed to evaluate all type of possible
workovers.
17.3.1 Types of possible Workovers
17.3.1.1 RECOMPLETION
This intervention is performed when:
Well problems heavily reduce the expected production.
The jeopardized minimum safety requirements need to be restored.
The operation involves the complete pull out of the completion string to eliminate the
problem. The preparation of the workover programme will address the decision of using a:
High cost service rig.
Pulling Unit.
Snubbing unit.
17.3.1.2 HOLE CLEANING

Intervention that is performed when the rising of the rat-hole sediments obstructs totally or
partially the perforations.
The intervention can be performed by coiled tubing unit, or by Pulling/Snubbing Unit, if the
down hole deposit cannot be removed with the coiled tubings carried tools.
17.3.1.3 PERFORATED INTERVAL PARTIALIZATION, EXCLUSION OR CHANGEMENT

This type of workover is required to:
Eliminate or reduce the production of undesirable fluids (water or gas) from a
perforated interval.
Exclude a level no longer economically producing.
Perforate new intervals.
The intervention could be performed with coiled tubing unit, electric line, or service rig
(Pulling Unit), if the operation includes the completion pulling out of hole.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
A.) Coiled Tubing Unit

It can be utilized for through tubing operations like:
To spot cement plugs or sand plugs.
To set inflatable bridge plugs (IBP). However, limitations due to the maximum
differential pressure to which they can withstand may be due to the ratio between
OD while running and maximum inflated OD. Another limitation of this technique
is the tendency of these tools to slide inside the casing due to differential
pressure.
Setting of IBP. Cement cup displaced on IBP top, shall ensure seal and
anchoring integrity.
Lower zones abandoning by setting an IBP and squeezing cement.
CT and electric wire line run in hole together with the possibility of using CCL to
set IBP at the correct depth.
B.) Electric Line

A wire line set bridge plug can be run in hole. The correct setting depth will be determined by
CCL utilization. The dumping of cement, by cement bailer, will increment sealing and
resistance to differential pressure. However, limitations may be due to hole deviation, while
running in hole, and also to the bridge plug itself, that has to pass from a small OD, suitable
to run through the tubing ID, to the largest casing ID.
C.) Service Rig

This is the most expensive workover operation and is used when it is necessary to remove
the completion. This operation may be done by standard workover rig or by pulling unit,
depending mainly on availability. The cost comparison addresses the use of pulling unit.
Basic activities are:
Well killing.
Extraction of the existing completion.
Setting of cement retainer above the zone that needs to be excluded, squeezing
or cement plugging across the perforations.
Re-completion.
17.3.1.4 PRODUCTION CASING RECONDITIONING

Production casing could be damaged for:
Mechanical reasons (excessive pull during the pre-tensioning, manufacturing
defects).
Flow reasons (production through tubing-annulus, leakage in the production
string and presence of corrosive fluids in the annulus).
Localized wear due to some devices working in the same point for long time.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
The casing repair could be done in one of the following system, depending on production
casing problem:
Back-off: If the production casing has the problem included in a non cemented
portion up to the well head, try to recover the part of damaged casing by using
the electrically fired back-off system to unscrew a casing connection below the
damaged portion. New casing will be run and made up to the casing in hole.If
back-off doesnt allow the casing recovery, use casing cutter.
Internal casing patch: It may be used If there are casing holes or casing
breaks. It is made by a rippled metallic jacket dressed externally by fibreglass
and resin that has the function of hydraulic sealing, which is run in position and
then swaged to the casing ID. Run in section of 40 ft long, it reduces the ID by
about 0,3.
17.3.1.5 SAND CONTROL

The sand movement is extremely harmful for the well productivity (down hole deposits/plugs)
and for the down hole tools (erosion).
Principal causes for sand production are:
Loose formation sand reservoirs.
Water production (which reduces intergranular cement).
Reservoir depletion (which causes formation collapse).
Control methods:
Flow rate reduction (it causes a reduction of the velocity in perforation tunnels
or in the sand face). Lately, same effect has been obtained with long
horizontal drains. Longer exposed formation to production reduces the
hydrocarbon velocity to enter the well.
Mechanical methods: Filters, Gravel pack, Sand consolidation.
See chapter 6, herein for Gravel Pack Procedures.
17.3.2 Well Analysis

Before starting any workover programme, the following well analysis shall be carried out.
17.3.2.1 ANALYSIS OF WELL PRODUCTIVITY HISTORY

The following data needs to be examined:
Historical production data.
Abnormal pressure/rates trend.
Presence of unexpected fluids (formation water, gas).
Presence of sand.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.3.2.2 ACTUAL WELL STATUS

Following data should be available from the well file:
1) Fluid Composition (last PVT Report): to check for paraffin, asphaltene, scale or
indication of corrosive fluids.
2) Well Status Report, to extract information on:
Type of completion.
Releasing values for packers and anchors.
Completion scheme (including tubing tally).
Production casing (including casing tally).
Gravel pack configuration if any.
CPI log and production casing CBL, VDL, CET.
17.3.2.3 RESERVOIR PROGNOSIS

Following are Reservoir information to be discussed and agreed with the Reservoir
Department, before starting any planning:
Water coning (possible effect of Water cut abnormal increase)
Gas coning (possible effect of GOR abnormal increase)
Near well bore damage (possible effect of PI reduction)
Perforations plugging (possible effect of PI reduction)
Rate decrease (possible effect of tubing scaling up)
Need for partialization/perforation extension
17.3.2.4 LOGISTIC PROBLEMS EVALUATION

Area preparation.
Transports.
Waste treatment and disposal management.
Environmental safety requirements.
Equipments storage and handling.
17.3.2.5 RIG SELECTION CRITERIA

Depending on the geographic area, on well characteristics and overall workover
requirements, the following considerations shall be performed:
Type, size and availability of rigs
Well maximum operative depth.
Maximum required over-pull.
Rig move constraints.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.3.2.6 ECONOMICS
Once all above analysis have been done, the following cost indicators shall be put together
and the whole operation evaluated.
Rig costs.
Materials costs.
Service costs.
Transportation costs.
Internal costs.
Sensitivities shall be done with different options, if really applicable.
17.4 WELL OPERATIONS PROGRAMME PREPARATION

The well operations programme shall be prepared in accordance with the following
sequence:
17.4.1 Well Killing

1) Killing Fluid Selection.
2) Well Killing Procedure and Best Practices for:
Killing the well with workover fluid.
Fluid loss control.
Temporary formation plugging.
17.4.1.1 KILLING FLUID SELECTION

There are three important points to be considered:
The packer fluid already present in the well.
The workover planned operating sequence.
The requirement not to damage the formation.
In addition, the following points must be analysed:
a.) Fluids characteristics:

The rheological stability (vs. time and temperature) of the existing packer fluid (especially in
case of heavy fluids) must be analysed, to evaluate its pumpability and its actual hydrostatic
performance in presence of solids settling. The compatibility with the formation fluids and
rocks must be checked through lab analysis. The fluid must also be solid free or the solids
content must be easily removable.
b.) Fluid Density:

The actual reservoir gradient (not the initial one) shall be considered.
A heavier fluid is not only more expensive but it would invade more the near well-bore
(important well losses to be considered with the result of possible damage or production
decrease).
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.4.1.2 WELL KILLING PROCEDURES

Planning sequence for Well Killing.
Analyse the completion configuration and mechanical situation. Determine the
maximum injection pressure required at well head while pumping the killing fluid.
Analyse the last P/T survey to calculate the reservoir pressure gradient and to
determine the killing fluid density.
Analyse the last wire line bottom hole survey to verify the rat hole situation (solids
settling).
Consider the past killing experiences on the same well or on other wells of the
same field.
Plan to utilize viscous pills and/or removable plugging materials as a contingency
plan.
Analyse the formation characteristics and the casing cement bond situation.
Choose the killing fluid.
Perform all wire line surveys before moving the rig to the location.
Preliminary operations for Well Killing.

1) Calculate killing fluid total needed volume by taking into account:
The volume required to fill the well.
The volume below the pump intake in the mud tank.
The volume required for circulating and for emergency.
The volume foreseen for losses related to formation characteristics.
2) Prepare the killing fluid and record the mud pits level. Always start with at least twice
the well volume.
3) Inspect the mud circuit.
4) Verify the perfect efficiency of the mud pump.
5) Rig up and test surface lines.
6) Record well head shut in data (tubing, annulus).
7) Plan to circulate for more than one well cycle to homogenize the killing fluid density.
8) Plan to monitor accurately the level in the pits to check for fluid losses to the formation.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.4.1.3 KILLING SINGLE COMPLETION WITH PACKER

The procedure to be applied depends on the formation permeability.
1) The formation takes fluid:
The killing operation is performed by bullheading a volume of killing fluid equal to
the tubing string plus the volume below packer.
An elevated pumping rate may be required and pump has not to be stopped to
avoid the hydrocarbons slipping up word in the tubing. Install back pressure valve
at well head to prevent gas going back to the pump.
Stop pumping when the killing fluid reaches the perforations. This is indicated by
a sudden increase of the injection pressure.
A static survey before continuing with the programme needs to be done after a
complete well volume has been pumped in. After the static survey, refill the
tubing string to evaluate the contingent fluid loss.
If fluid loss to formation becomes a problem viscous plugging pills shall be
spotted.
At the end of pumping the well head pressure shall be zero.
After packer un-setting, reverse circulate to recover the hydrocarbon pill
remained trapped behind tail pipe, below packer.
2) The formation does not take fluid, or too high injection pumping pressure should be
required at well head:
The annulus level shall be checked and possibly filled up.
The circulation valve ( SSD ) in the tubing string above the packer shall be
opened. If an SSD valve is not present, holes in the tubing string shall be opened
(by tubing puncher) just above the packer.
The tubing filling operation is performed by reverse circulation, by pumping from
the annulus and having the tubings outlet diverted to the flare, through the choke
manifold to maintain enough tubing head back pressure to control the well. The
reverse circulation shall be continued until the killing fluid shows the same in and
out rheological characteristics.
If casing above packer can withstand high pressure, try bullheading the
remaining hydrocarbon (below SSD) to formation.
If casing above packer cannot withstand high pressure, close SSD before trying
bullheading the remaining hydrocarbon.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.4.1.4 KILLING DUAL COMPLETION

1) The formation takes fluid:
The job planning has to take into account the long and short string volumes for
the killing fluid volume preparation.
The killing operation shall be done in bullheading for the long and the short string
(like for the single completion).
Losses shall be monitored accurately because zones could be depleted at
different levels.
2) The formation does not take fluid:

The SSD in the long string, between the two packers, shall be opened. In case
the SSD is missing, use wire line tubing puncher to open a communication with
the casing.
Circulation shall be established long/short string with the outlet to the flare,
through the choke manifold to maintain enough tubing back pressure to control
the well. Continue until the killing fluid has the same in and out rheological
characteristics.
After packer un-setting, wait for hydrocarbon trapped below packer slipping
above circulation point, then reverse circulate annulus/tubing/s to recover the
trapped hydrocarbon.
17.4.1.5 KILLING SINGLE COMPLETION WITHOUT PACKER

The killing operation is done by circulating the killing fluid through the tubing string to the
casing.
Divert casing outlet to flare, through choke manifold, to keep the well under control while
maintaining a convenient annulus head pressure.
The operation shall continue for several cycles until the killing fluid has the same in and out
rheological characteristics.
17.4.1.6 FLUID LOSS CONTROL

It is important to monitor exactly the volume of fluid loss to decide if it can be safely
managed.
1) The killing fluid level has to be maintained at well head filling up continuously to
compensate the volume lost for fluid loss.
2) If the fluid loss quantity cannot be maintained safely and/or economically, it may be
necessary:
To lower the killing fluid density in relation to the actual pore pressure (reservoir
depletion).
To viscosify the killing fluid, if this is possible.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
3) If the well continues to take fluid, then the temporary plugging programme shall be
initiated.
The function of a temporary plugging pill is to plug the permeable formation with
materials that afterwards can be easily removed leaving the formation undamaged
or with minimum damage.
A temporary plugging pill shall have the following characteristics:
Easy pumpability through the production string.
The size of the solid material shall be sorted to allow bridging with the formation.
Bridge should plug only one way.
Bridge shall be easily removable either flowing the well back or with a weak acid
treatment.
4) Carrier Fluid
Shall allow pumping of the plugging material through the tubing string.
Shall allow for short period (2-3 min.) pumping stop without settling of the solid
particles.
5) Bridging Material
The choice of the bridging material shall be done on the basis of:
Type of formation.
Type of permeability (main or secondary permeability).
Type of formation fluids (water, oil, gas or a combination).
Completion configuration and down hole parameters (type of completion,
temperature, pressure etc.).
See parag. 4.7 Completion and Workover fluids and parag. 4.9Lost Circulation herein for
more information on fluids used in a well.
17.4.2 Christmas Tree Removal (X-mas tree)

These general procedures refer to conventional stacked spool wellhead configuration. Single
completion is considered in the following example. It has the tubing made up to tubing
hanger, equipped with metal to metal seal, the best seal system used for high pressure
well.
The lower master valve solid block contains the seal flange for tubing hanger and tubing
spool connection and it is connected to the upper part of the X-mas tree through an API
flange.
The purpose of the following paragraphs is to describe the main steps required for X-mas
tree removal. The procedure may be adopted as a guide for other type of X-mas tree
removal, after applying expedient modifications, if any.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.4.2.1 X-MAS TREE WITH TUBING MADE UP TO TUBING HANGER

The subsurface safety valve (SSSV) has been closed by bleeding off the control
line pressure, after completing the first part of the well killing (bullheading and
killing fluid conditioning by reverse circulation.
The two way back pressure valve has been installed in the tubing hanger.
The X-mas tree and tubing spool valves have been opened to check for pressure
equal zero.
The upper part of the X-mas tree has been disconnected from the lower master
valve.
A lifting sub has been connected to top flange master valve and bolts have been
removed from sealing flange. Seal flange/master valve ready for removing from
top of tubing spool.
The seal flange has been removed. And BOP stack connected to the tubing
spool.
Close blind rams and pressurise against the two ways check valve to test BOP
connection to tubing spool. Pressure test equal to flange working pressure.
Open blind rams and remove back pressure valve from tubing hanger after
checking for pressure below it. Connect working string to tubing hanger,
adjusting its length to have about one meter stretching out above rotary table.
Install wire line lubricator and run in hole tool to lock open the SSSV. Keep the
well under observation to check for pressure to be zero.
Remove wire line equipment, install stabbing valve open on top of working string
and connect to circulation return/choke manifold.
Release tie down from top of tubing hanger. The well is ready for packer
releasing or for tubing disconnection from packer.
Be ready to reverse circulation to recover down hole trapped hydrocarbon.
After reverse circulation and convenient static conditions observation, the well is
ready for completion pulling out of hole.
17.4.3 Completion Pull Out

The following example of procedures, for pulling the completion out of hole (POOH), reports
the main steps only. Use these procedures as a guide for other programmes preparation,
applying modifications where suggested by the actual situation of the well to be workovered.
The following types of wells are used as reference:
Single completion with retrievable packer.
Single completion with retainer packer.
Dual completion.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.4.3.1 SINGLE COMPLETION WITH RETRIEVABLE PACKER
1) Packer un-setting:
Calculate the string weight considering the buoyancy factor.
Add shear value of packer releasing mechanism accounting for shear ring max
shear value including span.
Add frictions due to the deviation.
Include in the calculation a convenient tubing pull reduction to account for wear
of tubular (corrosion) based on field historical data.
If the calculation results exceed the pull capacity of the tubing, a contingency
procedure to cut the tubing string above the packer should be considered. In this
case the packer will be released by using a work-string, after POOH the
completion string.
2) Procedure to POOH:
Wellhead and BOP stack, including tie down releasing, are ready as per previous
parag. 17.4.2.1.
Unset the packer by pulling on the string (apply the pull above calculated), and
continue the POOH slowly, checking that the weight read on the Martin Decker is
close to the theoretical value,
After ten feet stop pulling and perform a static survey.
Close BOP (annular) and reverse circulate at least twice the well volume
monitoring the possible hydrocarbon cushions and continue until the in and out
rheological properties of the fluid are the same. Divert hydrocarbon to flare.
Perform static survey.
If the well still flows, increase the killing fluid density according to residual shut in
pressure and repeat fluid conditioning operation.
If the well takes fluid, spot to bottom hole a viscosified cushions or a temporary
plugging pill.
Perform static survey again. If the check has positive result, start POOH.
Pull the Tubing Hanger above the rotary table and break down its connection.
Make up additional tubing and run in hole the completion string, adding tubing, to
circulate as closest as possible to the perforations.
Close BOP and reverse circulate thorough choke to control the rat-hole
hydrocarbon cushions.
Perform static survey again. If the check has positive result, start POOH.
POOH the completion string, monitoring the trip tank level.
Store the tubing in lengths in the derrick, in case of carbon steel tubing, or lay
down each single tubing in case of CRA material. Install thread protection.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.4.3.2 SINGLE COMPLETION WITH PERMANENT PACKER

The calculation of the string weight must be made as per the above parag. 17.4.3.1.
With this type of completion it will not be possible to run the completion string to the
perforations, after breaking down the tubing hanger. Use procedures reported in parag.
17.4.3.1herein, if bullheading problems take place while killing the well. After disconnecting
the tubing from the packer and workover fluid static conditions have been confirmed, the
POOH sequence operation shall be the same as per parag. 17.4.3.1.
The following tubing-packer connection are now considered:
Snap latch
The Snap Latch releasing from the packer usually requires less pull than the one needed for
the shear element of a retrievable packer. The packer will be recovered later by milling tool
operation.
Anchor latch (left hand connector)

In case of left hand connector, it will be released from the packer by right hand rotation.
Before doing this, the condition of slight pull on the packer should be created while turning
the string to the right. Check in the last completion report for the turn and pull force required
to pull-rotate the string considering the dog leg and the frictions tubing-casing. Practically the
slight pull on the packer may be determined by knowing the weight of the string existing
before packer setting during the actual completion to be POOH. The packer will be
recovered later by milling tool operation.
Standard Locator (free up word movement allowed)

Unless the sealing system is stuck, the standard locator will be retrieved from packer by
straight pull. The packer will be recovered later by milling tool operation.
17.4.3.3 DUAL COMPLETION

The dual completions are generally made by using retrievable dual packers. Consider the
following main steps to POOH the completion:
Pull the completion strings by the dual elevator to release all the packers, if they
are all retrievable, or release the upper one (the dual) and pull off the locator
from the lower packer,
If all packers are retrievable, they should release together. Then the two strings
should be run with the tail pipe as close to the perforations as possible to reverse
circulate hydrocarbon from bottom before POOH.
In case of failure to retrieve, tubing will need to be cut. Depending on packer type
installed, cut one tubing (the one which possibly does not collaborate to
retrieving) as close to packer top as possible; cut the second one at a sufficient
length above the packer to allow for (playing with the tubing elasticity to move it
towards the centre of the casing) next fishing operation by working string and
overshot.
After packers un-setting and workover fluid static conditions have been confirmed, the
POOH sequence operation shall be the same as per parag. 17.4.3.1.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.4.4 Partialization - Level Change
17.4.4.1 PARTIALIZATION
Partialization may become necessary when the formation starts to produce undesired fluids
like water, gas from an oil bearing zone or sand.
The phenomenon may be due to changes in reservoir conditions, such as:
Reservoir depletion.
Inefficient casing cement bond.
Wrong perforations placement.
The occurring phenomena could be identified by:

Water coning that may be identified by means of PLT/TDT log survey.
Gas coning, that may be identified by means of PLT/TDT-NGS log survey.
Possible remedial actions

1) Water coning in open hole:
Performing a sand or cement plug by coiled tubing.
Installing a plug (electrically inflated and dumping cement ) by electrical wire line
system.
Running and cementing a liner to cover the zone through a heavy workover. Re-
perforation will be required.
2) Gas coning in open hole:

Injection of chemical pills (silicates) by bullheading through coiled tubing.
Silicates should preferentially enter the gas zone (less injection friction loss and
block gas production). Excess of silicate shall be cleaned by a coiled tubing run
motor driven milling tool.
Running and cementing a liner to cover the zone through a heavy workover. Re-
perforation will be required.
3) Water or Gas coning in cased Hole, through Tubing Operation:

For the same cases mentioned above (gas/water coning) a typical intervention
can be done by wire line ( slick or electrical ), coiled tubing or pulling unit. In
addition casing patch system can be used.
Before attempting any operation, tubing needs to be cleaned and gauged.
Tubing scales, deposits can be removed by means of coiled tubing to operate
turbine and mill by using a viscosified brine as carrying fluid.
Besides the remedial job illustrated for the cased hole, it is also possible to
perform cement squeeze of perforations. The operation has a very high risk of
getting stuck with the coiled tubing and shall be prepared with great accuracy.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
4) Intervention with Service Workover Rig or Pulling Unit:

This case is classified as heavy workover and requires the completion string
POOH.
The utilized tools are all run on drill pipe or heavy tubing. The well is cleaned with
bit and scraper and workover fluid conditioned.
In this case, the possible alternatives are:
- Cement squeeze the producing interval either in bullheading (low pressure)
without cement retainer or with a cement retainer (high pressure). A
retrievable bridge plug to isolate the lowermost perforations may be used, if
the squeeze is done in a top zone.
- Heavy casing patch may be used to isolate a selected interval.
17.4.4.2 LEVEL CHANGE

Level change becomes necessary when the actual producing level is depleted (no longer
economical) or too much water is produced.
Exploitation of an upper level:
a) In case of a selective completion, single or dual, the production starting of an
upper level is done by opening a SSD with a wireline operation and, if necessary,
excluding the lower level by closing the lowermost SSD.
b) In case of not selective completions, a lower zone can be excluded to production
by wire line or coiled tubing operation, i.e. by setting a trough tubing Bridge Plug
(retainer, retrievable or cement inflated). Afterwards, perforation of the upper
zone can be done by through tubing guns (wire line or coiled tubing conveyed).
Exploitation of a lower zone:
In case a lower zone needs to be opened, normally it is necessary to POOH the completion:
As a first attempt, the upper zone can be squeezed off,
Other opportunity is to use a casing patch (that will reduce the casing ID of 1/8,
forcing to use a reduced gage ring OD in case packer below casing patch is
required).
In the event also the casing patch cannot be installed, pack off of the level
between packers can be realized.
New lower zone can be opened.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.4.5 Remedial Job Tools and Techniques
17.4.5.1 TROUGH TUBING BRIDGE PLUG.

Through tubing Bridge Plugs exist in different shapes available from different manufacturers.
They are utilized to exclude the water zones without pulling out the completion. They act as
an umbrella to support the cement dumped with a wire line tool (dump bailer); a timer keeps
a bypass open for the cement setting.
Also Inflatable Bridge Plugs are available which can be run through tubing without killing the
well.
They can be run and set by:
Wire line and inflated with the workover fluid.
Coiled tubing and inflated by pumping through the coiled tubing itself.
17.4.5.2 SAND PLUG.

It can be done by pumping a pill of slurry, composed by gel and sands of different size,
through coiled tubing.
Sand plugs are usually spotted on top of packer plugs to allow for operations to be done
above which could generate settling debris (perforations). They can be easily washed out by
using viscous fluids.
17.4.5.3 CASING PATCH

The casing patch is a metallic rippled cylinder, dressed externally with epoxy resins, it is
used for size from 2 7/ 8" to 13 3/ 8".
The reduction of the casing ID, when casing patch is swaged, is of 0.3" for standard liner, or
0.48" for a heavy weight liner. The standard section length of the casing patch is 40 ft, and
they can be welded (Tungsten Inert Gas type) to obtain the required length which can also
be racked.
The heavy weight version has 3500 psi differential collapse pressure. The casing patch can
be run and set by drill pipe, coiled tubing and electrical wire line.
17.4.5.4 CEMENT SQUEEZE

The following problems can be indicative of squeeze operation needs:
Remedial job to restore casing cement primary bond.
Water shut off of water coming from below the hydrocarbon bearing zone.
GOR reduction, isolating the gas cap from the oil.
Not economically producing zones abandonment.
Isolation of zones where fluid loss is important.
In general terms, despite being widely used for above operations, squeeze operations are
very rarely completely successful even when accurately planned, since they are dependant
on a variety of external occurring simultaneous conditions.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
However they are frequently done in formation not well known from petrography point of view
so that volume determination, real cement path during injection and thickening time are
frequently guess parameters. For these reasons it is always better when it is required a
perfect hydraulic seal, to look for alternative pack-off solutions to be installed as a back up.
17.4.6 Fishing and Milling

Fishing and milling are two different sides of the same coin. Both operations require a great
deal of experience since they generally do not respond to engineering criteria. In fact even
specialized Service Companies rely more on their operators experience than on detailed
engineering, since it is quite difficult to transfer surface parameters to down hole conditions
which are often affected by load non conformities and tools vibrations.
For both activities the main parameters to be considered and procedures to put in place are
here following listed. Some of them need to be stressed more or less, depending on the
geographic operative location, since fishing equipment is not always worldwide available.
Well safety may become a problem, since it is possible to get in situation with the
fishing/milling string stuck at the bottom.
Type and metallurgy of completion components (Special care with CRA
materials).
Type of workover fluid which in these applications act as the milling cooling
media besides needing carry over capacity.
Exact well diameters envelope (to select proper shoes, overshot etc.).
Max pull dictated by string age and past operating conditions.
Exact down hole equipment measured reference depths.
Fishing tool availability.
Try to anticipate needs looking ahead and planning for contingencies.
Call for skilled personnel.
Plan any single operation, critically examining the specialist recommended
procedures.
Always plan for a correct number of spare jars, accelerators, bumper sub etc..
In case of a heavy fishing job, plan for having available a Reversing Tool.
Plan to have wide tools availability.
List of analysis to be carried over during operations:

Record any parameter, especially the abnormal ones.
Each time a new fishing battery is run, record and sketch carefully all dimensions
(lengths, OD, ID, Irregular shapes, special tools etc.).
Examine carefully tools coming out of the well for wear indication (abnormal, non
expected ruptures, cutting inserts not working etc.).
Examine carefully broken tool edges to plan for next best fishing assembly.
Pay attention to always provide safety joints and fishing capabilities of any new
run battery not to worsen the initial scenario.
When milling packers (Especially CRA ones) pay extreme attention not to insist
when no progress is made, to avoid causing a glass type surface which later can
be very difficult to attack.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.4.6.1 FISHING
Intervention that has the purpose to free the well from tools that for various reasons block
the well operability; the tools to be fished could have been lost for many reasons. Examples
may be:
a) Wire line tools/wire lost during wire line operations. In this case, the first
intervention is always done by wire line itself and in more serious cases by coiled
tubing.
b) Section of tubing/down hole equipment lost and/or broken during POOH.
c) Damaged section of corroded casing, or worn off by repeated operations done
inside.
Cases b and c always require a service rig or a pulling unit.
See next pages for an overview of the main tools used for workover operations.
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Figure 17-1 Figure 17-2 Figure 17-3

bowen surface bumper jar jar description packer retriever
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Figure 17-4 Figure 17-5 Figure 17-6 Figure 17-7

Internal cutter Internal cutter junk mill junk mill with
circulating system
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Figure 17-8 Figure 17-9 Figure 17-10
junk basket knukle joint Releasing and circulating overshot

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Figure 17-11 Figure 17-12
Junk mill & Taper mill drill pipe safety joint

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
17.4.6.2 MILLING
This activity has the purposes to eliminate the cement plugs or the tools set in the well which
either are not retrievable or which failed to retrieve (i.e. packers, cement retainer) or to
prepare the fish head before starting a fishing job.
Next figures show samples of milling tools.
Figure 17-13
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Figure 17-14
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Appendix A - Report Forms

A.1. Initial Activity Report (ARPO 01)
INITIAL ACTIVITY WELL NAME
FIELD NAME
District/Affiliate Company
DATE:
REPORT ARPO 01 Cost center
Permit/Concession N Well Code
General Data Depth Above S.L . Joint venture

On shore Off shore Ground Level[m] AGIP: % %
Latitude: Water Depth [m] % %
Longitude Rotary Table Elev.[m] % %
Reference First Flange[m] Type of Operation

Rig Name Top housing [m]
Rig Type Reference Rig Program TD (Measured) [m]

Contractor Ref. Rig RKB - 1st Flange Program TD (Vertical) [m]
Rig Heading [] Cellar Pit Rig Pump

Offset FROM the proposed location Depth [m] Manufacturer
Distance [m] Length [m] Type
Direction [] Width [m]: Liner avaible [in]
Major Contractors
Type of Service Company Contract N Type of Service Company Contract N
Mud Logging
D. & C. Fluids
Cementation
Waste treatment
Operating Time Jack-up leg Penetration Supply Vessel for Positioning

Moving [gg:hh] Leg Air gap Penetration N Name Horse Bollard pull
Positioning [hh:min] N [m] [m] Power [t]
Anchorage [hh:min]
Rig-up [hh:min]
Delay [hh:min]
Lost-time Accidents [hh:min]
Rig Anchorage
Anchor Mooring Line Piggy Back Mooring Line Tension Operative Total
Bow Weight Length Weight Chain Cable [Tested] Tension Time
N Angle Type & Manufacturer [t] Cable Chain N [t] Length Length [t] [t] [hh:min]
[m] [m] [m] [mm] [m] [mm]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Note: Supervisor
Superintendent
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
A.2. Daily Report (ARPO 02)
DAILY REPORT WELL NAME
Completion - Work Over FIELD NAME

DATE: ARPO 02 Modified Cost center
Completion Work Over Well Code Report N of
Rig Name Well Type RT Elevation [m]

Type of Rig Well Drilled On Ground Lelel / Water Depth [m]
Contractor Last Intervention Date RT - 1st flange [m]
Well Head BOP Type w.p. [psi] Costs Daily Cumulative
Type Stack Rig
W.P. [psi] Diverter Service
Production casing Annular Materials
nom. [inch] Annular Logistic
ID [inch] Upper Rams
Steel Grade Middle Rams Personnel Boarding Leaving
Thickness [lb/ft] Middle Rams Agip
Top [m] Middle Rams Rig
Bottom [m] Lower Rams Others
Top cmt [m] Last Test Total
From [hr] To [hr] OP. Code OPERATION DESCRIPTION
Operations at 07:00
Mud Situation Visc. [s/l] Mud in pits Additives Losses

Mud Type Cl- / O/W [g/l] Daily [m3]
Density [kg/l] pH / ES Progr. [m3]
Contractor Type of Service Working Stand by Arrived on Loc. Left Loc. Daily Service Cumulative Serv.
Hours Hours Date Hour Date Hour Cost Cost
Stock Quantity UM Stock Quantity UM Supervisor:

Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
A.3. Cementing Job Report (ARPO 04B)
CEMENTING JOB WELL NAME
REPORT FIELD NAME
DATE: ARPO-04 / B Cost center
Operation type [in] Stage / No.:
SQUEEZE / PLUG
Type Length [m] Cap.[ l/m] Bottom [m] Cement retainer Manufacturer Model / Type De
Squeeze packer [inch] [m
Injectivity Test with: Pump Rate Testing Pr. Tot. Vol. Final Sqz Pr. Returns V
2 2
[l/min] [kg/cm ] pumped [l] [kg/cm ] [l]
2
Test [kg/cm ] [mins]
Stinger Pressure test
Annular pressure
CEMENTATION
2
Operation (y/n) [kg/cm ] [mins]
Casing Reciprocation Bump Plug Casing testing pressure
Casing Rotation Valve holding Annulus pressurization
Inner string
GENERAL DATA
3
Slurry Displacement To Surface Losses [m ]
With pumps Density pH Dumped During csg run

3
Fluid type: [kg/l] [m ] Circulation
3
Volume [m ] Mud Mix/Pump Slurry
Density: [kg/l] Spacer Displacement
Duration: [mins] Slurry Opening DV
2
Final pressure: [kg/cm ] Circ. through DV
Total
Circulation / Displacement / Squeeze
Time [mins.] Flow Rate Pressure Total Volume Operation Description Final Press. Retur
2 2
Partial Progr. [l/min] [kg/cm ] [l] [kg/cm ] Vol.
Supervisor Superintendent
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
A.4. Waste Report (ARPO 6)
WASTE DISPOSAL WELL NAME
Management Report FIELD NAME

DATE: ARPO-06 Cost center
Report[m]
From N Depth
Interval(m)
Drilled (m) Mud Type
Density (kg/l)
3
To [m] Drilled Volume [m ] Cl- concentration (g/l )
3
Phase size [in] Cumulative volume [m ]
3 3
Water consumption Phase /Period [m ] Cumulative [m ]
Usage Fresh water Recycled Total Fresh water Recycled Total
Mixing Mud
Others
Total
3 3
Readings / Truck Fresh water [m ] Recycled [m ]
3
Mud Volume [m ] Phase Cumulative Service Company Contract N
Mixed Mud Company
Lost Waste Disposal
Dumped Transportation
Transported IN
Transported OUT
Waste Disposal Period Cumulative Remarks
Water base cuttings [t]
Oil base cuttings [t]
Dried Water base cuttings [t]
Dried oil base cuttings [t]
Water base mud [t]
Oil base mud transported IN [t]
Oil base mud transported OUT [t]
Drill potable water [t]
Dehidrated water base mud [t]
Dehidrated oil base mud [t]
Sewage water [t]
Transported Brine [t]
Remarks
Supervisor
Superintendent
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
A.5. Perforating Report (ARPO 07)
PERFORATING WELL NAME
District/Affiliate Company REPORT FIELD NAME
Well location Formation name: Pool:

Onshore Lithology
Offshore
Total Depth [m] Rotary Table Measurement [m] Final Completion Report [date]
st
Well Type M.D. Drilling Rig RKB - 1 Flange Final Workover Report [date]
st
Vertical T.V.D. Workover Rig RKB - 1 Flange Reference Logs:
Deviated Max. inclination [] Workover Rig RKB - Sea Level
Horizontal at [m] Workover Rig RKB - Sea Bottom Recorded on:
Well Size [] Steel Thickness Measured Depth Vertical Depth Cement Top
Situation Grade [lb/ft] Top [m] Bottom [m] Top [m] Bottom [m] M.D. [m] T.V.D. [m]
Liner
Casing
Casing
Tubing Service Company
Packer
Tubing shoe
Perforation System
Wireline Overbalance Completion fluid Density [kg/l]
TCP Underbalance Fluid in front of Perforation Density [kg/l]
Thru Tubing Differential Pressure [kg/cm2] Fluid Losses after Perforation [m3]
Data Gun Gun Gun Charge S.P.F Measured Depth Vertical Depth Pool Remarks
Type Specific. Type Top [m] Bottom [m] Top [m] Bottom [m]
Note:
Supervisor Superintendent
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
A.6. Gravel Pack Report (ARPO 08)
GRAVEL PACK
PERFORATING WELL NAME
District/Affiliate Company REPORT FIELD NAME
Well Location Reservoir Parameter Formation name:

Onshore Reservoir fluid Lithology:
Offshore Density [Kg/l] Pool: Layer :
Well Type Viscosity [Cps]

y [pp ] [ ]Production casing p[ ] Perforation
[ ] [p ]
Dev. >30 Pay Zone Inclination [] Weight [lb/ft]
Hor. > 80 Porosity [%] Shoe M.D. [m]
Type of job Net Pay (VD) [m] N/G [%] Shoe T.V.D.[m]
OHGP SBHT [C] at m Fluid losses Drilling Underreaming After Perforating After Back Surging
ICGP SBHP [kg/cm2] at m Losses [m3/h]
F&P Permeability [mD] Total [m3]
TTGP to [ ] HC [ ] Brine Losses Control LCM Volume [m3]
Well data Pilot hole Underreamed Caliper Gravel Annulus Pad Carrier Displa- Well Schetch
min Fluids cement
Top [m] max Name / Salt
Bottom [m] med Density [Kg/l]
Fluid Drilling Underream Completion Visc. [Cp]

Type Polymer
Dens. [Kg/l] [ p ] Concentr.[[pptg]
]
Y.P. NTU Breaker Type
Circulation test Name

RCP Pann 0.00 P psi at Q bpm Concentr. [pptg]
BOP Pann 0.00 P psi at Q bpm Completion assembly
open Pann 0.00 P psi at Q bpm Tools Type Size I.D. From To
Pann 0.00 P psi at Q bpm [inch] [inch] [m] [m]
RCP Pann P psi at Q bpm
BOP Pann P psi at Q bpm
closed Pann P psi at Q bpm
Pann P psi at Q bpm
UCP Pann P psi at Q bpm
Pann P psi at Q bpm
MCP Pann P psi at Q bpm
Pann P psi at Q bpm
LCP Pann P psi at Q bpm
Pann P psi at Q bpm
Gravel Pack operation

S. Tool Fluid Gravel Flow rate [bpm] Time Remarks:
Position Type [ppa] IN OUT [hh:mm]
Gravel Packing Details Comments:

Gravel Type: ASCII files: Content
Gravel Size: [US mesh] #1
Total Gravel left in hole: [lb] #2
Gravel injected into the formation: [lb/ft] #3
Gravel volume reversed out: [lb] #4
Top Gravel [Log] : [m] #5
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
A.7. Matrix Stimulation Report (ARPO 09)
MATRIX STIMULATION WELL NAME
HYDRAULIC FRACTURING FIELD NAME

DATE: ARPO - 09 Cost center
Well Location General Data Interval to be Treated
Onshore M.D. [m] Open hole Tot. net perf.:
Offshore T.V.D. [m] Perfor. interval Formation name:
Well Type Open hole Slotted liner
Vertical Prod. casing / liner From [m] Pool:
Deviated Shoe M.D. [m] To [m] Lithology:
Horizontal Top liner [m]
Treatment Type Reservoir Parameters Treatment Data Completion Data
Matrix stimulation Reservoir fluid Service Company Bottom hole gauge [Y / N]
Acid Density [Kg/l] HHP avaible Type
Solvent Gradient [Kg/cm2/10 m.] Initial Shut-in pressure [psi] Wellhead type
Other Fracturing gradient [calculated] Annulus pressure [psi] Packer type
Hydraulic Fracturing Fracturing gradient [tested] Pressure test [psi] Packer fluid
Foam Porosity % Max. injection rate [bpm] Density
Water base SBHT [C] at m Max. injection pressure [psi] Fluid in well at operation beginning
Oil base SBHP [kg/cm2] at m Pumping time [min]
Other Pumping time [min] String O.D. [in]
Acid Fracturing Main Frac Treatment Equipment String capacity [l]
Acid Proppant type: Coiled Tubing [Y / N] Packer - Top perforation Volume [l]
Gelled acid API Mesh Size
Acid + Gel Amount of Propant [t] Stimulation vessel / Other equipment
Other Total Frac Fluid Vol. [m3]
Operation Description
Fluid Fluid Schedule
3
Ref. Fluid Type Fluid Composition Density [kg/l] Mixed Volume [m ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Pumping Parameter
Circulated
N Starting Pumping Volume Progr. Progr.Vol. Proppant Initial Final Injection Casing Notes
Injected
Fluid Time Rate Volume Entering in Concentr. Press. Press. Index Press.
Formation
Ref. [bbl/1'] [m3] [m3] [lb/gal] [psi] [psi] [bbl/day/psi] [psi]
Notes / Remarks:
Supervisor
Superintendent
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
A.8. Well Problem Report (ARPO 13)
WELL PROBLEM FIELD NAME
District/Affiliate Company REPORT WELL NAME
DATE: ARPO -13 Cost center
Problem Top [m] Start date

Code Bottom [m] End date
Well Measured Depth Vertical Depth KOP [m] Mud in hole

Situation Top [m] Bottom [m] Top [m] Bottom [m] Max inclination [] Type
Open hole @m Dens.[kg/l]:
Last casing DROP OFF [m]
Well problem Description
Solutions Applied: Results Obtained:
Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor
Remarks at District level:
Superintendent
Lost Time hh:mm Loss value [in currency]
Remarks at HQ level Pag.

Of
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
A.9. Malfunction & Failure Report (FB-1)
MALFUNCTION & FAILURE REPORT

(FEED BACK REPORT 01)
District/Subsidiary
Report Date:
Well Name: Well Code:
General Information
Contract No: Contract Type: Contractor:
Service/Supply:
Drilling Completion Workover Duration Dates of Failure: Distributed By:
RIG SITE
Description of Failure:
Drilling & Completions Company Man:

Adopted or Suggested Solution(s):
Contractor Contingency Measures:
Contractor Representative:
DISTRICT OR SUBSIDIARY NOTES:
Failure Classification Status Operations Manager:

Technical Normal
Management/Organisation Extreme Time Lost:
Safety/Quality Innovative
Adverse Estimated Cost of Failure:
MILAN HEAD OFFICE NOTES:
Analysis Code:
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
A.10. Contractor Evaluation (FB-2)
CONTRACTOR EVALUATION
(FEED BACK REPORT 02)
District/Subsidiary
Report Date:
Well Name: Well Code:
General Information
Contract No.: Contract Type: Contractor:
Service/Supply: Distributed By:
R1 Technical Requirements
FB_01 REPORT REFERENCES
FB Report No.: Time Lost (Hr.Min): Economic Cost (M):
Category Evaluation Score (0-9)
Suitability of Equipment and Materials
Compliance of Equipment and Materials to the
Adequacy of Personnel
Meeting with Operational Programme Requirements
Meeting with Contract Operation Timings
Equipment Condition/Maintenance
R2 Management and Organisational Requirements
Availability of Equipment and Materials
Technical and Operational Support to Operations
Capability and Promptness to Operational Requests
R3 Safety and Quality Assurance Requirements
Meeting with the Contract Agreement DSS
Availability and Validity of Requested Certificates
Meeting with Contract Quality Assurance Terms
Event Support Documentation
Type of Subject: Issued By: Date:
Document:
Notes:
Failure Status Operations Manager Well Operations Manager

Normal Extreme Adverse Innovative
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Appendix B - ABBREVIATIONS
AC/DC Alternate Current, Direct Current
AHTS Anchor Handling Towing Supply
API American Petroleum Institute
BG Background gas
BHA Bottom Hole Assembly
BHP Bottom Hole Pressure
BHT Bottom Hole temperature
BJ Blast Joint
BMT Blue Methylene Test
BOP Blow Out Preventer
BPD Barrel Per Day
BPM Barrels Per Minute
BPV Back Pressure Valve
BSW Base Sediment and Water
BUR Build Up Rate
BWOC By Weight Of Cement
BWOW By Weight Of Water
C/L Control Line
CBL Cement Bond Log
CCD Centre to Centre Distance
CCL Casing Collar Locator
CDP Common Depth Point
CET Cement Evaluation Tool
CGR Condensate Gas Ratio
CMT Cement
CP Conductor Pipe
CR Cement Retainer
CRA Corrosion Resistant Alloy
CSG Casing
C/T Coiled Tubing
CW Current Well
DC Drill Collar
DE Diatomaceous Earth
DHM Down Hole Motor
DHSV Down Hole Safety Valve
DIF Drill in Fluid
DLP Dog Leg Potential
DLS Dog Leg Severity
DOB Diesel Oil Bentonite
DOBC Diesel Oil Bentonite Cement
DOR Drop Off Rate
DP Drill Pipe
DPHOT Drill Pipe Hang off Tool
DRLG Drilling
DST Drill Stem Test
DV DV Collar
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
E/L Electric Line

ECD Equivalent Circulation Density
ECP External Casing Packer
EMS Electronic Multi Shot
EMW Equivalent Mud Weight
EOC End Of Curvature
EP External Pressure
ESD Electric Shut-Down System
ESP Electrical Submersible Pump
ETA Expected Arrival Time
ETU Endless Tubing Unit
FBHP Flowing Bottom Hole Pressure
FBHT Flowing Bottom Hole Temperature
FC Flow Coupling
FINS Ferranti International Navigation System
FPI/BO Free Point Indicator / Back Off
FTHP Flowing Tubing Head Pressure
FTHT Flowing Tubing Head Temperature
GCT Guidance Continuous Tool
GLR Gas Liquid Ratio
GLS Guidelineless Landing Structure
GMS Gyro Multi Shot
GOC Gas Oil Contact
GOR Gas Oil Ratio
GP Gravel Pack
GPM Gallon (US) per Minute
GPS Global Positioning System
GR Gamma Ray
GRA Guidelines Re-Entry Assembly
GSS Gyro Single Shot
HAZOP Hazard and Operability
HDT High Resolution Dipmeter
HHP Hydraulic Horsepower
HO Hole Opener
HP/HT High Pressure - High Temperature
HSI Horsepower per Square Foot
HW/HWDP Heavy Weight Drill Pipe
IADC International Drilling Contractor
IBOP Inside Blow Out Preventer
ICGP Inside Casing Gravel Packing
ID Inside Diameter
IFR Imposta Fabbricazione Ridotta
IP Internal Pressure
IPR Inflow Performance Relationship
JAM Joint Make-up Torque Analyser
KMW Kill Mud Weight
KOP Kick Off Point
L/D Lay Down
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
L/S Long String

LAT Lowest Astronomical Tide
LC 50 Lethal Concentration 50%
LCDT Last Crystal to Dissolve oC
LCM Lost Circulation Materials
LCP Lower Circulation Position (GP)
LEL Lower Explosive Limit
LMRP Low Marine Riser Package
LN Landing Nipple
LOT Leak Off Test
LQC Log Quality Control
LTA Lost Time Accident
LTT Lower Tell Table (GP)
LWD Log While Drilling
M/D Martin Decker
M/U Make Up
MAASP Max Allowable Annular Surface Pressure
MD Measured Depth
MLH Mudline Hanger
MLS Mudline Suspension
MMS Magnetic Multi Shot
MODU Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit
MOP Margin of Overpull
MPI Magnetic Particle Inspection
MSCL Modular Single Completion Land
MSL Mean Sea Level
MSS Magnetic Single Shot
MUT Make up Torque
MW Mud Weight
MWD Measurement While Drilling
N/D Nipple Down
N/U Nipple Up
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NB Near Bit Stabiliser
NDT Non Destructive Test
NMDC Non Magnetic Drill Collar
NSG North Seeking Gyro
NTU Nephelometric Turbidity Unit
OBM Oil Base Mud
OD Outside Diameter
OEDP Open End Drill Pipe
OH Open Hole
OHGP Open Hole Gravel Packing
OIM Offshore Installation Manager
OMW Original Mud weight
ORP Origin Reference Point
OWC Oil Water Contact
P&A Plugged & Abandoned
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
P/U Pick up
PBR Polished Bore Receptacle
PCG Pipe Connection Gas
PDC Polycrystalline Diamond Cutter
PDM Positive Displacement Motor
PGB Permanent Guide Base
PI Productivity Index
PKR Packer
PLT Production Logging Tool
POB Personnel On Board
POOH Pull Out Of Hole
PPB Pounds per Barrel
PPG Pounds per Gallon
ppm Part Per Million
PTR Piano Tavola Rotary
PV Plastic Viscosity
PVT Pressure Volume Temperature
Q Flow Rate
Q/A Q/C Quality Assurance, Quality Control
R/D Rig down
R/U Rug up
RBP Retrievable Bridge Plug
RCP Reverse Circulating Position
RFT Repeat Formation Test
RIH Run In Hole
RJ Ring Joint
RKB Rotary Kelly Bushing
ROE Radius of Exposure
ROP Rate Of Penetration
ROU Radios Of Uncertainty
ROV Remote Operated Vehicle
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
RPSP Reduced Pump Strokes
RT Rotary Table
S (HDT) High Resolution Dipmeter
S/N Serial Number
SBHP Static Bottom Hole Pressure
SBHT Static Bottom Hole Temperature
SCC Stress Corrosion Cracking
SD Separation Distance
SDE Senior Drilling Engineer
SF Safety Factor
SG Specific Gravity
SICP Shut-in Casing Pressure
SIDPP Shut-in Drill Pipe Pressure
SIMOP Simultaneous Operations
SPM Stroke per Minute
SR Separation Ratio
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
SRG Surface Readout Gyro

SSC Sulphide Stress Cracking
ST Steering Tool
STG Short trip gas
TCP Tubing Conveyed Perforations
TD Total Depth
TFA Total Flow Area
TG Trip Gas
TGB Temporary Guide Base
TOC Top of Cement
TOL Top of Liner
TVD True Vertical Depth
TW Target Well
UAR Uncertainty Area Ratio
UGF Universal Guide Frame
UR Under Reamer
VBR Variable Bore Rams (BOP)
VDL Variable Density Log
VSP Velocity Seismic Profile
W/L Wire Line
WBM Water Base Mud
WC Water Cut
WL Water Loss
WOB Weight On Bit
WOC Wait On Cement
WOM Well Operations Manager
WOW Wait On Weather
WP Working Pressure
YP Yield Point
Eni S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7120 0 1
Appendix C - BIBLIOGRAPHY
Document: STAP Number
Drilling Procedures Manual STAP-P-1-M-6140
Completion Design Manual STAP-P-1-M-7100
Drilling Fluids Operations Manual STAP-P-1-M-6160
Well Control Policy Manual STAP-P-1-M-6150
Well Test Procedures Manual STAP-P-1-M-7130
General Wireline Procedures Manual STAP-P-1-M-7110
Other
API Specification No 811-05CT5
API Recommended Practices 5A5
API Recommended Practices 5C1
API Bulletin 5A3

Eni Completion Procedures Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Eni Completion Procedures Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

S P E O ORGANIZING TYPE OF ISSUING DOC. REF. N. PAG.

E&P Division OF 269

Eni E & P Division Italian District

NOTE: The present document is available in Eni-E&P Intranet (http://wwwdsc.in.agip.it/drilling/)

Date of issue: 30-06-2003

$ P. Magarini C. Lanzetta F. Trilli

REVISIONS PREP'D CHK'D APPR'D

The present document is CONFIDENTIAL and it is the property of Eni.

4.6 Displacement Of Water Based Muds 30

5.7.4.3 Coiled tubing electronic firing head 58

6. GRAVEL PACKING PROCEDURES 62

8.4.2 SUB-SURFACE SAFETY VALVES 84

9. GAS LIFT INSTALLATION 102

10. DOWNHOLE PUMP INSTALLATION 106

10.3.2 TURBINE PUMP 118

11. SUBSEA COMPLETIONS 119

12. WELL UNLOADING 157

13. COILED TUBING OPERATIONS 160

13.4.1 EQUIPMENT PREPARATION AND SITING 163

14. NITROGEN PROCEDURES 173

15. FORMATION DAMAGE AND INTERVENTION PROCEDURES 181

15.3 DIAGNOSIS OF FORMATION DAMAGE. 186

16. SNUBBING/PULLING UNIT 216

16.6 Snubbing Unit Rig up Procedures 220

17. WORKOVER 230

17.4.5.3 Casing Patch 245

APPENDIX A (Reporting Forms) 254

APPENDIX B (Abbreviations) 264

APPENDIX C (Bibliography) 269

1.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

1.3 UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION

2.1 WELL OPERATIONS MANAGER

2.2 WELL OPERATIONS SUPERINTENDENT

Administering service contracts, providing the technical control of contractor

2.3 COMPLETION AND WORKOVER ENGINEER

2.4 FLUIDS SPECIALIST

2.5 OFFSHORE INSTALLATION MANAGER (OIM)

2.6 WELL OPERATIONS SUPERVISOR

2.7 PRODUCTION SUPERVISOR

3.1 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

3.2 WELLSITE REPORTS

3.3 FEED BACK REPORTS

Refer to Appendix A page 254 for copies of appropriate reports.

3.4 OTHER REPORTS

3.5 PERMIT PROCEDURES

3.5.1 Guidance For Permits

3.6 WELL HANDOVER PROCEDURES

3.6.1 Well Handover Certificate

Production the well status should be outlined as below:

3.6.2 Well Intervention Handover Certificate

WELL HANDOVER CERTIFICATE

SAFETY VALVE DETAILS

TUBING PLUG DETAILS

figure3-1- Example Handover Certificate

XMAS TREE DETAILS

All Production/Operations equipment removed from area ? Y/N

Authorised By: Production/Operations

WELL INTERVENTION HANDOVER CERTIFICATE

BARRIERS REQUIRED BARRIERS REMOVED (SITE TIDY)

SAFETY VALVE DETAILS

XMAS TREE DETAILS

DOWNHOLE TUBING DETAILS